Mpecs 2016 PDF

Curriculum: MPECS-2013: Diploma in Mechanical Engineering
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC,
KOLHAPUR
(An Autonomous Institute of Government of Maharashtra)
Curriculum Document
CURRICULUM : MPECS-2013
for
DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Secretary Chairman
Programmewise Board of Studies (PBOS)

Mechanical Engineering Programme
Government Polytechnic, Kolhapur
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Government Polytechnic,Kolhapur 1
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
INDEX
Sr. Page
Description
No. No.
SECTION – I : Curriculum Structure

1. Curriculum Development : Introduction and Process 3
2. Programme Aims and Job Profiles 6
3. Overview and Salient features of Curriculum : MPECS-2013 10
4. Curriculum Structure : Teaching and Examination Scheme (Level-wise) 12
5. Path-wise Course Structure for Sample Paths

Path-1 : Students admitted to First Year - X std. pass outs 14
Path-2 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with XII Science 15
Path-3 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with XII Science (Tech.) 16
Path-4 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with XII Vocational 17
Path-5 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with XII MCVC 18
Path-6 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with ITI 19
6. Exemptions for courses 20
7. Course Equivalence for previous MPECSs 21
8. Proformas for evaluation of term work, oral, practical’s 25
SECTION – II : Syllabi of Courses (Level-wise)

1. Level I – Foundation Courses 33
2. Level II – Life Skills and Professional Skills Courses 94
3. Level III – Basic Technology Courses 112
4. Level IV – Applied Technology Courses 183
5. Level V – Management and Diversified Courses 245
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT : INTRODUCTION AND

PROCESS
Curriculum Design and Development :
Curriculum is an absolute instructional and effective instrument designed with a student centered
approach. It incorporates systematic method of teaching learning process. It is a sequence of
planned academic activities; on completion of which the desired skills are imbibed in the minds
of the student. The curriculum and the course contents are expected to motivate the students to
acquire desired level of knowledge and skills. An emphasis and an attempt has been made in the
curriculum to get a perfect blending of theoretical concepts and actual field requirements. Keen
attention has been provided to make it more structured by incorporating the valuable suggestions
of industrial experts of PBOSs and feed back by the field and academic professionals. An
overview of systematic and scientific mode of implementation and evaluation has also been
pondered; consequently a practicable model of it has been achieved. It incorporates specific
guidelines and assessment criteria for theory/practical/oral modes of evaluation. Specification
table for each course has been provided to prepare question paper justifying meticulous
coverage.
Curriculum philosophy :
The impact of globalization and rapid changes in the engineering science and technology have
been a great cause of comprehensive and noticeable change in engineering fraternity, hence the
institutions. Only way to incorporate such a transformation, is to modify the curriculum,
preserving the consistency of engineering education. Frequent review and feedback from the
experts and the freedom of autonomous status of the institution have encouraged to undertake
relevant changes in the curriculum to make it versatile. Consequently the desired competencies
and skills are transformed amongst the students in pursuing their preparedness to cope up with
the global changes. It aims to promote self reliance and satisfaction of acquiring modern civil
engineering concepts and multi capabilities within the students to make them model technicians.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
“Curriculum is an educational program designed and implemented to achieve specified
educational objectives.” viz…
• To define the purpose of education
• To accept systematic planning methods
• To confirm implementation strategies
• To identify and to incorporate needs of industries
• To follow the policy directives
• To cope-up with social concerns
• To aim at Personality development of students
• To allow future developments and challenges in emerging
Science and technology.
Vision Statement of Institution :

“To develop and nurture a flexible and efficient technician education system that caters to ever
increasing complex expectation of global technological developments, in tune with the national
policies, wherein alumni will achieve international standards of excellence to become successful
entrepreneurs or render quality services, eventually contributing to national development.”
Systems Approach of Curriculum Implementation :
INPUT PROCESS OUTPUT
• Students of 10 & Based on Curriculum

10+ qualification … • Capable and
• Infrastructure • Development of competent
• Modem Instruction diploma pass
equipments Materials out
• Qualified faculty • Training to Faculty
• Resources, Man • Teaching, Learning
P
Feed back
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Curriculum Development Model :
Orientation to faculty
Review of SSC, Assessment of Analysis of needs

CBSE and ICSE students entry of industry and
behavior society : Industrial
Survey. Decide job
Decide programme
Approval
areas, goals and
by BOS and
objectives of courses
Capabilities and
competencies to
be developed
Determination of course areas

and deciding course levels
Development of course Programme

wise syllabi wise Board of
Prepare final draft including MPECS

paths and course equivalence
Approval by BOS and GB
Implementation
strategies, deployment of Implementation Monitoring
LRs and teachers’
Decision on
addition, Feedback
deletion of
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. PROGRAMME AIMS AND JOB PROFILES
ME CH ANICAL E NGI NE E RI NG PRO G RAMME AI MS
The curriculum for mechanical engineering Programme is primarily developed with the focus on
small, medium size mechanical engineering enterprises & large size organization in & around the
region. The enterprises will be production, manufacturing, sales, repairs & maintenance, services
to the community etc. The enterprises may be private sector, public sector govt. sector where
diploma holders in mechanical engineering may work as supervisor, technician, junior
engineering, assistant manager or he may become an entrepreneur.
The main aims of mechanical engineering programme are to induce the following
qualities in the diploma holders.
SOCIAL SKILLS
1) To be a good citizen.
2) Answer question and proposals in appropriate manner.
3) Prepare impact instructions to pears/subordinates.
4) Write letter, report & proposals in appropriate manner.
5) Develop an attitude to work in team for achieving goals.
6) Develop listening skill and respect for other operations.
7) To learn how to use library literature and gathering of information.
8) Develop skill to work independently for problem solving.
9) To develop creative thinking.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TECHNICAL SKILLS
1) Apply problem solving models to arrive at proper solutions of technical problems.
2) Develop supervisory and managerial skills.
3) Use of different types of measuring instrument.
4) Knowledge of statistical quality control techniques used in industries.
5) To apply decision making techniques.
6) Knowledge of using readily available design data.
7) Ability to detect faults and repairs of mechanical units.
8) Design machine parts by applying standard design procedure.
9) Knowledge of different types of materials and their properties.
10) Negotiation techniques in different situations.
11) Knowledge of identifying the required techniques of time study and method study for
different production processes.
12) Carry out time study and method study by using standard methods.
13) Preparing process sheets & flow charts.
14) Knowledge of different types of cutting tools.
15) Knowledge of cutting tool parameters.
16) Knowledge of different types of lubricants & coolants.
17) Knowledge of various machines tools.
18) Understand principle of jigs & fixtures & their applications.
19) Draw, read, interpret working drawings.
20) Knowledge of modern machine tools such as NC, CNC & other.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
21) Understanding use of PERT techniques, BAR CHARTS applicable to different mechanical
engineering situations.
22) Prepare simple program for CNC machine.
23) Develop attitude of safety consciousness.
24) Use of various safety devices.
25) Knowledge of standard procedures for estimating and costing of products.
26) Preparation of Project report for small scale Industries and Medium scale Industries.
27) Market Survey.
28) Awareness of Government Rules.
29) Identification of different types of Engines. Selection of Engines for different application
30) Layout preparation for refrigeration systems.
31) Knowledge of various parts and equipments used for refrigeration and air conditioning.
32) Detect and rectify the faults of refrigeration and air conditioning.
33) Knowledge of Garage tools and maintenance.
34) Testing of various Machines and Equipment like I.C. Engine, Pumps.
35) Use of appropriate software for data processing.
36) Awareness of using computers in proper way.
37) To prepare simple computer program and execute.
38) Maintenance of history cards of machines and instruments.
39) Elementary exposure to ISO.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Aims of Mechanical Engineering Programme are prepared in order to have various technical
skills and abilities to be acquired by the diploma holders in mechanical engineering, so that he
can fulfill industrial requirements precisely.
Considering these aims, the contents of Mechanical Engineering Program is divided in
five levels. In First level, Students will be exposed to introductory aspects of foundation courses,
like mathematics, engineering drawing, science, Workshop Practice etc. From this level, students
will acquire basic knowledge of above said courses which is required for higher levels.
Second level is Life Skills and Professional Skills Courses which covers Generic Skills,
Communication Skill, Professional Practices and Environmental Engineering which impart
students to acquire social and professional skill.
Third level is of basic technology courses which are prepared to induce necessary skills
and knowledge and abilities of different Mechanical Courses like power engineering, machine
drawing, manufacturing processes, machine tools, engineering metallurgy, mechanisms etc. The
contents of basic technology level are helpful to develop the skills, abilities, and knowledge of
basic of thermodynamics, steam engineering, machine drawing, manufacturing processes,
metallurgy, machine tools and calculations of stresses and strains in different machine members.
Fourth level is applied technology courses. Contents of this level is so structured so as to
impart skills, abilities and knowledge of advanced mechanical engineering courses like machine
design, hydraulic machinery, metrology and quality control. Students are also exposed to
specialized fields like maintenance, instrumentation and CNC machines.
Fifth level is Management and diversified courses. This level is designed to develop
managerial skills and abilities amongst students. It also includes specialized courses like
industrial engineering, foundry technology, automobile engineering. Entrepreneurship course is
also included to promote entrepreneurial attitude among students.
Contents of all five level courses are structured in sequential and logical manner so as to
cover cognitive, psychomotor, and affective domains of learning.
[Go to Index]
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. OVERVIEW AND SALIENT FEATURES OF
CURRICULUM : MPECS-2013
3.1 Overview of Curriculum MPECS-2013

Total No. of Credits 180
No. of Total 41
courses
offered Theory 32
Max. no. courses in a
08
semester
Total Maximum Marks 4400
Courses in No. 16
Level IV and Credits 69
V Marks 1600
No. 10
Courses in
Credits 46
Level I
Marks 1100
No. 04
Courses in
Credits 13
Level II
Marks 275
No. 11
Courses in Credits 52
Level III
Marks 1425
No. 10
Courses in Credits 44
Level IV
Marks 950
No. 06
Courses in
Credits 25
Level V
Marks 650
%Ratio of Marks-wise 70% : 30%
Th:Pr Credit-wise 52% : 48%
No. of Allied Courses 02
Optional No. of courses 05
Courses Options/course 03
No. of Internal 05
Practical
Exams External 03
Internal 01
No. of Orals
External 09
Diploma shall be awarded on the basis of marks obtained in Level IV and Level V courses
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3.2 Salient Features of Curriculum MPECS-2013
Addition and deletion of Courses as compared to previous MPECSs with justification :
Addition of Courses:
1) Fundamental of Mechanical Engineering(MEE101), in Level 1, is newly
introduced to develop basic fundamentals of core discipline Mechanical in first year.
2) Computer Integrated Manufacturing (MEE505) in level 5, is newly introduced, as there is growing
need of computerization, automation and latest software packages in the industry.
3) Environmental Studies (CCE204) in level 2, is newly introduced as there is guideline to have an
compulsory subject common to all the discipline and to aware the environmental pollution and
preventive aspects related to environment.
4) Material Handling System (MEE506) as an elective course, is newly introduced in level 5, as the
material handling is the basic requirement in any industrial sector.
Deletion of courses:
1) Alternative Energy Sources (ME311) from Level 4 is deleted, as the Content
of deleted course is covered in course Non-Conventional Energy Sources (MEE312)
2)Personality Development(ME211) from level 2 is deleted, as the Content of deleted course is
covered in Professional practices, Generic Skill, Communication Skill in level 2.
3)Material Management (ME407) from level 4,is deleted as the content is covered in Industrial
engineering and IOM and being less significant due to computerization and available software’s in
management of material in industry.
Major modifications in Course Contents with justification :
1. In level 1, course Engineering Drawing-1(CCE107), application of CAD software and Drawing

sheet on AUTOCAD software has been introduced. In Projection of Lines, topic Such as Line
inclined to Both Reference plane has been introduced.
2. In level 1 course Engineering Drawing-2 (CCE108), application of Development of Surfaces and
one Drawing Sheet based on that topic have been introduced.
3. New Course Computer Integrated Manufacturing (MEE505) is introduced in level 5, to cover the
Current latest software package, system, applications of computer used in Industrial field.
4) Course name Career & Entrepreneurship Development (ME308) is changed as an Entrepreneurship
Development (MEE501).
5) Course name Engineering Material and Metallurgy is changed as Engineering Metallurgy and
Material (MEE310) as the section I covers Metallurgy part and section II covers Material part.
6) Course name Production Processes (ME206) is changed as Machine Tools (MEE306) as the
Curriculum is more related with different Machine Tools rather than processes.
7) Course name Seminar (ME304) is changed as Project-I (MEE404) and Course name Project
(ME305) is changed as Project- II(MEE405).
Changes in Implementation Strategy and Treatment :
1) Introduction of Five level courses in total curriculum of Diploma in Mechanical Engineering.

2) Whole curriculum of Engineering Chemistry is covered in Ist Semester and Whole Curriculum of
Engineering Physics is covered in IInd Semester only.
3) Industrial exposure through Industrial Visits in each semester is planned within the course.
4) Total 8 Practical examinations and total 10 Orals are introduced throughout in six semesters.
5) In Computer Programming (MEE408) and Computer Application (MEE409), 2 theory lectures
have been given with 2 practical hours per week so as to teach the theoretical input of these courses.
6) Total Maximum marks of 4400 in all six semesters have been incorporated. [Go to Index]
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME (LEVEL-WISE)
L Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

Course Pre-requi-
S Course e (hours per week) (marks)
Name of Course Abbrevia- site
N Code v Pract. /
tion Course Th Cr Th TS TW Pr Or
e Drg. / Tut
Level 1: Foundation Courses
1 Engineering Physics CCE101 EPHA 1 - 04 02 06 80 20 -- 50 I -
2 Engineering Chemistry CCE103 ECHA 1 - 04 02 06 80 20 - 50 I -
3 Basic Mathematics CCE105 EBMT 1 - 03 01 04 80 20 - - -
4 Engineering Mathematics CCE106 EEMT 1 CCE105 03 01 04 80 20 - - -
5 Engg.Drawing-1 CCE107 EEDA 1 - 02 04 06 80 20 25 I - -
6 Engg.Drawing-2 CCE108 EEDB 1 CCE107 02 04 06 80 20 25 I - -
7 Applied Mechanics CCE110 EAPM 1 - 04 02 06 80 20 25 I - -
8 Workshop Practice-1 CCE112 EWSB 1 - - 02 02 - - 50 I - -
9 Workshop Practice-2 CCE116 EWSF 1 CCE112 - 02 02 - - 50 I - -
10 Fundamental of Mechanical Engg MEE101 EFME 1 - 02 02 04 80 20 25 I - -
Level 2 : Life Skills and Professional Skills Courses
11 Generic Skills CCE201 EGNS 2 - 02 02 04 - - 25 I 50 I -
12 Communication Skills CCE202 ECMS 2 - 02 02 04 40 10 - 25 I -
13 Professional Practices CCE203 EPRP 2 - 01 02 03 - - 25 I - 50 I
14 Environmental Studies CCE204 EENS 2 - 02 - 02 40 10 - - -
Level 3: Basic Technology Courses
15 Applied Mathematics MEE301 EAMT 3 CCE106 03 01 04 80 20 - - -
16 Thermal Engineering MEE302 ETEG 3 - 03 02 05 80 20 - - 25E
17 Machine Drawing MEE303 EMDR 3 CCE108 03 02 05 80 20 - - 50E
18 Manufacturing Processes MEE304 EMPR 3 - 02 04 06 80 20 25 I 25 E -
19 Theory of Engg. Design MEE305 ETED 3 CCE110 03 02 05 80 20 25 I - -
20 Machine Tools MEE306 EMTL 3 MEE304 02 04 06 80 20 25 I 25 E -
21 Applied Electronics MEE307 EAEX 3 - 02 02 04 80 20 25 I - -
22 Theory of M/Cs and Mechanism MEE308 ETMM 3 - 03 02 05 80 20 - - 25E
23 Electrical Technology MEE309 EELT 3 - 02 02 04 80 20 25 I - -
24 Engg. Metallurgy and Materials MEE310 EEMM 3 - 02 02 04 80 20 25 I - -
25 Elective-1 < MEE311 TO MEE313> - - 3 - 02 02 04 80 20 25 I - -
Level 4: Applied Technology Courses
26 Power Engineering MEE401 EPEG 4 MEE302 03 02 05 80 20 - - 25E
27 Machine Design MEE402 EMDN 4 MEE305 03 02 05 80 20 - - 25E
28 Advanced Machining Processes MEE403 EAMP 4 MEE306 02 04 06 80 20 - - 25E
29 Project- I MEE404 EPRT 4 - - 02 02 - - 25 I - -
30 Project - II MEE405 EPRO 4 MEE404 - 04 04 - - 25 I - 50E
31 Hydraulic Machinery MEE406 EHYM 4 - 03 02 05 80 20 25 I - -
32 Metrology MEE407 EMQC 4 - 02 02 04 80 20 - 25 E -
33 Computer Programming MEE408 ECPR 4 - 02 02 04 - - 50 I - -
34 Computer Applications MEE409 ECPA 4 - 02 02 04 - - 25 I 25 I -
35 Elective-2 < MEE410 TO MEE412> - - 4 - 03 02 05 80 20 25 I - -
Level 5: Management and Diversified Technology Courses
36 Entrepreneurship Development MEE501 EEDP 5 - 01 02 03 - - 50 I - -
37 Industrial Org. And Management MEE502 EIOM 5 - 03 - 03 80 20 - - -
38 Quality Management MEE503 EQLM 5 - 02 02 04 80 20 25 I - -
39 Elective-3 < MEE504 TO MEE506 > - - 5 - 03 02 05 80 20 25 I - -
40 Elective-4 < MEE507 TO MEE509> - - 5 - 03 02 05 80 20 - - 25E
41 Elective-5 < MEE510 TO MEE512> - - 5 - 03 02 05 80 20 - - 25E
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Optional Courses for Electives
Teaching
Scheme Examination Scheme
(hours per (marks)
Cours L Pre- week)
e e requi- Pra
S Course
Name of Course Abbre v site ct. /
N Code C
via- e Cours Drg
re T T T
tion l e Th ./ Pr Or
di h S W
Tut
ts
ori
al
Elective – 1(ANY ONE)
1 Pollution control MEE311 EPCL 3 - 02 02 04 80 20 25I - -
2 NonConventional Energy Sources MEE312 ENCE 3 - 02 02 04 80 20 25I - -
04
3 Higher Mathematics MEE313 EHMT 3 MEE301 02 02 80 20 25I - -
EMMM 05
4 MechMeasurement &Mechatronic MEE410 4 - 03 02 80 20 25I - -
EMGM 05
5 Marketing Management MEE411 4 - 03 02 80 20 25I - -
05
6 Quality Systems MEE412 EQLS 4 - 03 02 80 20 25I - -

05
7 Industrial Engineering MEE504 EIEG 5 - 03 02 80 20 25I - -
8 Computer Integrated Manufacturing MEE505 ECIM 5 - 03 02 05 80 20 25I - -

05
9 Material Handling System MEE506 EMHS 5 - 03 02 80 20 25I - -
10 Foundry Technology MEE507 EFTL 5 - 03 02 05 80 20 - - 25E
05
11 Refrigeration & Air Conditioning MEE508 ERAC 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
12 Automobile Engineering MEE509 EAEG 5 - 03 02 05 80 20 - - 25E

05
13 Industrial Hydraulics &Pneumatic MEE510 EIHP 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
05
14 Tool Engineering MEE511 ETLG 5 MEE306 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
05
15 Welding Technology MEE512 EWLT 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
[Go to Index]
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. PATH-WISE COURSE STRUCTURES
Path-1 : Students admitted to First Year - X std. pass outs
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Pre-
Course Le (hours per week) (Marks)
S Course requi-
Name of Course Abbrevi ve Pract. / Cr
N Code site T
a-tion l Th Drg. / edi Th TS Pr Or
Course W
Tutorial ts
Semester 1
1 Engineering Chemistry CCE103 ECHA 1 - 04 02 06 80 20 - 50 I -
4 Workshop Practice-1 CCE112 EWSB 1 - - 02 02 - - 50 I - -
6 Generic Skill CCE201 EGNS 2 - 02 02 04 - - 25 I 50 I -
Semester 2
7 Engineering Physics CCE101 EPHA 1 - 04 02 06 80 20 -- 50 I -
11 Communication Skill CCE202 ECMS 2 - 02 02 04 40 10 - 25 I -
12 Workshop Practice-2 CCE116 EWSF 1 CCE112 - 02 02 - - 50 I - -
Semester 3
Semester 4
26 Professional Practices CCE203 EPRP 2 - 01 02 03 - - 25 I - 50I
Elective-1<MEE311 TO MEE313>` 04
27 - - 3 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Semester 5
Elective-2< MEE410 TO MEE412> 05
33 - - 4 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Elective-3< MEE504 TO MEE506 >
34 - - 5 - 03 02 05 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Semester 6
35 Project- II MEE405 EPRO 4 MEE404 - 04 04 - - 25 I - 50E
Elective-4 < MEE507 TO MEE509> 05
40 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
41 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Path-wise Course Structure
Path-2 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with XII Science

Pre- (hours per week) (Marks)
Course L
S Course requi- Pract. /
Name of Course Abbrev ev Cr
N Code site Drg. /
ia-tion el Th ed Th TS TW Pr Or
Course Tutoria
its
l
Semester 3
Semester 4
15 - - 3 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Semester 5
Elective-2<MEE410 TO MEE412> 05
22 - - 4 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Elective-3<MEE504 TO MEE506 > 05
23 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Semester 6
31 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
32 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Path-3 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with XII Science (Technical)
Pre- (hours per week) (Marks)
Course L
S Course requi- Pract. /
Name of Course Abbrev ev Cr
N Code site Drg. /
ia-tion el Th ed Th TS TW Pr Or
Course Tutoria
its
l
Semester 3
Semester 4
14 - - 3 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Semester 5
Power Engineering 05
15 MEE401 EPEG 4 MEE302 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
Advanced Machining Processes 06
17 MEE403 EAMP 4 MEE306 02 04 80 20 - - 25E
20 - - 4 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Elective-3< MEE504 TO MEE506 > 05
21 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Environmental Studies 02
22 CCE204 EENS 2 - 02 - 40 10 - - -
Computer Programming 04
23 MEE408 ECPR 4 - 02 02 - - 50 I - -
Semester 6
Project- II 04
24 MEE405 EPRO 4 MEE404 - 04 - - 25 I - 50E
25 Metrology MEE407 EMQC 4 - 02 02 04 80 20 - 25E -

Entrepreneurship Development 03
26 MEE501 EEDP 5 - 01 02 - - 50 I - -
Industrial Org. And Management 03
27 MEE502 EIOM 5 - 03 - 80 20 - - -
Quality Management 04
28 MEE503 EQLM 5 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
29 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
30 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
Computer Applications 04
31 MEE409 ECPA 4 - 02 02 - - 25 I 25 I -
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Path-4 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with XII Vocational
L Pre- (hours per week) (Marks)
Course
S Course e requi- Pract. /
Name of Course Abbrevi Cr
N Code v site Drg. /
a-tion Th edi Th TS TW Pr Or
el Course Tutori
ts
al
Semester 3
Fundamental of Mechanical 04
1 MEE101 EFME 1 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
Engg
4 Manufacturing Processes MEE304 EMPR 3 - 02 04 06 80 20 25 I 25E -
Semester 4
9 Machine Tools MEE306 EMTL 3 MEE304 02 04 06 80 20 25 I 25E -
14 - - 3 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Semester 5
Elective-2<MEE410 TOMEE412> 05
20 - - 4 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Elective-3<MEE504 TO MEE506 05
21 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Semester 6
Industrial Org. And 03
27 MEE502 EIOM 5 - 03 - 80 20 - - -
Management
29 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
30 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
31 MEE409 ECPA 4 - 02 02 - - 25 I 25 I -
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Path-5 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with XII MCVC
Pre-
S Course requi-
N Code site T
Course W
Tutorial ts
Semester 3
Semester 4
15 - - 3 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Semester 5
Power Engineering 05
18 MEE401 EPEG 4 MEE302 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
Machine Design 05
19 MEE402 EMDN 4 MEE305 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
Advanced Machining Processes 06

20 MEE403 EAMP 4 MEE306 02 04 80 20 - - 25E
Hydraulic Machinery 05
22 MEE406 EHYM 4 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
Elective-2 < MEE410 TOMEE412> 05

22 - - 4 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Elective-3< MEE504 TO MEE506 > 05
23 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
24 CCE204 EENS 2 - 02 - 40 10 - - -
Computer Programming 04
25 MEE408 ECPR 4 - 02 02 - - 50 I - -
Semester 6
28 MEE501 EEDP 5 - 01 02 - - 50 I - -
30 MEE503 EQLM 5 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -

31 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
32 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
33 MEE409 ECPA 4 - 02 02 - - 25 I 25 I -
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Path-6 : Students admitted directly to Second Year with ITI
Pre-
S Course requi-
N Code site T
Course W
Tutorial ts
Semester 3
04
1 Basic Mathematics CCE105 EBMT 1 - 03 01 80 20 - - -
Semester 4
7 Communication Skill CCE202 ECMS 2 - 02 02 04 40 10 - 25 I -
Theory of M/Cs and Mechanism 05
12 MEE308 ETMM 3 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
Engg. Metallurgy and Materials 04

13 MEE310 EEMM 3 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
Professional Practices 03
14 CCE203 EPRP 2 - 01 02 - - 25 I - 50I

15 - - 3 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
Theory of Engg. Design 05
16 MEE305 ETED 3 CCE110 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
Semester 5
Elective-2 < MEE410 TO EE412> 05
23 - - 4 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
24 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 25 I - -
(Any One)
25 CCE204 EENS 2 - 02 - 40 10 - - -

Semester 6
29 MEE501 EEDP 5 - 01 02 - - 50 I - -
Industrial Org. And Management 03

30 MEE502 EIOM 5 - 03 - 80 20 - - -
31 MEE503 EQLM 5 - 02 02 80 20 25 I - -

32 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
33 - - 5 - 03 02 80 20 - - 25E
(Any One)
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
6. EXEMPTIONS FOR COURSES
Eligibility for Exemptions for First and Second Semester Courses of MPECS-2013
for students admitted on X-pass basis
Whether eligible for exemption ?

S Course ( Yes / No )
N Name of Course Code XII XII XII XII
ITI
Science Tech. MCVC Voc.
Engineering Physics
1 CCE101 YES YES No No No
(CE/ME/SM/MT)
Engineering Physics
2 CCE102 YES YES No No No
(EE/IE/ET/IT)
Engineering Chemistry
3 CCE103 No No No No No
(CE/ME/SM/MT)
Engineering Chemistry
4 CCE104 No No No No No
(EE/IE/ET/IT)
5 Basic Mathematics CCE105 YES YES No YES No
6
Engineering CCE106 No No
YES YES YES
Mathematics
7 Engineering Drawing -1 CCE107 No YES No No No
(CE/ME/MT)
8 Engineering Drawing-1(SM) CCE117 No YES No No No
9 Engineering Drawing -2 CCE108 No YES No No No

(CE/ME/SM/MT)
10
Engineering Graphics CCE109 No YES No No No
(EE/IT/ IE/ET)
11 Applied Mechanics CCE110 No No No No No
12 Workshop Practices–1 (CE) CCE111 No YES YES YES YES
13
Workshop Practices–1 CCE112 No YES YES YES YES
(ME, SM, MT)
14 Workshop Practices (EE) CCE113 No YES YES YES YES
15 Workshop Practices (IE, ET) CCE114 No YES YES YES YES
16 Workshop Practices -2 (CE) CCE115 No YES YES YES YES
17
Workshop Practices -2 CCE116 No YES YES YES YES
(ME, SM, MT)
18 Generic Skills CCE201 No No No No No
19 Communication Skills CCE202 No No No No No
Note : The above eligibility is subject to condition that the student has secured at least 40 %
marks in the respective subject.
Students seeking exemption for any other subjects should contact Academic Coordinator /
Controller of Examinations.
[Go to Index]
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
7. COURSE EQUIVALENCE FOR PREVIOUS MPECSs
SN MPECS-1994 MPECS-2001 MPECS-2006 MPECS-2010 MPECS-2013
1. --- --- R101-Generic Skill X101-Generic Skill CCE201-Gen. Skills
2. 101-Comm.Skill 0101-Com.Skll.-I R102-Comm.Skills X106-Comm.Skills CCE202-Com.Skills
3 102 0102 R102 X106 CCE202
Communication Communication Communication Communication Communication Skill
skill –II skill -II skills Skills
4 0103 Applied R103 Applied X102 Basic CCE101
103 Applied
physics-I Physics-I Physics Engineering Physics
Physics
0104 Applied R104 Applied X108 Applied
physics -II Physics -II Physics
5 0103 Applied R103 Applied X102 Basic CCE101
103 Applied
physics-I Physics-I Physics Engineering Physics
Physics
0104 Applied R104 Applied X108 Applied
physics -II Physics -II Physics
6 0107 Mathematics- R107 Basic X104 Basic CCE105 Basic
105 Mathematics-I
I Mathematics Mathematics Mathematics
CCE106
106 Mathematics- 0108 Mathematics- R108 Engineering X110 Engineering
7 Engineering
II -II Mathematics Mathematics
Mathematics
8 107 Applied 0116 Applied R112 Applied X111 Applied CCE110 Applied
Mechanics Mechanics Mechanics. Mechanics Mechanics
9 R111 Computer NIL
108 Introduction to 0115 Introduction
Fundamentals & NIL
Computers to Computers
Application.
10 109 Engineering 0109 Engineering R109 Engineering X105 Engineering CCE107 Engineering
Drawing-I Drawing-I Drawing-I Drawing-I Drawing-1
11 110 Engineering 0110 Engineering R110 Engineering X107 Engineering CCE108 Engineering
Drawing-II Drawing-II Drawing-II Drawing-II Drawing-2
ME101 Basic CCE112 Workshop
R113 Workshop
12 111 Workshop–I 0113 Workshop -I Workshop Practice Practice-1
Practice-I
(Mechanical)
ME102 Workshop CCE116 Workshop
R114 Workshop
13 112 Workshop–II 0114 Workshop -II Practice Practice-2
Practice-II
(Mechanical)
14 0111 Fundamentals
--- NIL NIL MEE101 Fundamental
of Engineering-I
of
15 0112 Fundamentals
--- NIL NIL MechanicalEngineering
of Engineering-II
16 M201 2201 Mathematics- M201 Applied ME201 MEE301 Applied
Mathematics-III -III Mathematics Mathematics Mathematics
17 M202 Power 2202 Thermal M202 Thermal ME202 Thermal MEE302 Thermal
Engineering-I Engineering Engineering Engineering Engineering
18 M203 Machine 2203 Machine M203 Machine ME203 Machine MEE303 Machine
Drawing-I Drawing Drawing Drawing Drawing
19 MEE304
M204 2204 M204 ME204
Manufacturing
Manufacturing Manufacturing Manufacturing Manufacturing
Processes
Process-I Processes Processes Processes
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
M205 Theory of ME205 Theory of \ MEE305 Theory of
M205 Strength of 2205 Theory of
20 Engineering Engineering Engineering
Materials Engineering Design
Design Design Design
21 M206 Machine 2206 Machine M206 Production ME206 Production MEE306 Machine
Tools -I Tools Processes. Processes. Tools
22 M207 Machine 2207 Production NIL
NIL NIL
Drawing- II Drawing
M208 Theory of ME208 Theory of MEE308 Theory of
23 M208 Mechanisms 2208 Mechanisms Machines & Machines & Machines &
Mechanisms. Mechanisms. Mechanisms.
24 2209 Electrical M209 Electrical ME209 Electrical MEE309 Electrical
Technology Technology Technology Technology
25 M209 Engineering 2211 Engineering -- -
--
Materials Materials
26 M210 Heat -- -
2212 Heat Transfer --
Transfer
ME210 MEE310 Engg.
M210 Engineering
27 M211 Engineering 2213 Engineering Engineering Metallurgy and
Materials &
Metallurgy Metallurgy Materials Materials
Metallurgy
& Metallurgy
28 M207 Applied ME207 Applied MEE307 Applied
--- ---
Electronics. Electronics. Electronics
29 M211 Personality ME211 Personality CCE203 Professional
--- ---
Development. Development. Practices
221 Basic Civil 0221 Elements Of R221 Elements Of

30 ----
Engg. Civil Engg. Civil Engg.
------
0222 Electrical R222 Electrical

222 Basic
31 Circuits & Circuits & ---- ---
Electrical Engg.
Machines.. Machines.
32 223 Basic 0223 Basic R223 Basic ---- ----
Electronics. Electronics. Electronics.
MEE101 Fundamental
224 Basic 0224 Basic R224 Basic
33 ---- of
Mechanical Engg. Mechanical Engg. Mechanical Engg.
Mechanical Engg
34 225 Basic Sugar 0225 Basic Sugar R225 Basic Sugar --- -
Manufacturing. Manufacturing. Manufacturing.
35 226 Pollution 0226 Pollution R226 Pollution ME212 Pollution MEE311 Pollution
Control Control Control Control Control
R227 Non-
227 Non- 0227 Non- ME213 Non-
36 Conventional MEE312 Non-
Conventional Conventional Conventional
energy Conventional
energy sources. Energy Sources. energy Sources.
Sources. Energy Sources
37 MEE313 Higher
228 Higher 0228 Higher R228 Higher ME214 Higher
Mathematics
Mathematics Mathematics Mathematics Mathematics
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
38 M301 Power 2301Power M301Power ME301Power MEE401 Power
Engineering-II Engineering Engineering Engineering Engineering
39 MEE402 Machine
M302 Machine 2302Machine M302Machine ME302Machine
Design
Design Design Design Design
M303Advance ME303Advance MEE403 Advanced
M303 Machine 2305CNC Machine
40 Machining Machining Machining
Tools –II Tools
Processes. Processes. Processes
41 M304 Project
--- M304 Seminar ME304 Seminar MEE404 Project- I
Work & Seminar
42 2304Industrial
-- M305 Project ME305 Project MEE405 Project- II
Project
43 M306Hydraulic ME306 Hydraulic MEE406 Hydraulic
--- -----
Machinery. Machinery. Machinery
44 ----- MEE407 Metrology
--- M307 Metrology. ME307 Metrology.
45 M308 Career & ME308 Career and MEE501
Entrepreneurship
---- ---- Entrepreneurship Entrepreneurship Development
Development Development
46 M305 Plant 2306Plant -
Maintenance Maintenance -- --
Engineering Engineering
47 M 306 Hydraulic 2307 Hydraulic M306 Hydraulic ME306 Hydraulic MEE406 Hydraulic
Machinery Machinery Machinery Machinery Machinery
48 M 307 Metrology
2308 Metrology M307 Metrology ME307 Metrology MEE407 Metrology
And
2309 Quality M404 Quality ME404 Quality MEE503 Quality
Quality
Control Management Management Management
Control
49 M303 Advanced ME303 Advanced MEE403 Advanced
M 308 Advance 2303 Advance
Machining Machining Machining
Machine Tools Machine Tools
Processes Processes Processes
50 M 309 2310 -
-- --
Instrumentation Instrumentation
51 M309 Mechanical ME309 Mechanical MEE410
Measurement Measurement Mech.Measurement
--- ---
& &
Mechatronics. Mechatronics. &Mechatronic
52 M310 Marketing ME310 Marketing MEE411 Marketing
-- --
Management Management Management
53 M311 Alternative ME311 Alternative MEE312 Non-
-- -- Energy Energy Conventional Energy
Sources. Sources. Sources
54 MEE408 Computer
M401 Computer 2401 Computer M401 Computer ME401 Computer
Programming
Programming Programming Programming Programming
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
55 M402 Computer 2402 Computer M402 Computer ME402 Computer MEE409 Computer
Application Application Application Application Application
56 MEE502 Industrial
ME403 Ind. Org. Org. And
M403 Ind. Org. 2403 Ind. Org. And M403 Ind. Org.
And Management
And Management Management And Management
Management
M308 Career & ME308 Career & MEE501

57 M 404 2404 Entrepreneurship Entrepreneurship Entrepreneurship
Entrepreneurship Entrepreneurship Development
Development Development
58 M405 Production 2405 Production -- -- -
Engineering Engineering
59 M 406 Industrial 2406 Industrial M405 Industrial ME405 Industrial MEE504 Industrial
Engineering Engineering Engineering Engineering Engineering
60 MEE506 Material
M407 Material 2407 Material M407 Material ME407 Material
Handling
Management Management Management Management
System
61 M408 Foundry 2408 Foundry M408 Foundry ME408 Foundry MEE507 Foundry
Technology Technology Technology Technology Technology
62 M409 M409 ME409 MEE508
2409 Refrigeration
Refrigeration and Refrigeration Refrigeration and Refrigeration & Air
and Air
Air and Air Air Conditioning
Conditioning
Conditioning Conditioning Conditioning
63 M 410 Automobile 2410 Automobile M410 Automobile ME410 MEE509 Automobile
Engg. Engg. Engg. Automobile Engg. Engineering
64 M 411 Industrial 2412 Industrial -
-- --
Safety Safety
65 M413 Estimation 2413 Estimation -
-- --
and Costing and Costing
2411 Industrial M411 Industrial ME411 Industrial MEE510 Industrial
66 ------- Hydraulics & Hydraulics & Hydraulics & Hydraulics
Pneumatics. Pneumatics. Pneumatics. &Pneumatic
67 M404 Quality ME404 Quality MEE503 Quality
----- ----
Management Management Management
68 M406 Quality ME406 Quality MEE412 Quality
---- ----
Systems Systems Systems
69 M412 Tool ME412 Tool MEE511 Tool
---- ----
Engineering Engineering Engineering
70 M413 Welding ME413 Welding MEE512 Welding
---- ----
Technology Technology Technology
[Go to Index]
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8. PROFORMAS FOR EVALUATION OF TERM WORK,

ORALS AND PRACTICALS
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PROFORMA - I
GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC, KOLHAPUR
Performance for Final Assessment of ORAL / PRACTICAL
By Internal & External Examiner
( For subject having ONLY ORAL / PRACTICAL )
Course Code & Course Name --

Programme -
Summer / Winter Exam - Date -
Roll No Marks of Marks of Performance Performance Marks Marks

/ Exam Progressive Continuous of Term End of Term End out of as per
No Skill Test Assessment OR/PR by OR/PR Evaluation
Internal by External Scheme
Examiner Examiner
25 25 25 25 100
Name and Signature of Internal Examiner Name and Signature of External Examiner
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PROFORMA – II
By Internal Examiner
( For subject having ONLY ORAL / PRACTICAL )

Programme -
Roll No Marks of Marks of Performance Marks out of Marks

/ Exam Progressive Continuous of Term End as per Evaluation
No Skill Test Assessment OR/PR by Scheme
Internal
Examiner
25 25 50 100
Name and Signature of Internal Examiner

____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PROFORMA-III
Performance for Final Assessment of TERMWORK
( For subject having ONLY TERMWORK )

Programme -
Roll No Marks of Marks of Marks out of Marks

/ Exam Progressive Skill Continuous as per Evaluation
No Test Assessment Scheme
50 50 100

____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PROFORMA – IV
By Internal & External Examiner
( For subject having ORAL / PR & TW )

Programme -
Roll No Marks of Performance Performance Marks out Marks
/ Exam Progressive of Term End of Term End of as per Evaluation
No Skill Test OR/PR OR/PR Scheme
by Internal by External
Examiner Examiner
25 25 50 100
Name and Signature of Name and Signature of

Internal Examiner External Examiner
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PROFORMA – V

Programme -
Roll No / Marks of Performance of Term Marks out of Marks

Exam No Progressive End OR/PR as per Evaluation
Skill Test by Internal Examiner Scheme
50 50 100

____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PROFORMA – VI
Performance for Final Assessment of TERMWORK

Programme -
Roll No / Marks of Continuous Marks out of Marks as per

Exam No Assessment Evaluation Scheme
100 100
Name and Signature of Internal Examiner [Go to Index]
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
INDEX
Sr.No Level Semester Course Name Course Course Abb. Page No
Code
1 I II Engineering Physics CCE101 EPHA 34
2 I I Engineering Chemistry CCE103 ECHA 42
3 I I Basic Mathematics CCE105 EBMT 51
4 I II Engineering Mathematics CCE106 EEMT 56
5 I I Engg.Drawing-1 CCE107 EEDA 61
6 I II Engg.Drawing-2 CCE108 EEDB 67
7 I II Applied Mechanics CCE110 EAPM 73
8 I I Workshop Practice-1 CCE112 EWSB 80
9 I II Workshop Practice-2 CCE116 EWSF 83
10 I I Fundamental of Mechanical Engg MEE101 EFME 87
11 II I Generic Skills CCE201 EGNS 95
12 II II Communication Skills CCE202 ECMS 99
13 II IV Professional Practices CCE203 EPRP 104
14 II III Environmental Studies CCE204 EENS 108
15 III III Applied Mathematics MEE301 EAMT 113
16 III IV Thermal Engineering MEE302 ETEG 118
17 III III Machine Drawing MEE303 EMDR 124
18 III III Manufacturing Processes MEE304 EMPR 130
19 III III Theory of Engg. Design MEE305 ETED 135
20 III IV Machine Tools MEE306 EMTL 140
21 III IV Applied Electronics MEE307 EAEX 146
22 III IV Theory of M/Cs and Mechanism MEE308 ETMM 151
23 III III Electrical Technology MEE309 EELT 157
24 III IV Engg. Metallurgy and Materials MEE310 EEMM 163
25 III IV Pollution control MEE311 EPCL 168
26 III IV NonConventional Energy Sources MEE312 ENCE 173
27 III IV Higher Mathematics MEE313 EHMT 178
28 IV V Power Engineering MEE401 EPEG 184
29 IV V Machine Design MEE402 EMDN 190
30 IV V Advanced Machining Processes MEE403 EAMP 195
31 IV V Project- I MEE404 EPRT 201
32 IV VI Project - II MEE405 EPRO 204
33 IV V Hydraulic Machinery MEE406 EHYM 207
34 IV VI Metrology MEE407 EMQC 212
35 IV III Computer Programming MEE408 ECPR 218
36 IV IV Computer Applications MEE409 ECPA 223
37 IV V Mech Measurement & Mechatronic MEE410 EMMM 228
38 IV V Marketing Management MEE411 EMGM 234
39 IV V Quality Systems MEE412 EQLS 239
40 V VI Entrepreneurship Development MEE501 EEDP 246
41 V VI Industrial Org. And Management MEE502 EIOM 250
42 V VI Quality Management MEE503 EQLM 255
43 V V Industrial Engineering MEE504 EIEG 260
44 V V Computer Integrated Manufacturing MEE505 ECIM 266
45 V V Material Handling System MEE506 EMHS 271
46 V VI Foundry Technology MEE507 EFTL 276
47 V VI Refrigeration & Air Conditioning MEE508 ERAC 282
48 V VI Automobile Engineering MEE509 EAEG 288
49 V VI Industrial Hydraulics &Pneumatic MEE510 EIHP 294
50 V VI Tool Engineering MEE511 ETLG 300
51 V VI Welding Technology MEE512 EWLT 306
52 I I Engineering Graphics (EE/IE/ET/IT) CCE109 EEGR 312
53 I I Engineering Drawing (SM) CCE117 EEDC 317
54 I II Basic Mechanical Engg.(EE) EEE101 EBME 323
55 III III Mechanical Engg.(MT) MTE309 EMEC 329
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
LEVEL – I
FOUNDATION
COURSES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : ENGINEERING PHYSICS (CE/ME/SM/MT)

Course Code : CCE101
Course Abbreviation : EPHA
TEACHING AND EVALUATION SCHEME :

Pre-requisite Course(s) : Nil
Teaching Scheme :
Scheme component Hours / week Credits

Theory 04
06
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Progressive Assessment Term End Examination
Mode of Practical
Theory Total
Evaluation Theory Practical Term Work Examination
Examination
(Internal))
Average of i. 25 marks for
Term End As per
Details of two tests of each practical As per
Theory Exam Proforma-
Evaluation 20 marks ii. One PST of Proforma-II
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - 50 150
RATIONALE :
Physics is the foundation of engineering and technology. The development of all engineering areas
requires good understanding of fundamental principles in physics. Studying physics develops scientific
methodology and technical aptitude in the students. Applications of principles of physics in engineering
fields create interest and motivate the students.
OBJECTIVES :
The student will be able :
1. To state the principles and laws of physics
2. To apply principles studied to simple practical problems / situations.
3. To develop skills of working in team, handling of instruments, apparatus and tools.
4. To develop curiosity, interest and self-confidence.
5. To develop cognitive abilities like observing, classifying, interpreting.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A) THEORY : Section I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
Topics / Sub-topics Evaluation
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 PROPERTIES OF LIGHT 06 08
1.1 Refraction of light
1.2 Laws of Refraction of Light, Snell’s law
1.3 Refraction through glass prism & derivation of
prism formula
1.4 Dispersion & Dispersive Power
1.5 Relation between R. I. and dispersive power
1.6 Numerical problems
2 ELASTICITY 06 08
2.1 Definitions of elasticity, plasticity, rigidity,
deforming force, restoring force
2.2 Stress, Strain and their types
2.3 Elastic Limit, Statement of Hooke’s law, modulus
of elasticity and its types
2.4 Behavior of wire under continuously increasing
load- yield point, ultimate stress, breaking stress
2.5 Factor of safety
2.6 Applications of elasticity 2.7 Numerical problems
3 PROPERTIES OF LIQUIDS 12 14
3.1VISCOSITY
3.1.1 Definition and meaning of viscosity, velocity
gradient
3.1.2 Newton’s law of viscosity, Coefficient of
viscosity
3.1.3 Stokes law (Derivation not required)
3.1.4 Derivation of viscosity of liquid by Stokes
method
3.1.5 Applications of viscosity.
3.1.6 Numerical problems
3.2 SURFACE TENSION
3.2.1 Definition and molecular theory
3.2.2 Definitions of angle of contact, capillary action
3.2.3 Determination of surface tension by capillary
rise method ( derivation not required )
3.2.4 Effect of temperature and impurity on surface
tension
3.2.5 Applications of surface tension
3.2.6 Numerical Problems
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
4 WAVE MOTION 08 10
4.1 Definitions of periodic motion, Linear S. H. M.
4.2 Parameters of linear SHM : Amplitudes, Period,
Frequency and Phase
4.3 Concept and definition of wave
4.4 Parameters of wave- Frequency, periodic time,
phase and wavelength
4.5 Types of waves (transverse and longitudinal) and
their characteristics
4.6 Relation between velocity of wave, wavelength,
frequency (v = n λ )
4.7 Free and forced oscillations
4.8 Phenomenon of resonance and its applications
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is
one and half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of
the above allotted marks only.
Section II
Theory
Sr. Topics / Lectures
Evaluation
No. Subtopics (Hours)
(Marks)
5 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 06 08
5.1 Concept of electric current , resistance
5.2 Ohm’s law, Specific resistance, Resistivity
5.3 Resistances in series and parallel.
5.4 Wheatstone’s Network and meter Bridge.
5.5 Principle of potentiometer
5.6 Numerical problems
6 MODERN PHYSICS 16 18
6.1 PHOTO ELECTRIC EFFECT
6.1.1 Plank’s hypothesis
6.1.2 Photon and its characteristics
6.1.3 Photo electric effect and its characteristics
6.1.4 Plank-Einstein equation
6.1.5 Photocell – construction and symbol
6.1.6 Applications of photo electric effect
6.2 LASER
6.2.1 Introduction of LASER
6.2.2 Properties of laser
6.2.3 Spontaneous and stimulated emission
6.2.4 Population inversion and optical pumping
6.2.5 Applications of LASER
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
6.3 X-RAYS
6.3.1 Nature and properties of x-rays.
6.3.2 Production of x-rays by Coolidge tube
6.3.3 Applications of x-rays
7 ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 06 08
7.1 ACOUSTICS
7.1.1 Echo and reverberation of sound
7.1.2 Sabine’s formula
7.1.3 Requirements of good acoustics
7.1.4 Acoustical planning of an auditorium
7.2 ULTRASONICS
7.2.1 Limits of audibility
7.2.2 Ultrasonic waves
7.2.3 Ultrasonic transducers
7.2.4 Applications of ultrasonic waves
8 NANOTECHNOLOGY 04 06
8.1 Definition of nanoscale, nanometer, nanoparticle
8.2 Definition and examples of nanostructured materials
8.3 Applications of nanotechnology in electronics,
automobile, textile, space, medicine, cosmetics and
environment
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and half
times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted marks
only.
Specification table for setting question paper for semester end theory examination :
Section / Distribution of marks

Total
Topic Name of topic
Knowledge Comprehension Application marks
no.
I/1 Properties of light 2 2 4 08
I/2 Elasticity 2 4 2 08
I/3 Properties of liquids 4 8 2 14
I/4 Wave motion 4 6 10
II/5 Current electricity 2 2 4 08
II/6 Modern Physics 4 10 4 18
II/7 Acoustics & Ultrasonics 2 4 2 08
II/8 Nanotechnology 2 4 06
Total 22 40 18 80
times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
B.TERM WORK Term work shall consist of the following :
Laboratory experiments and related skills to be developed :
Sr.
Title of Experiment Skills to be developed
No.
1 Overview of Field
Applications of i) Information search
Physics ii) Information presentation
( Any 08 of the following experiments )
2 To measure i) Determine least count and zero error in the measuring instrument.
dimensions of ii) Measuring internal and external dimensions of given objects
given objects by iii) Handling the measuring instruments for measuring depth, thickness
using Vernier etc.
Caliper iv) Tabulating observations.
3 To measure the
diameter of bob i) Determine least count and zero error in the measuring instrument.
and thickness of ii) Measuring dimensions of given objects
plate by using iii) Handling the measuring instruments for measuring depth, thickness etc.
Micrometer screw iv) Tabulating observations.
gauge
4 To determine the i) Measuring diameter of steel ball using micrometer screw gauge.
viscosity of liquid
ii) Measuring terminal velocity of steel ball in the liquid column.
iii) Use of stop watch for measurement of time.
by Stokes method. iv) Tabulating observations.
5 To determine the i) Focusing the microscope properly in order to get clear image.
surface tension of
ii) Adjusting cross wires of microscope at particular place.
iii) Taking readings for main scale and Vernier scale of traveling
liquid by capillary
microscope.
rise method iv) Tabulating observations.
6 To measure
unknown resistance i) Drawing the circuit diagram of the required experiment.
of wire by
ii) Connecting the instruments as per circuit diagram.
iii) Measuring the value of potential difference & current in the circuit.
Ammeter – iv) Tabulating observations.
Voltmeter method.
7 i) Drawing necessary ray diagram
To verify Snell’s
ii) Measuring angles of incidence and refraction
law using glass
iii) Tabulating observations.
slab
8 To determine i) Removing parallax between the images and the pins by observing t
refractive index of refracted ray through a prism.
prism by pin ii) Measuring the angle of refraction correctly
method iii) Drawing the path of refracted ray through the prism
iv) Drawing inference regarding relation between angle of incidence & angle
refraction from i-δ graph
v) Tabulating observations.
9 To determine i) Adjusting the resonating length by discriminating resonating sound from
velocity of sound sound produced by the tuning fork.
by resonance tube ii) Measuring internal diameter of resonating tube using vernier caliper
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
iii) Drawing inference & confirming Law nL = constant
iv) Tabulating observations.
10 To study i) Drawing circuit diagram
characteristics of ii) Handling different delicate instruments.
photocell iii) Tabulating observations
iv) Drawing graph
11 To determine the i) Measuring length of pendulum
acceleration due to ii) Finding least count of stopwatch
gravity by ‘g’ by iii)Measuring periodic time with the help of stop watch
simple pendulum iv) Tabulating observations.
12 To measure i) Drawing the circuit diagram for series connections of the resistances.
unknown resistance ii) Connecting the resistances for series method as per circuit diagram.
by Wheatstone’s iii) Finding the correct position of null point & measuring correct
meter bridge. balancing lenses on Meter bridge.
iv)Tabulating observations.
C) INDUSTRIAL EXPOSURE
Sr. Mode of Exposure Topic

No. (Visit/Exp.Lect/Ind.Survey/…)
1. Field applications in theory lectures in All topics in course syllabus
every topic
2. Practical exercise on overview of field Part of term work
applications of Physics
Report of each Industrial Exposure Activity shall be submitted by student as a part of
term work for evaluation.
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK AND PRACTICAL EXAMINATION

a) Assessment Criteria for Term work :
i) Continuous Assessment of Practical Assignments :
Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per given criteria .
ii) Progressive Skill Test :
One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted as per criteria given
below
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria for Continuous Assessment of Practical work and Progressive skill Test :
Sr.
Criteria Marks allotted
No.
Neat & complete circuit Diagram /
1 05
schematic Diagram.
2 Observations & Result Table 05
Sample Calculations with relevant
3 05
Formulae.
Proper Graphs & Procedure /
4 05
workmanship Safety measures
5 Oral Based on Term Work 05
Total 25
b) Criteria for assessment at semester end practical exam :

Every student has to perform one practical within 2 hours at semester end practical exam which
shall be assessed as per following criteria.
Sr. no Criteria Marks allotted
1 Preparedness for practical 10
2 Correct figures / diagrams 10

3 Observation tables 10
4 Result table / calculations / graphs 10

5 Safety / use of proper tools 10
Total 50
INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES :
Instructional Methods :
1. Lectures cum Discussions 2. Regular Home Assignments. 3. Laboratory work
Teaching and Learning resources:
1. Chalk board 2. Video clips 3.Slides 4. Item Bank 5. Charts
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE MATERIAL :
a) Books / Codes
Sr.
Author Title Publisher
No.
1. B.G. Bhandarkar Applied Physics Nirali publications
2. Manikpure – Applied Physics S. Chand publications

Deshpande
3 Narkhede, Pawar, Applied Science Nirali publications
Sutar
4 Shelake, Shinde, Applied Science Vision publications

Adwankar
5 B.L. Theraja Engineering Physics S. Chand Publishers –

New Delhi
6 Beiser Concept of modern physics Tata Mc-Graw Hill
7 E. Zebro Wski Physics for Technicians Tata Mc-Graw Hill
8 V. Rajendran Engineering Physics Tata McGraw-Hill

Publications
b) Websites
i) http://www.physicsclassroom.com
ii) http://scienceworld.wolfram.com/physics/
iii) http://physics.about.com/
***
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY - CE/ME/SM/MT

Course Abbreviation : ECHA

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 04
06
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Practical
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal)
Term End As per
Evaluation 20 marks ii. One PST of Proforma-II
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - 50 150
RATIONALE:
Engineering chemistry deals with the study of structure, composition and Properties of the materials,
which form the core of the fundamental sciences. Many Processes are based on principles of Chemistry
in various industries such as- Sterilization in City water supply. Lubricants in different machines.
Corrosion and protection of metals , Hence the study of it’s occurrence, extraction,refining &
alloying is important to an engineer.
Engineering materials like Metals, Steels, Alloys, Lubricants, Paints, Insulators, Composite
materials, cement are the backbone of various industries. Hence the knowledge of chemistry is
essential to an aspiring engineers of all branches .
OBJECTIVES :
The student will be able to-.
• Apply the knowledge of electrolysis in engineering applications .
• Apply the properties of metals and alloys in engineering fields.
• Apply knowledge of extraction , properties of iron in engineering application.
• Understand appropriate method to protect the machines and structures from corrosion,Judge the
selection of proper lubricants
• Know appropriate materials while using in constructions
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Section I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 ATOMIC STRUCTURE 07 08
1.1. Definition of atom Atomic Number, Mass

Number, Atomic weight, Isotopes, isobars
1.2. Fundamental particles of atom
1.3. Bohr’s theory of atom
1.4. Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity
1.5. Pauli’s exclusion principle
1.6. Aufbau’s principle
1.7. Rules of distribution of planetary electrons
1.8. Electronic configuration of atoms with atomic
number 1-30
1.9. Electronic configuration of Inert gases and
their characteristics
1.10. Lewis and Langmuir’s concept of stable
electronic configuration
1.11. Electovalency and Co-valency
1.12. Formation Of electrovalent compounds-
NaCl, MgO
1.13. Formation of Covalent compounds-H2O,CO2
2 ELECTROCHEMISTRY
2.1 Definitions- Conductor, Electrolyte, Electrode 07 08
2.2 Diffrence between metallic conduction and
electrolytic conduction
2.3 Distinguish between Atom & Ion
2.4 Arrhenius Theory Of Ionisation
2.5 Degree of Ionisation & Factors affecting degree
of ionization
2.6 Electrolysis of CuSO4 solution by using
Pt –electrodes, Cu-electrodes
2.7 Industrial applications of electrolysis
2.8 Electroplating
2.9 Electro refining of Metals.
2.10 Faraday;s Laws of Electrolysis
2.11 Numerical problems based on Faraday’s laws
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
3. CORROSION AND PROTECTIVE COATING
3.1 Definition and Types of corrosion 07 08
3.2 Dry or Atmospheric corrosion
3.2.1 Oxide Film Formation & its types
3.2.2 Factors affecting atmospheric corrosion
3.3 Wet or electrochemical corrosion
3.3.1 Galvanic Corrosion
3.3.2 Factors influencing immersed corrosion
3.3.3 Nature of the Metal, Nature of Corroding
environment and PH value
3.4 Methods of protection of metal from corrosion
3.4.1 Hot dipping (Galvanizing & Tinning).
3.4.2 Metal spraying.
3.4.3 Metal cladding.
3.4.4 Cementation or diffusion coating-sherardizing
4 WATER 11 16
4.1 Impurities in natural water
4.2 Hard water and Soft water
4.3 Hardness of water- Temporary & Permanent
4.4 Reactions of hard water with soap
4.5 Disadvantages of hard water for domestic purpose
4.6 Disadvantages of hard water for Industrial purpose in
Textile Industry, Sugar Industry, Paper Industry,
Dying Industry
4.7 Scale and Sludge formation
4.8 Causes of scale formation in boilers , it’s
disadvantages and removel of scale
4.9 Sterilization of water
4.9.1 Chlorination –by Cl2, bleaching powder,
chloraamine with chemical reactions
4.10 Ion Exchange method to remove total
hardness of water
4.11 PH concept , PH scale & Numericals
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and
half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section II
Theory
Sr. Topics / Lectures
Evaluation
(Marks)
5 METALLURGY & ALLOYS
5.1 Occurrence of metals
5.2 Distinction between mineral & ore
5.3 Definition of flux, Gangue & Slag
54 Steps involved in metallurgy-Flow chart
5.4.1 Concentration of ores—Physical Methods
5.4.2 Gravity Separation Method
5.4.3 Electromagnetic separation
5.4.4 Froth floatation method
5.5 Chemical Methods
5.5.1 Calcination & Roasting .
5.6 Ores of Iron.
5.7 Extraction of Iron from its ore
5.8 Blast Furnace—construction, Working, Reactions, 12 12
Products.
5.9 Composition, Properties & uses of cast iron,
wrought Iron and Steel.
5.10 Heat treatment of steel-Hardening, Tempering,
Annealing, Normalizing
5.11 Definition and classification of alloy
5.12 Purpose of making alloy
5.13 Composition, Properties, & Engineering
applications of few alloys-
5.13.1 Nonferrous Alloys—
Duralumin, Monal metal and Woods metal
5.13.2 Ferrous Alloys--
Heat resisting steel, Magnetic steel and
Stainless steel
6
LUBRICANTS
6.1 Definition and functions of lubricant.
6.2 Classification of lubricants-- Solid lubricants,
Liquid lubricants and Semi solid lubricants 05 06
6.3 Definition and types of lubrication
a. Boundary lubrication
b. Fluid film lubrication
c. Extreme pressure lubrication
6.4 Characteristics of lubricants--
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Viscosity, Viscosity index, Oiliness, Volatility,
cloud and pour point, saponification value,
Flash and fire point, Acid Value,
6.5 Selection of lubricant for Gears, Cutting tools, ,
Concrete Mixture machine, sewing machine.
7 05 06
PAINT AND VARNISH
7.1 OILPAINT -- Definition of oil paint
7.1.1 Purpose of using oil paint
7.1.2 Requisites of a good paint
7.1.3 Ingredients and functions of oil paint with
suitable example. -Drying oil (vehicle), Drier,
Pigment, Thinner, Filler (extender), Plasticizer
7.1.4 Theory of drying oil film
7.2 VARNISH – Definition, Types, Constituent,
Properties & applications.
7.3 ENAMELS- Definition, Constituent, Properties
and applications.
7.4 EMULSION - Definition, Constituent,
Properties and applications.
7.5 Distinction between paint & varnish
8 CHEMISTRY OF NONMETALIC ENGINNERING

MATERIALS 10 16
8.1 INSULATORS
8.1.1 Definition and Characteristics of good insulator
8.1.2 Preparation of glass wool
8.1.3 Properties & uses of - Glass wool, Thermocole
8.2 ADHESIVES
8.2.1 Definition and Characteristics of good Adhesives
8.2.2 Properties & uses of Adhesives.
8.3 COMPOSITE MATERIALS
8.3.1. Definition and Classification of composite
material
8.3.2 Properties and application of composite material
8.4 PLASTICS
8.4.1 Definition of Polymer and Polymerization
8.4.2 Methods of polymerization- Addition and
condensation methods
8.4.3 Classification of plastics --Thermo-softening
and Thermosetting plastics.
8.4.4 Engineering properties & applications of plastic
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8.5 RUBBER
8.5.1 Definition of Elastomer
8.5.2 Types of Rubber
8.5.3 Distinguish between Natural and Synthetic
rubber
8.5.4 Drawbacks of Natural Rubber
8.5.5 Vulcanization of Rubber
8.5.6 Characteristics and related applications of
rubber
8.6 CEMENT
8.6.1 Portland cement-Definition, chemical composition,
average compound composition ,functions of
constituents. Setting & hardening of Portland
cement with chemical reactions , Function of
gypsum in cement.
8.6.2 Types of cement-Quick setting cement ,Hydraulic
cement
only.
Specification table for setting question paper for semester end theory examination:
Section Name of topic Distribution of marks Total

/ Topic
no.
I/1 Atomic structure 06 02 - 08
I/2 Electrochemistry 02 02 04 08
Corrosion and
I/3 04 02 02 08
protective coating
I/4 Water 08 04 04 16
Metallurgy and
II/5 06 06 06 18
Alloys
II/6 Lubricants 02 02 02 06
II/7 Paint andVarnish 02 02 02 06
Chemistry of
II/8 nonmetallic engg. 04 02 04 10
Materials
Total 34 22 24 80
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
B. TERM WORK Term work shall consist of the following :
i) Laboratory experiments and related skills to be developed :
Sr.
Title of Experiment Skills to be developed
No.
Industrial Applications of
1. Learning skill and collecting information
Chemistry
2 Introduction to Chemistry
laboratory Handling of, glasswares and instruments
3 Preparation of 1 N, 0.5 N &
0.1 N Solutions of different
chemicals like NaOH, HCI, Skill of weighing , measuring and preparation of
soutions
Oxalic acid,
FeSO4, etc.
4 Titration of strong acid and

strong base. (HCl X NaOH)
Skills of determining accurate end point of titration
5 Titration of strong acid, strong

base& weak acid (HCI X NaOH X To develop measurement skills.
H2C2O4.H2O
6 Estimation of chloride content
Utilize practical data for testing & estimation
in water by Mohr’ s method
7 Determination of amount of Ca
and Mg ions present in given
Utilize practical data for testing & estimation
sample of water by E.D.T.A
method
Estimation of viscosity of oils by Determination of viscosity of liquid by using
8
Ostwald’s viscometer method formula
9 Determination of pH of solution
Utilization of practical data for testing &
by Lovibond comparator & pH
estimation
meter
10 Measurement skill utilization of practical data for
Estimation of Ca in limestone.
testing & estimation
11 Estimation of % of Fe in given Measurement skill utilization of practical data for
sample of steel testing & estimation
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ii) Progressive Skills Test :
Sr.
No.
Observation Table & Chemical
1 Reactions 05
2 Correct Observations 10
3 Calculations & Result 05
Attendance / Workmanship /Procedure /
4 Safety measures 05
Total 25
Assessment at semester end practical exam as per Pro-forma II.
iii) Industrial Exposure :
Sr. Mode of Exposure Topic

No. (Visit/Exp.Lect/Ind.Survey/…)
1. Industrial applications in
engineering chemistry
2. Industrial survey
Report of each Industrial Exposure Activity shall be submitted by student as a part of

term work for evaluation.
Criteria for assessment at semester end practical exam:

Observation Table & Chemical
1 Reactions 10
2 Correct Observations 20
3 Calculations & Result 10
Attendance / Workmanship /Procedure /
4 Safety measures 10
Total 50
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Lectures cum Discussions 2. Regular Home Assignments.
1. Chalk board 2. O.H.P. 3.Slides 4. Item Bank
REFERENCE MATERIAL :a) Books / Codes

Sr.
No.
1. Jain & Jain Engineering chemistry Dhanpatrai publishing
co.
2. S. C. Engineering materials Engineering publication
Rangawala
3. Jain & Agarwal Metallurgical Analysis Agarwal publications
4. O. P. Khanna Material science & technology Khanna publication on
2006
5. Rollason Metallurgy for Engineers ASM publication
6. J. C. Kuriacose Chemistry in Engineering & Vol. Mc Graw Hill publishing
1 & 11 company
7. P. C. Jain Chemistry of Engineering
Materials
8. S. S. Dara A text of Engineering Chemistry
b) Websites
i)www.substech.com
ii)www.kentchemistry.com
iii)www.ustudy.in/node/1383
***
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : BASIC MATHEMATICS

Course Abbreviation : EBMT

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 03
04
Practical 01
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Evaluation Theory Practical Term Work
Examination Examination
Average of i) 25 marks for
Term End
Details of two tests of each practical As per As per
Theory Exam
Evaluation 20 marks ii) One PST of Proforma Proforma
(03 hours)
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - -- 100
RATIONALE:
Mathematics is an important prerequisite for the development and understanding of engineering and
technological concepts. For an engineer and technologist, knowledge of mathematics is an effective tool
to pursue and master the applications in the engineering and technological fields. Algebra provides the
language and abstract symbols of mathematics. The topics Matrices and Determinants are helpful for
finding optimum solution of system of simultaneous equations which are formed in the various branches
of engineering using different parameters .Trigonometry is the study of triangles and angles. Contents of
this subject will form foundation for further study in mathematics.
OBJECTIVES:
The student will be able to
1. Apply Cramer’s rule and matrix method to solve simultaneous equations in three variables
2. Apply rules to solve different cases of partial fractions.
3. Apply concept of allied angle, compound angle, multiple and sub-multiple angles to solve
engineering problems.
4. Apply factorization and de-factorization formulae to solve examples.
5. Apply factorization and de-factorization formulae to solve examples.
6. Apply properties and solution of triangle to solve engineering examples.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A) THEORY :
Section I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Determinants 04 08
1.1 Definition, Expansion of second and third order

determinants
1.2 Properties of determinants (without proof),
1.3 Examples on properties
1.4 Crammer’s Rule
2 Partial Fractions 06 10
2.1 Definition of rational, proper and improper fractions

2.2 various cases of partial fractions and Examples
3 Matrices 10 16
3.1 Definition of a matrix, Types of matrices

3.2 Algebra of matrices
3.3 Equality of two matrices, Transpose of a matrix
3.4 Minor and Co-factor of an element of a matrix
3.5 Adjoint of a matrix
3.6 Inverse of a matrix
3.7 Solution of simultaneous equations by matrix method
4 Binomial Theorem 04 06
4.1 Statement, factorial notation. Expansion

4.2 General term
4.3 To find middle term or any term or coefficient of given
expansion
Total 24 40
1.Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic
is one and half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of
2.In each topic, corresponding applications will be explained
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
5 Trigonometric Ratios and Identities 04 08
5.1 System of measurement of angles

5.2 Trigonometric ratios of any angle, Fundamental
Identities
5.3 Examples on Identities
6 Allied, Compound and Multiple Angles 08 14
6.1 Trigonometric ratios of Allied angles, Compound angles

Multiple angles (2A,3A ) ,Sub-multiple angles
6.2 Sum and Product formulae
7 Inverse Circular functions 04 06
7.1 Inverse Circular functions, Examples
8 Properties and solution of any triangle 08 12
8.1 Properties of triangle (sine, cosine, tangent rule)

8.2 Half angle formulae (without proof)
8.3 Solution of any triangle
Total 24 40
2.In each topic corresponding applications will be explained
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Topic Distribution of marks (level wise) Total

Name of topic
No. Knowledge Comprehension Application Marks
1 Determinants 2 2 4 8
2 Partial Fractions 2 2 6 10
3 Matrices 2 2 12 16
4 Binomial Theorem 2 - 4 06
Trigonometric Ratios
5 and Identities 2 2 4 08
Allied, Compound
6 and Multiple Angles 2 - 12 14
Inverse Circular
7 functions 2 - 4 06
Properties and
solution of any
8
triangle 2 2 8 12
TOTAL 16 10 54 80
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one
and half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above
allotted marks only.
B) TUTORIALS
Sr.No Topics Tutorial Content (10 problems in each tutorial)

1 Determinants Examples on properties of determinants & Cramer’s Rule
2 Partial Fractions To resolve given function into partial fractions-Different cases
3 Matrices Examples on addition ,Subtraction and Multiplication of Matrix
To find adjoint ,Inverse of a given matrix,To solve simultaneous

4 Matrices
equation by Matrix method
Binomial To expand (x+y)n by Binomial theorem, To find middle term,any
5
Theorem term, coefficient of given expansion
Trigonometric
6 Ratios and Examples on fundamental Identities of Trigonometry
Identities
Allied, Compound
7 and Multiple Examples on Allied Compound,Multiple & submultiple angles
Allied,
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Compound and
8 Multiple Angles
Inverse Circular
9
functions Inverse circular function
Properties and
solution of any Properties of triangle, Solution of Triangle.
10
triangle
Instructional Methods:
1. Lectures cum Demonstrations

2. Tutorials
1. Chalk board
2. Item Bank
a) Books:
Sr.
No.
A Text Book on Engineering Mathematics Phadake Prakashan,
1. G.V. Kumbhojkar
(First Year Diploma Kolhapur
Patel,Rawal and
2. Basic Mathematics Nirali Prakashan,Pune
others
P.M.Patil and
3. Basic Mathematics Vision Prakashan, Pune
Others
Tech-max
4. Samer Shah Basic Mathematics
Publication,Pune
Pune Vidyarthi
5. S.P.Deshpande Mathematics for polytechnic
Griha,Pune
b) Website
i) www.khanacademy.org
ii) www.easycalculation.com
iii) www.math-magic.com
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

Course Abbreviation : EEMT
Pre-requisite Course(s) : CCE105 Basic Mathematics

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
04
Practical 01
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Term End
Details of two tests of each practical As per As per
Theory Exam
Evaluation 20 marks ii) One PST of Proforma Proforma
(03 hours)
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - -- 100
RATIONALE:
This subject is an extension of Basic mathematics of first semester and a bridge to further study of
applied mathematics. The knowledge of mathematics is useful in other technical areas. Differential
calculus has applications in different engineering branches.For example concepts such as bending
moment, curvature, maxima and minima. Numerical methods are used in programming as an essential
part of computer engineering. In Metrology and quality control statistical methods are used to determine
the quality and suitability of components. For solution of problems in electrical circuits and machine
performances complex number is used Engineering mathematics lays the foundation to understand
technical principles in various fields.
OBJECTIVES: The student will be able:
1. Apply rules and methods of Co-ordinate geometry in Animation , AutoCAD, Computer graphics
etc.
2. Apply rules and methods of differential calculus to solve problems.
3. Apply various numerical methods to solve algebraic and simultaneous equations
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Section I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Point and Distances 02 04
1.1 Point & Distance formula (No Examples & without

Proof )
1.2 Section formulae (No Examples & without proof )
1.3 Centroid of a triangle & Area of Triangle
2 Straight line 06 08
2.1 Various forms of equations of straight line

2.2 Perpendicular distance of a point from a line
2.3 Angle between two straight lines
2.4 Conditions for two straight lines to be parallel and
Perpendicular to each others
2.5 Intersection of two straight lines
3 Circle 04 08
3.1 Equations of Circle ( various forms )

3.2 Equations of tangent and normal to any circle
4 Numerical solution of Algebraic Equations and 12 20

simultaneous Equations
4.1 Bisection Method

4.2 Regula- Falsi Method
4.3 Newton –Raphson Method
4.4 Gauss elimination Method
4.5 Jacobi’s Method
4.6 Gauss-Seidal Method.
Total 24 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
5 Functions And Limits 10 14
5.1 Concept of function, Types of functions and value of a

function
5.2 Meaning of x → 0, x →a, x → ∞,
5.3 Idea of limit of a function, Various theorems ( Without
Proof )
5.4 Evaluation of limits, Factorization, Rationalization,
Simplification ,Infinity Method, Trigonometric Limits,
Exponential Limits, Logarithmic Limits
6 Differentiation 12 20
6.1 Definition, Derivative of standard functions (without

poof),
6.2 Derivative of sum, difference, product and quotient of
two or more functions
6.3 Derivative of composite functions
6.4 Derivative of Inverse functions
6.5 Derivative of Implicit functions
6.6 Derivative of Parametric functions
6.6 Derivative of exponential and logarithmic functions
6.7 Logarithmic differentiation
6.7 Differentiation of second order
7 Applications Of Derivatives 02 06
7.1 Geometrical meaning of derivative (To find equation of

Tangent and normal )
7.2 Maxima and minima of functions
7.3 Displacement, velocity and Acceleration of a particle.
Total 24 40
2. In each topic corresponding applications will be explained
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
Point and Distances
1 2 -- 2 4
2 Straight line 2 2 4 8
Circle
3 2 2 4 8
Numerical solution
of Algebraic
Equations and
4 2 2 16 20
simultaneous
Equations
Functions And Limits

5 2 2 10 14
Differentiation
6 4 4 12 20
Applications Of
7 Derivatives -- -- 6 6
Total 14 12 54 80
marks only.
B. TUTORIALS
Note:Tutorials are to be used to get enough practice
Sr Topic Tutorial Content (10 problems in each tutorial)

No.
Straight line To find equation of straight line- Different forms.
1
Straight line To find perpendicular distance of a point from a line, angle between two
2 lines, intersection of lines.
Circle
3 To find equation of Circle- Different forms
Num.solution of Numerical solution of algebraic equations.
4
Algebraic &
simultaneous Eq Numerical solution of simultaneous equations
5
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Functions And Evaluation of limits by
6
Limits Factorisation,Rationalization,Simplification,Infinity method
Evaluation of limits of Trigonometric functions, Exponential functions,
7 Logarithmic functions.
. Differentiation To find derivatives by product rule, quotient rule, Chain rule, Inverse
8 function, Implicit function
9 . Differentiation To find derivatives of Parametric function, Logarithmic function,

Derivatives of second order
10 Applications of To find equation of Tangent, Normal & To find Maxima and Minima of
Derivatives. a function.
C. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES:

2. Tutorials
1. Chalk board
2. Item Bank
REFERENCE MATERIAL:
a) Books:
Sr.
No.
1. G.V. Kumbhojkar Engineering Mathematics III Phadake Prakashan,
Kolhapur
2. Patel,Rawal, Engineering Mathematics Nirali Prakashan,Pune
3. P.M.Patil and Engineering Mathematics Vision Publication,
others Pune
4. Sameer Shah Engineering Mathematics Tech-Max
Publication, Pune
5. A.M. Vaidya Applied Mathematics Central Techno
b) Websites
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : ENGINEERING DRAWING -1 (CE/ME/MT)

Course Abbreviation : EEDA

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
06
Practical 04
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Term End As per
Theory Exam Proforma
Evaluation 20 marks ii) One PST of Proforma
(04 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE :
Engineering Graphics is the language of engineers. The concept of Engineering Graphics
is used to develop, express the ideas, and convey the instructions which are used to carry out jobs
in the field of Engineering. The course illustrates the techniques of graphics in actual practice. This
Preliminary course aims at building a foundation for the further course in drawing and other allied
subjects. This subject is useful in developing, drafting and sketching skills of students.
OBJECTIVES :
The student after studying this subject will be able to:-
1. Draw different engineering curves and know their applications.
2. Draw orthographic projections of different objects.
3. Visualize three dimensional objects and draw Isometric Projections.
4. Draw simple geometrical figures using CAD package.
5. Solve problem on Projection of planes and solids.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A. THEORY :
SECTION -I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Introduction To Engineering Drawing 05 08
1.1 Drawing Instruments and their uses

1.2 Standard sizes of drawing sheets (ISO-A series)
1.3 Letters and numbers (single stroke vertical)
Convention of lines and their applications.
1.4 Scale (reduced, enlarged & full size) Plain scale and
Diagonal scale.
1.5 Dimensioning technique as per SP-46 (Latest Edition)
Types and applications of chain, parallel and
Co-ordinate dimensioning
1.6 Introduction to CAD software (Basic commands like
Draw, modify). Advantages of CAD,
1.7 Geometrical Constructions
1.8 Draw a basic 2-D geometrical entities using CAD.
2 07 20
Engineering Curves & Loci of Points.
2.1 Draw Conic curves, Involutes, Cycloid and their

applications
2.2 Draw helix, spiral and loci of points from given data.
2.3 Conic Section
2.4 Draw an ellipse by Arc’s of circle method &
Concentric circles method.
2.5 Draw a parabola by Directrix and focus method
& Rectangle method
2.6 Draw a hyperbola by Transverse Axis focus
Method & Rectangular hyperbola (Inclined axes).
2.7 Engineering curves
To draw involutes of circle & pentagon,
To draw a cycloid, epicycloids, hypocycloid
To draw Helix & Archimedean spiral.
Loci of points on any link of
(I) 4 bar mechanism and (II) Single slider crank
Mechanism.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
3 Projection Of Point And Lines 04 12
3.1 Projection of points when point is in first quadrant

Only
3.2 Projection of Line inclined to one Reference plane
and Parallel to other Reference Plane
(Both ends of line should be in first quadrant )
3.3 Projection of Line inclined to Both Reference Plane
SECTION –II
4 Projection Of Planes 05 08
4.1 Projection of Planes of Circular , Square,
Triangular, Rectangular , Pentagonal , Hexagonal
Shapes Inclined To One Reference Plane
And perpendicular to other Reference Plane.
( Planes in First Quadrant Only)
5 Projection Of Solids 05 16
5.1 Projection of Solids Like Cube, Prisms, Pyramids,
Cone, Cylinders and Tetrahedron.
(Axis of Solids inclined to one reference plane and
Parallel to other Reference Plane)
6 Sections Of Solids 06 16
6.1 Sections Of Solids Like Cube, Prisms, Pyramids,
Cone and Cylinders.
(Axis of Solids being vertical and Section plane
inclined to one reference plane and perpendicular
to other Reference Plane)
Total 32 80
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Topic Distribution of marks Total

Name of topic
No. Knowledge Comprehension Application marks
Introduction To
1 04 02 02 08
Engineering Drawing
Engineering curves &
2 Loci of Points. 04 04 12 20
Projection of Point And

3 Lines 04 04 04 12
4
Projection of Planes 02 04 02 08
5
Projection of Solids 04 04 08 16
6
Sections of Solids 02 12 02 16
TOTAL 20 30 30 80
B. TERM WORK Practical:

List of Practical:
Sr Skills / Competencies to be
Title of Practical Exercise
No. developed
1 Geometrical Constructions Using CAD (1 Sheet) To develop drawing skill
2 Engineering curves &Loci of points (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in

conics
3 Projections of line (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
Projections of line
4 Projections of Planes (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
Projections of Planes
5 Projections of Solids (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
Projections of Solids
6 Sections of Solids (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
Sections of Solids
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK

a)Continuous Assessment of Drawing Practical
Every practical Sheet shall be assessed for 25 marks as per criteria given below:
Sr Criteria Marks allotted

No.
1 Attendance 05
2 Preparedness 05
3 Correctness and understanding 10
4 Line work and neatness 05
Total 25
b)Progressive Skill Test :
below:

No.
3 Dimensioning and judgment without measurement 05
4 Proper use of instrument 05
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Classroom practices
Teaching and Learning resources :
1. Chalk board
2. LCD presentations
3. Audio presentations
4. Computer, printer etc.
5. Question Bank
a) Reference Books :
Sr.
No.
1. N. D. Bhatt Engineering Drawing Charotar Publishing House
2010
2. Amar Pathak Engineering Drawing Dreamtech Press, 2010
3. D.Jolhe Engineering Drawing Tata McGraw Hill Edu., 2010
4. M.B.Shah, Engineering Drawing Pearson, 2010
B.C.Rana
5. K. Venugopal Engineering Drawing and New Age Publication, Reprint
Graphics + AutoCAD 2006
6. IS Code, SP – 46 Engineering Drawing Practice --
b)Web Referencs :
1)http://www.design-technology.info/IndProd/drawings/
2) http://graphicalcommunication.skola.edu.mt/syllabus/engineering-drawing/
3) http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Engineering_drawing
4) http://www.engineeringdrawing.org/
5) http://www.teachengineering.org/view_activity
6) www.howtoread.co.in/2013/06/how-to-read-ed.html
7) http://www.slideshare.net/akhilrocker143/edp
8) http://www.24framesdigital.com/pstulpule
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : ENGINEERING DRAWING – 2 (CE/ME/SM/MT)

Course Abbreviation : EEDB

Pre-requisite Course(s) : CCE107 Engineering Drawing-1
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
06
Practical 04
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Term End As per
(04 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
Engineering drawing is the graphical language of engineers. It describes the scientific facts,
Concepts, principles and techniques of drawing in any engineering field to express the ideas,
Conveying the instructions, which are used to carry out jobs in engineering field. This course
aim for building a foundation for the further course in drawing and other allied subjects.
OBJECTIVES:
After studying this subject, the students will be able to:
1. Draw orthographic projections and sectional views of the objects.
2. Draw isometric views from the given orthographic views.
3. Visualize and interpret the orthographic views and draw the missing views from given
orthographic views.
4. Develop lateral surfaces of different solids of different shapes and understand its
engineering applications.
5. Identify various parts of machine like nuts, bolts, screws, different threads and
Prepare proportionate free hand sketches of these basic machine elements.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A. THEORY : SECTION-I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Orthographic Projection 06 16
1.1 Introduction of Orthographic
Projection-First and Third angle Projection Method
1.2 Conversion of Pictorial view into
Orthographic Views.
(First angle Projection Method Only)
1.3 Dimensioning Technique as per SP-46
2 Sectional Views. 06 16
2.1 Types of sections
2.2 Conversion of pictorial view into sectional
Orthographic views.
(First Angle Projection Method only)
3 Free Hand Sketches 04 08

3.1Profiles of Screw Threads( V and Square Thread)
Conventional representation of threads.
3.2 Free hand sketches of nuts and bolts, Washer,

Locking arrangement of nuts, Foundation bolts
3.3 Riveted and Welded Joints.
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
4 Missing Views. 04 08
4.1 Interpretation of the given two orthographic views

and draw missing view from the given two
Orthographic views and Convert one of the given
view into sectional Orthographic views
(First Angle Projection Method only)
5 Isometric Projection 06 16
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Isometric Axis
5.3 Isometric scale
5.4 Isometric view and Isometric Projection
5.5 Conversion of Orthographic Views into
Isometric View/Projection(Including rectangular,
cylindrical objects, representation of slots on
sloping as well as plane surfaces)
6 Developments of Surfaces 06 16
6.1 Methods of Development

6.2 Developments of Lateral surfaces of right solids
Cube, Prism, Cylinders, Pyramid and Cone
6.3 Applications of Development such as Tray, Funnel,
Chimney, Pipe bends etc.
Total 32 80
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Topi Distribution of marks Total

Name of topic
c No. Knowledge Comprehension Application marks
Orthographic
1 04 04 08 16
projection
Sectional Views.
2 04 04 08 16
Free Hand Sketches
3 02 02 04 08
Missing Views
4 02 02 04 08
Isometric Projection
5 04 04 08 16
Developments of
Surfaces
6 04 04 08 16
TOTAL 20 20 40 80
B. TERM WORK Practical:
List of Practical:
No. developed
1 Orthographic projection (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability to
draw Orthographic projection
2 Orthographic projection Using CAD (1 Sheet) To develop CAD software skill
in drawing and design.
3 Sectional Views. (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
sectional views
4 Free Hand Sketches (1 Sheet) To develop ability to draw free
hand sketches of machine
components, screw thread
profile, riveted and welded joints
5 Missing Views (1 Sheet) To develop ability to draw
Missing views and convert given
view into sectional view.
6 Isometric Projection (1 Sheet) To develop ability to draw
Isometric projection
7 Development of Surfaces (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
Development of surfaces of cone,
prism, pyramid and cylinder
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a)Continuous Assessment of Drawing Practical
Every practical Sheet shall be assessed for 25 marks as per criteria given below
Sr. Criteria Marks allotted

No.
1 Attendance 05
Total 25
below
No.
Total 25

1. Chalk board
5. Question Bank
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Reference Books:
Sr.
No.
1. N. D. Bhatt Engineering Drawing Charotar Publishing House
2010
B.C.Rana
b)Web References :
***
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : APPLIED MECHANICS

Course Abbreviation : EAPM

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 04
06
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
Applied mechanics mainly deals with engineering problems regarding equilibrium and motion of
material bodies under the action of mechanical and gravitational forces. As most branches of engineering
come across situations involving bodies subjected to mechanical and gravitational forces, this course
becomes one of the basic courses in engineering. For better understanding of concepts, motivation and
emphasizing the practical relevance of the course, field examples and industrial exposure has been
included in the course content of theory as well as term work. This course lays the foundation for the
courses Mechanics of Structures, Strength of Materials, Design of Steel Structures and RCC Structures,
Machine Design, Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering.
OBJECTIVES :
The student will be able :
1.To determine the resultant of any coplanar force system
2.To draw free body diagrams & determine unknown forces using equilibrium conditions
3.To solve problems involving friction
4.To solve problems in statics by graphical methods
5.To solve problems involving motion using kinematic equations and Newton's laws
6. To solve problems on simple lifting machines and centre of gravity of laminas and solids
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A. THEORY : Section I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Resolution and Composition of Forces 10 12
1.1Definition and meaning of the terms mechanics, applied
mechanics, particle, rigid body, mass, force, weight
1.2Attributes of a force : Magnitude, direction, sense and
position. Principle of transmissibility. Graphical
representation of force
1.3 Force systems : Definition and types of force
systems like coplanar and non–coplanar. Types of
coplanar force systems like concurrent, non-
concurrent, parallel, non-parallel. Field examples of
various force systems
1.4 Moment of a force about a point
1.5 Couple : properties of couple. Field examples of
moments and couples
1.6 Resolution of a force into two orthogonal and oblique
components
1.7 Composition of forces : Definition and meaning of
resultant of a force system. Law of parallelogram of
forces. Varignon's theorem. Determination of resultant
of coplanar force systems by analytical method
1.8 Determination of resultant of above force systems by
graphical method, Law of polygon of forces. Law of
triangle of forces
2 Equilibrium 10 10
2.1 Definition of equilibrium of a body and equilibrant.
Conditions of equilibrium. Law of moments.
2.2 Supports : Definition, types and reactions. Free-body
diagrams of bodies. Field examples.
2.3 Lami's theorem. Field examples.
2.4 Beams : Definition, types and field examples. Types
and field examples of loads. Problems on support
reactions of statically determinate beams carrying
concentrated loads, uniformly distributed loads and
concentrated moments.
2.5 Statically determinate problems on bodies in
equilibrium
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
3 Graphic Statics 06 08
3.1 Advantages and limitations of graphical methods. Bow’s
notation. Space diagram, vector diagram
3.2 Parallelogram, triangle and polygon laws of forces
3.3 Problems on resultant of concurrent force systems
3.4 Funicular polygon. Problems on resultant of non-current
force systems
3.5 Problems on reactions of statically determinate beams
with simple and hinged supports carrying concentrated
loads
4 Friction 06 10
4.1 Definition of friction. Static and dynamic friction. Laws
of friction. Coefficient of friction. Angle of repose,
Angle of friction. Field examples.
4.2 Problems involving bodies on horizontal and inclined
rough surfaces and ladders.
Total 32 40
marks only.
Section II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
5 Centroid and Centre of Gravity 08 08
5.1 Definition and field applications of centroid and

centre of gravity
5.2 Centroid of standard line figures. Problems
involving composite figures made up of standard
line figures
5.3 Centroid of standard laminas. Problems involving
composite laminas made up of standard laminas
5.4 Centre of gravity of standard solids. Problems
involving simple composite solids made up of
standard solids
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
6 Rectilinear Motion 08 08
6.1 Definition of motion, dynamics, kinematics,

kinetics, displacement, speed, velocity, accelera-tion,
motion under gravity. Simple problems with uniform
acceleration. Field examples
6.2 Newton's laws of motion. Simple problems
6.3 Definition of momentum. Law of conservation of
momentum. Simple problems
7 Angular Motion 04 06
7.1 Definition of angular motion, angular displacement,

angular velocity, angular acceleration, torque, moment
of inertia. Field examples
7.2 Kinematic and kinetic equations of angular motion.
Simple problems with uniform angular acceleration
8 Work, Power, Energy 04 08
8.1 Definition of work done by a force. Work done by

torque
8.2 Definition of energy. Forms of energy. Law of
conservation of energy. Field examples
8.3 Definition of power
8.4 Simple problems on work, power and energy
9 Simple Lifting Machines 08 10
9.1Definition of simple lifting machine, load, effort,

mechanical advantage, velocity ratio, efficiency at a
load. Field examples
9.2Law of machine, maximum mechanical advantage,
maximum efficiency, reversibility or non-reversibility of
a machine at a load
9.3Friction in machine, ideal machine, effort lost in friction,
ideal effort, ideal load
9.4Problems on simple lifting machines.(Problems or
questions on any particular machines are not expected;
they shall be covered in practical)
Total 32 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of topic
Resolution and
1 Composition of 02 04 06 12
Forces
2 Equilibrium 02 04 04 10
3 Graphics Statics 02 02 04 08
4 Friction 02 04 04 10
Centroid and Centre
5 02 02 04 08
of Gravity
6 Rectilinear Motion 02 02 04 08
7 Angular Motion 02 02 02 06
Work, Power,
8 02 02 04 08
Energy
Simple Lifting
9 02 04 04 10
Machines
TOTAL 18 26 36 80
B. TERM WORK
Practical Exercises and related skills to be developed :

The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work as detailed in the Laboratoty
Manual for Applied Mechanics developed by the Institute in practical sessions of batches of
about 22 students :
No. developed
1 Collection and presentation of four graphics/ videos 1. Information collection and
on field applications of mechanics presentation
2. Motivation through field exposure
2-7 Experiments on equilibrium of bodies : (any six ) 1. Self learning ability using
laboratory manual
1. Verification of law of polygon of forces 2. Measuring dimensions and
2. Verification of law of parallelogram of forces angles
3. Verification of Varignon's theorem of moments 3. Applying concepts studied
for non-concurrent force system 4. Plotting and interpreting graphs
4. Verification of Lami's theorem 5. Drawing real view diagrams of
5. Determination of reactions of beam machine
6. Determination of coefficient of friction and 6. Time management and team
verification of laws of friction working skills
7. Determination of centroid and centre of gravity 7. Presentation skills
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
No. developed
8-11 Experiments on simple lifting machines: (any four) 1. Studying mechanism of machine
2. Deriving expression for velocity
1. Study of differential axle and wheel ratio of machine
2. Study of simple screw jack 3. Measuring dimensions of machine
3. Study of worm and worm wheel parts using thread, etc.
4. Study of single gear crab 4. Taking readings of loads and
5. Study of double gear crab efforts
6. Study of Weston's differential pulley block 5. Plotting and interpreting graphs
7. Study of two sheaves and three sheaves pulley 6. Drawing real view diagrams of
block machine
8. Study of worm geared pulley block 7. Time management, team working
and presentation skills
12 Graphic Statics : One problem each on concurrent 1. Planning paper space
force system, parallel force system, non-current non- 2. Choice of proper scale
parallel force system and reactions of beam on graph 3. Drawing and presentation skills
papers 4. Applying concepts studied
C. INDUSTRIAL EXPOSURE :
(Included in Laboratory Manual for Applied Mechanics)
SN Mode of Exposure Topic

1. Field examples of course application Every chapter of theory syllabus
2. Field examples of course application Term-work assignment
a)Assessment Criteria for Term work :
i) Continuous Assessment of Practical Assignments :
Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per criteria given in
Laboratory Manual for Applied Mechanics
in Laboratory Manual for Applied Mechanics
Final marks of term work shall be awarded as per Assessment Pro-forma III.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Chalk board
4. Item Bank
a) Books / Journals / IS Codes
Sr.
No.
1. Dixit,Nehate,Shaikh Text Book on Applied Mechanics Vision
2. Sunil Deo Text book on Engineering Mechanics Nirali
3. Bhavikatti and Engineering Mechanics Peerson
Rajashekharappa
4. Mariam & Mariam Engineering Mechanics John Wiley & Sons Inc
5. Beer & Johnston Vector Mechanics : Statics and Dynamics McGraw Hill Inc
b) Websites
i) http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Applied_mechanics
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : WORKSHOP PRACTICES – 1 (ME/SM/MT)
Course Abbreviation : EWSB

Teaching Scheme :

Theory Nil
02
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks Nil -- - 50 -- 50
RATIONALE:
A technician has to work in such environment with his peers, superiors and subordinates for a
major part of his life. Therefore the emphasis on the practical work is needed for the primary experience
of working in the team.
Such working upgrades the mental and manual abilities / skills of using efficiently the basic tools
in most of the industries. The students are required to supervise, maintenance of
equipments, where he needs the knowledge of basic workshop skills such as welding, soldering,
plumbing, turning, drilling, taping, etc.
OBJECTIVES :
The students will be able to
1) Do practices in welding, plumbing, turning, drilling, taping etc.
2) Identify & handle the tools used in above.
3) Read & interpret job drawing, plan various operations & make assembly.
4) Perform job operations as per drawings.
5) Adopt safety practices during working.
6) Operate control different machines & equipments in respective shop.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Contents :-
Practical
Sr. Practical
Evaluation
No. Topics/ Sub-Topics (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Welding shop :-
a) Demonstration of various welding tools, joints of
metals, type of welding machines etc.
b) Demonstration of arc welding techniques.
c) How to use current setting, Earthing connection etc.
and any one composite job involving Butt, Lap joint
from the following pieces of work - 10 16
i) Window frame.
ii) Table frame.
iii) Supporting frame.
iv) Stool frame.
v) Bench frame etc.
One job of anyone of the above or similar job.
2 Plumbing shop :-
a) Demonstration of tools.
b) One job on simple pipe joint with nipple coupling for
standard pipe. Pipe threading using standard die set 10 16
(One job per one group of 04 student).
c) Demonstration of PVC pipe joint with various PVC
fittings & accessories.
3 Wood Working shop :-
a) Demonstration of different wood working tools &
machines.
b) Identify, select & use various Marking, Measuring,
Cutting, Holding & Striking tools & equipments.
c) Operate control different machines & equipments in
respective shop. 12 18
d) Know basic workshop processes.
e) Demonstration of different wood working processes
like Planning, Marking, Chiseling, Grooving, Turning
of wood etc.
f) One simple job based on the above processes for 04 to
06 students group.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
The students will submit the following.
1) Workshop record book showing the details of the job viz. Drawing, Raw material size, time required
completing the job.
2) The journal consisting of the neat sketches, specifications use of the hand tool, and hand operations
based on the demonstration in all the trades during the practical work.
Instructional Strategies :-
1) Demonstration of Practicals.
2) Workshop Record Book, maintenance record book.
3) Workshop Journal.
Criteria for Final assessment of Term work
Particulars Marks
1. Attendance 5
2. Discipline 5
3. Jobs - a) Dimensions 15
b) Finishing 15
4. Workshop Record Book & Journal 10
Total 50
Reference Books :-

S. K. Hajra Chaudary, Elements of workshop Technology – Media Promoters and
Bose, Roy Volume I & II Publishers limited
B.S. Raghuvanshi Elements of workshop Technology –
Volume I & II
D. L. Wakyl Processes and design for manufacturing Prentice Hall
O. P. Khanna and Lal Production Technology – Volume
I & II
R. K. Jain Production Technology Khanna Publication New
Delhi
W.A.J. Chapman Workshop Technology – Volume I ,
II & III
Production Technology Hindustan Machine Tools (HMT) Tata Publication
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : WORKSHOP PRACTICES – 2 (ME/SM/MT)

Course Abbreviation : EWSF

Pre-requisite Course(s) : CCE112 Workshop Practices – 1 (ME/SM/MT)
Teaching Scheme :
Theory Nil
02
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks Nil -- - 50 -- 50
RATIONALE:
The workshop practices are commonly used in Engineering Industry. A technician has to work in
such environment with his peers, superiors and subordinates for a major part of his life. Therefore the
emphasis on the practical work is needed for the primary experience of working in the team.
Such working upgrades the mental and manual abilities / skills of using efficiently the basic tools
in most of the industries. The students are required to supervise, maintenance of equipments, where he
needs the knowledge of basic workshop skills such as welding, soldering, plumbing, turning, drilling,
taping, etc.
OBJECTIVES :
The students will be able to
1)Do practices in welding, plumbing, turning, drilling, taping etc.
2)Identify & handle the tools used in above.
3)Read & interpret job drawing, plan various operations & make assembly.
4)Perform job operations as per drawings.
5)Adopt safety practices during working.
6)Operate control different machines & equipments in respective shop.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Contents :-
Practical
Sr. Practical
Evaluation
(Marks)
1 Wood Working shop :-
a)Any one composite job from the following involving
different operations, joints, turning & planning, surface
finishing by emery paper, varnishing etc. Like
i) Square tube.
ii) Chaurang.
iii) Tee table.
iv) Centre table.
v) Lecturer table.
vi) Table lamp. 09 15
vii) Book rack.
viii) Sofa set.
ix) Bed.
x) Notice board.
xi) Show cases.
xii) Chairs etc.
b)One job of standard size ( any one of the above)
Note - Batch size should be selected depending volume of the
work.
2 Sheet Metal Shop :-
a) Demonstration of different sheet metal tools &
machines
b) Demonstration of different sheet metal operations like
sheet cutting, bending, edging, end curling, lancing,
soldering, riveting etc.
c) To select the proper gauge & type of different G.I.
sheets required for job undertaken
d) One simple job involving sheet metal operations & 09 15
soldering & riveting
e) One composite job from the following -
i) Dustbin.
ii) Letter box.
iii) Grain container (Mapte).
iv) Bucket. v)Tray.
v) Trunk. Vii) Tin Box.
Note - Batch size should be selected depending on volume of
the work.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Contents :-
Practical
Sr. Practical
Evaluation
(Marks)
3 Fitting Shop :-
a) Demonstration of different fitting tools & drilling
machines & power tools.
b) Demonstration of different operations like marking 07 10
filing cutting drilling tapping etc.
c) One simple fitting job (male female assembly type)
involving practice of filing drilling cutting tapping etc.
4 Smithy shop :-
a) Demonstration of different forging tools.
b) Demonstration of different forging processes like
shaping cauliking fullering setting down operations etc. 07 10
c) One job like hook page flat chisel or any hardware item
Note - One job of standard size (salable/marketable article of
per student)
The students will submit the following.
1) Workshop record book showing the details of the job viz. Drawing, Raw material size, time
required completing the job.
2) The journal consisting of the neat sketches, specifications use of the hand tool, and hand
operations based on the demonstration in all the trades during the practical work.
Instructional Strategies :-
1) Demonstration of Practicals.
2) Workshop Record Book, maintenance record book.
3) Workshop Journal.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria for Final assessment of Term work
Particulars Marks
1. Attendance 5
2. Discipline 5
3. Jobs - a) Dimensions 15
b) Finishing 15
4. Workshop Record Book & Journal 10
Total 50
Reference Books :-

S. K. Hajra Chaudary, Elements of workshop Technology – Media Promoters and
Bose, Roy Volume I & II Publishers limited
B.S. Raghuvanshi Elements of workshop Technology –
Volume I & II
O. P. Khanna and Lal Production Technology – Volume
I & II
R. K. Jain Production Technology Khanna Publication New
Delhi
W.A.J. Chapman Workshop Technology – Volume I ,
II & III
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : FUNDAMENTAL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Code : MEE101
Course Abbreviation : EFME

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal)
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE :
Curriculum of Fundamental of Mechanical Engineering has been designed specially to
Diploma Mechanical Engg students so as to acquire basic fundamental principles of Mechanical
Engineering. Awareness and understanding of basic facts and findings with practical approach
towards Mechanical Engineering discipline creates an additional interest and motivation to
students for further higher level education. The present syllabus aims to develop basic
knowledge of discipline and provide a guideline for other courses in Mech.Engg.discipline.
OBJECTIVES : Student will be able
1) To understand and analysis various parts and processes in Vapour compression refrigeration
system.
2) To understand and analysis various parts and processes in I.C.Engine .
3) To understand various parts of Solar devices and their functions.
4 )To understand and run Centrifugal and Reciprocating Pumps.
5) To understand various mechanical Drives .
6) To understand various parts of compressor, their functions and working.
7) To identify various components of power plant and their functions.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Fundamentals of Thermodynamics 05 12
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Basic terms-Property, State, Process, cyclic Process
1.3 Heat, Work, Internal Energy ,Enthalpy and Entropy
1.4 Thermodynamic System and its classification
1.5 First Law of Thermodynamics-Application, Limitation
1.6 Second Law of Thermodynamics-Statements
1.7 Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics
2 Internal Combustion Engine 06 16

2.1 Intoduction
2.2 Classification of I.C.Engine
2.3 I.C.Engine parts and their functions
2.4 Working of four stroke and two stroke engines
2.5 Petrol Engine and Diesel Engine
2.6 Cycles of operation-Otto cycle and Diesel cycle
2.7 Various Systems-Air supply, Fuel supply, Ignition,
Lubrication ,Exhaust and Cooling system
3 Introduction to Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 05 12

System
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Units of Refrigeration
3.3 Vapour Compression refrigeration system
3.4 Vapour Absorption refrigeration system
3.5 Important Refrigerants and Required properties
3.6 Concept of Air Conditioning
3.7 Air Conditioning system-Summer and Winter
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
4 Introduction to Energy Sources and Methods of power 07 16
Generation
4.1 Sources of Energy
4.2 Renewable and Non-Renewable energy sources
4.3 Solar Power plant,
Flat Plate Collector and Concentric Collector
4.4 Wind Power Plant
4.5 Hydro Electric Power Plant
4.6 Geothermal Power Plant
4.7 Tidal Power Plant
4.8 Biogas Plant, Bio Diesel
4.9 Fuel Cell
4.10 Nuclear Power Plant
4.11 Thermal Power Plant
5 Mechanical Drives and Power Transmission 03 08
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Belt Drives-Types of Belt, Rope Drives
5.3 Chain Drive
5.4 Gear Drive – Types of Gears and Gear Trains
5.5 Pulleys
5.6 Coupling
6 Pumps, Compressor and Turbine 06 16
6.1 Pumps-Classification of pump
-Centrifugal and Reciprocating Pumps
Construction and Working
6.2 Compressor- Classification of compressor
- Centrifugal, Reciprocating, Axial Compressor
6.3 Hydraulic turbine– Classification of turbine
- Pelton , Francis and Kaplan turbine
Total 32 80
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
Fundamentals of
1 Thermodynamics 04 04 04 12
Internal Combustion
2 Engine 06 04 06 16
Introduction to
Refrigeration and Air
3 04 02 06 12
Conditioning System
Introduction to Energy
Sources and Methods of
4 08 04 04 16
Power Generation
Mechanical Drives and

5 Power Transmission 02 02 04 08
Pumps ,Compressor and

6 Turbine 06 04 06 16
Total >> 30 20 30 80
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
B. TERM WORK
The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work
Sr Skills / Competencies to
No. be developed
1. Demonstration of Two stroke and Understanding and
Four stroke Petrol and Diesel engines Analysis of various
with the help of models. parts and processes in
I.C.engine
2. Demonstration of Vapour Analysis of various
compression refrigeration system parts and processes in
Vapour compression
refrigeration system
3. Demonstration of Solar heating Ability to understand
equipments various parts of solar
devices and their
functions
4. Demonstration of Centrifugal and Ability to run
Reciprocating Pumps Centrifugal and
Reciprocating Pumps
and to understand
various parts , their
function and working.
5. Demonstration of Compressor Ability to run
compressor and to
understand various
parts, their working and
functions.
6. Demonstration of Mechanical Drives Ability to understand
various mechanical
Drives, their
parts,working and
functions
7. Demonstration of I.C.Engine Ability to run S.I and
C.I engine, to
understand various parts
of engine and their
functions
8. Industrial visit to Diesel power plant Identify various
/ Hydro Electric power plant/ components and their
Automobile Industry/Refrigeration working and functions.
Plant.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1. Industrial visit to Diesel power plant / Hydro Industrial situations
Electric power plant/
Automobile Industry/Refrigeration Plant.

a)Continuous Assessment of Practical :
Every Experiment of practical shall be assessed for 25 marks as per criteria given below:

No.
1 Attendance in regular practical 05
2 Correctness in diagram and experiment writing 05
3 Understanding of Experiment 10
4 Safety measures and Proper handling of devices 05
Total 25
below:
No.
3 Proper Procedure and Workmanship 05
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________


1. Chalk board
4. Computer
5. Question Bank
REFERENCE MATERIAL
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. Dr.S.P Sukhatme Solar Energy Tata McGraw Hill
Publication
2. G.D Rai Non-Conventional Energy Khanna Publication
sources
3. Arora and Power plant Egineering Dhanpat rai and Sons
Domkondwar
4. Patel and Elements of Heat Engine Acharya Publication
Karamchandani (Vol.I,II,III)
5. P.K.Nag Engineering Thermodynamics Tata McGraw Hill
Publication
6. P.L.Ballaney A course in Thermal Dhanpatrai and son
Engineering company
7. Arora and Refrigeration and Air Dhanpat rai and Sons
Domkondwar Conditioning
8. P.N.Ananthanarayanan Refrigeration and Air Tata McGraw Hill
Conditioning Publication
9. Dossat Principles of Refrigeration Pearson Education
[Go to Index]
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
LEVEL – II
LIFE SKILLS AND
PROFESSIONAL
SKILLS COURSES
COURSE ID :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Name : GENERIC SKILLS
Course Abbreviation : EGNS

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Practical
Theory Term Total
Evaluation Theory Practical Examination
Examination Work
(Internal)
Term End As per
Evaluation 20 marks ii) One PST of Proforma-V
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks - -- Nil 25 50 75
RATIONALE:
Acquisition of technical and entrepreneurial competencies is founded on certain generic
skills that are fundamentally essential for all disciplines of technology. Considering the age
group and socio-economical background of the students of the Institute, a set of minimum
essential generic skills has been identified and categorized as i) Concentration skills, ii)
Language skills, iii) Learning Skills, iv) Aesthetic Skills, v) Behavioral Skills and vi) Creativity
Skills. These generic skills will be studied and practiced in this course. Communication Skills
form another major category of generic skills which shall be studied in separate course named
Communication Skills. For mastery and perfection in these skills, consistent practice and an
integrated application is necessary in all subjects of the Programme. Generic skills are essential
to improve the overall quality of learning of the student for all the subjects.
OBJECTIVES: On completion of this Course, the student is expected to be able to

1) Enlist and appreciate generic skills necessary for a technician
2) Analyze his own learning process with reference to domain analysis and FIPN model
3) Attain concentration through thought analysis, omkar, pranayam, prayer and meditation
4) Exhibit language skills viz. vocabulary, recitation, sentence making skills
5) Exhibit learning skills, studying skills and technical skills viz. calculating, graphic skills
6) Exhibit aesthetic skills, behavioral skills and creativity skills
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Sr. Lectures
Topics / Sub-topics
No. (Hours)
1 Overview of generic skills 02
1.1 Definition of generic skills, life skills, soft skills. Difference between
generic skills and specialized skills
1.2 Important generic skills for technicians : Concentration skills, learning
skills, language skills, communication skills, aesthetic skills, behavioral
skills, creativity skills
1.3 Importance of generic skills
2 Concentration Skills 06
2.1 Concentration of mind : Meaning and importance. Hurdles and
common remedies.
2.2 Thoughts : Intensity, speed and duration of thoughts. Positive, negative
and neutral thoughts. Emotions. Management of thoughts.
2.3 Concentration skills : Breathing exercises and pranayam
2.4 Concentration skills : Chanting omkar
2.5 Concentration skills : Prayer - Daily input of positive Thoughts
2.6 Concentration skills : Meditation
3 Learning Skills 08
3.1 Fundamentals of Learning : Definition, characteristics and rewards of
learning. Affective, cognitive and psychomotor domains of learning.
Barriers in learning. FIPN analysis.
3.2 Process of Learning : Reception, understanding, consolidation,
retrieval, internalization, application, reinforcement and enhancement
3.3 Learning Skills: Skills of observing, listening, reading, notes taking,
memorizing, problem solving, graphic, experimenting, surveying,
calculating skills, Cognitive skills.
3.4 Studying skills : Planning and scheduling, Methods of study as per
nature of subject content.
3.5 Self-motivation: Meaning and importance. Improving self-motivation
through activities like inspiring case studies, web search & presentation,
technical quiz/games, group studying, making videos, industry exposure
4 Language Skills 06
4.1 Vocabulary. Pronunciation. Spellings. Recitation.
4.2 Listening and recitation
4.3 Elements of grammar: common rules. Comprehension. Expressing self.
4.4 Word games
5 Aesthetic Skills 02
5.1 Sense of aesthetics. Appearance. Neatness. Decency. Sense of colours
and graphics
5.2 Application of aesthetics in appearance, work, note book and paper
writing, submission work
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sr. Lectures
Topics / Sub-topics
No. (Hours)
6 Behavioral Skills 04
6.1 Manners and etiquettes. Discipline. Sincerity. Morales. Politeness.
Social and civic sense. Assertion without aggression.
7 Creativity Skills 04
7.1 Meaning and importance of creativity.
7.2 Doing things creatively.
TOTAL 32
B. TERM WORK
Practical Exercises and related skills to be developed:

The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work detailed in the Workbook on Generic
Skills developed by the Institute in practical sessions of batches of about 22 students:
Sr. Skills / Competencies to be

Title of the Lab work
No. developed
1. Introduction Game Self-expression, inter-personal rapport
2. Concentration Skills - 1: Chanting of Omkar Concentration
3. Concentration Skills - 2: Breathing exercises Concentration
4. Concentration Skills - 3: Prayer Concentration, recitation, positive
thinking
5. Concentration Skills - 4: Meditation Concentration, thought management
6. Language Skills - 1 : Vocabulary Exercise Vocabulary improvement
7. Language Skills - 2 : Recitation Exercise Pronunciation, language acquaintance
8. Language Skills - 3 : Grammar Language skills
9. Learning Skills - 1 : Domain Analysis of an activity Understanding learning domains
10. Learning Skills - 2 : FIPN Analysis of Learning Learning analysis
11. Learning Skills - 3 : Reading and Notes taking Effective reading and notes taking
12. Learning Skills - 4 : Listening and Notes taking Effective listening and notes taking
13. Learning Skills - 5 : Studying Skills Effective self-studying
14. Technical Skills - 1 : Calculating Skills Efficient use of calculator
15. Technical Skills - 1 : Text-graphic Conversion Graphic and language skills
16. Aesthetic Skills Attitude of aesthetic presentation
17. Behavioral Skills Behavior, mannerism and etiquettes
18. Creativity Skills Attitude of creativity and innovation
19. Self-motivated Activities Self-motivation Skills
C. INDUSTRIAL EXPOSURE:
(Included in Workbook on Generic Skills)
1. Self-motivated Activities Industrial survey, information collection, Biographies of
industrialists, etc.
2. Recitation Exercises Articles on industrial scenario and issues
3. Domain Analysis Analysis of field / industrial activities
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a)Term work :
i) Continuous Assessment of Practical Assignments:

Workbook on Generic Skills.
in Workbook on Generic Skills
Final marks of term work shall be awarded as per Assessment Pro-forma VI
b)Term-end Practical Examination :
Term-end Practical Examination shall be conducted by internal examiner (course teacher) and
external examiner (course teacher of different class from the Institute) as per the following
criteria :
Concen- Aesthetic, Marks

Language Learning Technical
Skills > tration behavioral and Total converted
Skills Skills Skills
Skills creativity skills out of …
Marks > 20 20 20 20 20 100 50
INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES:
1. Lectures cum Demonstrations 2. Classroom practices
1. Chalk board 2. LCD presentations 3. Audio presentations 4. Item Bank
Sr.
No.
1. K. Sudhesh Development of Generic Skills Nandu Printers & Pub, M’bai
2. Kulkarni/Sharma Independent Study Techniques
3. E.H.McGrath Basic Managerial Skills for all McGraw Hill Pub., New Delhi
4. Sahukar & The book of Etiquette and Pustak Mahal, New Delhi
Bhalla Manners
5. Jeanne E.O. Human Learning Pearson Publishers, Mumbai
6. Kenneth/Dubois Learning to Learn Pearson Publishers, Mumbai
7. Fred Luthans Organizational Behavior McGraw-Hill Higher Edu.
b) Websites
i) www.mindtools.com
ii) www.samcerto.com
iii) www.stress.org.uk
iv) www.yogapoint.com
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : COMMUNICATION SKILLS
Course Abbreviation : ECMS
Pre-requisite Course(s) : < nil >

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Total
Evaluation Theory Practical Practical Examination*
Examination
Average of
two tests of 20 i) 25 marks for Term End Practical Exam
Term End
Details of marks each to each practical (2 hours)
Theory Exam
Evaluation be converted ii) One PST of (evaluation as per
out of 10 (02 hours) Proforma-II)
25 marks
marks
Marks 10 -- 40 25 75
* Practical Examination to be conducted by internal examiner (course teacher) and external
examiner (course teacher of different class from the Institute) and marks to be entered as per
Proforma II.
RATIONALE:
Communication being an integral part of every personal and professional human activity,
communication skills plays a fundamental role in education as well as technology. As a
unanimous feedback from the industry in general, technicians need to be specially strengthened
in generic communication skills for their effectiveness in profession and career. Considering the
age group and socio-economical background of the students of the Institute, this course has been
designed with a skill-oriented content with some necessary theoretical foundation. For mastery
and perfection in these skills, consistent practice and integrated application is necessary in all
subjects of the Programme.
OBJECTIVES:
1.Identify his/her communication barriers
2.Write letters, reports, resume in correct language
3.Converse and convince by speaking, deliver prepared and extempore speech
4.Make effective use of body language and graphic communication
5.Prepare and present simple media aided presentations
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A) THEORY :
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Fundamentals of Communication 08 12
1.3 Definition of communication by Newman and Peter
Little. Importance communication
1.4 Model of communication: Sender-Message-Channel-
Receiver-Feedback cycle. Encoding and decoding
1.3 Principles of effective communication
1.4 Types of communication
1.5 Barriers in communication
2 Oral Communication 06 06
2.1 Principles and characteristics of oral communication.
2.2 Tone, pronunciation and accents. Grammar.
2.3 Spoken English : Dialogue, conversation, prepared and
extempore speech, discussion, debate, feedback
3 Written Communication 06 06
3.1 Principles and characteristics of written communication
3.2 Grammar : (Tense, Articles, Prepositions, Change the
Voice, Direct and Indirect Speech)
3.3 Writing reports, letters, small essays, resume, paper,
seminar, notes
4 Non-verbal communication 04 06
4.1 Principles and characteristics of non-verbal
Communication.
4.2 Body Language: visual, tactile, auditory, cultural.
Silence.
4.3 Graphic Communication : Visual illustration, technical
graphic communication.
5 Media Aided Presentation 04 06
5.1 Media aids for presentation : strengths and precautions
5.2 Planning, preparing and making a presentation
5.3 Use of presentation media : OHP, computer, MS
PowerPoint, LCD, board, charts
6 Interview Techniques 04 04
6.1 Preparing for an interview
6.2 Taking a mock interview and facing an interview
Total 32 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
Fundamentals of
1 02 06 04 12
Communication
2 Oral Communication 02 02 02 06
3 Written Communication 02 02 02 06
Non-verbal
4 02 02 02 06
Communication
5 Media aided presentation 02 02 02 06
6 Interview Techniques 00 02 02 04
Total >> 10 16 14 40
B) TERM WORK
The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work as detailed in the Workbook
on Communication Skills developed by the Institute in practical sessions of batches of about 22
students :
No. developed
1. Characteristics of Communication Process Analysis of communication
process
2. My Communication Barriers Self analysis
3. Verbal Communication : Vocabulary Improvement in vocabulary
4. Grammar and Pronunciation Tips Grammar and pronunciation
5. Oral Communication : Prepared Speech Preparing and delivery
6. Oral Communication : Extempore Speech Creative thinking and speaking
7. Oral Communication : Conversation Listening, thinking and speaking
8. Oral Communication : Group Discussion Listening, thinking and convincing
9. Oral Communication : Group Debate Listening, thinking and convincing
10. Written Communication : Drafting Skills Drafting
11. Written Communication : Writing formal and Drafting
Informal Letters
12. Written Communication : Writing Reports Drafting with comprehension
13. Written Communication : Writing Scripts Drafting
14. Non-verbal Communication : Graphic Graphic skills
Communication
15. Non-verbal Communication : Body Language Body language
16. Using Presentation Aids Using presentation aids
17. Interview Techniques Facing interview
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
C) INDUSTRIAL EXPOSURE :
(Included in Workbook on Communication Skills)

1. Oral and Written Communication Exercises Industrial situations
2. Recitation Exercises Articles on industrial scenario and issues
3. Interview Techniques Exercises Industrial situations
a) Assessment Criteria for Term work :
Workbook on Communication Skills.
ii) Progressive Skill Test:
in Workbook on Communication Skills
b) Assessment Criteria for Term-end Practical Examination :
Term-end Practical Examination shall be conducted by internal examiner (course teacher) and
external examiner (course teacher of different class from the Institute) as per the following
criteria
Body Language Letter Marks
Item > Oral Speech Total
Language Grammar Writing out of
Marks > 20 20 20 20 20 100 25
Final marks for term work and practical examination shall be awarded as per Assessment
Pro-forma-II.

1. Chalk board
4. Item Bank
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sr.
No.
1. K. Sudhesh Development of Generic Skills Nandu Printers & Pub, M’bai
2. B.V.Pathak Communication Skills Nirali Prakashan
3. Burgoon Human Communication SAGE Publications Inc.
Michael
4. Geofrey Leech A communicative Grammar of Pearson Education ESL
and Jansvartvik English
5. Elizabeth 101 ways to better communication Pustak Mahal
Hiemey
6. Thomas Huckin Technical Writing and McGraww Hill College
and Leslie Professional Communication Division
b) Websites
i) www.clrp.cornell.edu/workshops/pdf/communication_skills-web.pdf
ii) http://depssa.ignou.ac.in/wiki/images/c/ca/Communication_skills_in_English.pdf www
iii) http://www.cgg.gov.in/Handbook%20on%20Communication%20Skills.pdf
iv) http://www.stf-media.com/31-0-Presentations.html
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES

Course Abbreviation : EPRP

Pre-requisite Course(s) : NIL
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 01
03
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Term Total
Evaluation Theory Practical Examination
Examination Work
(Internal)
i. 25 marks
Average of
for each As per As per
Details of two tests of No Term End
practical Proforma Proforma-V
Evaluation 20 marks Theory Exam
ii. One PST of III
each
25 marks
Marks - -- - 25 50 75
* Oral Examination to be conducted by internal examiner (course teacher) and external
examiner (course teacher of different class from the Institute) and marks to be entered as per
Proforma V.
RATIONALE:
The course Professional Skills is in continuation of the courses Generic Skills and
Communication Skills studied in semester I and II respectively. In order to be a successful
technician in industry, a diploma holder is required to acquire certain professional skills. These
skills shall be studied in this course. An overview and awareness about the world of industry has
been provided in Chapter 1. Professional skills like leadership skills, team building, stress and
conflict management, time management have been dealt with. Aptitude tests have been
introduced. A study of major technological projects in the respective programme discipline has
been included in the syllabus. Term work assignments of the course provide the student on-field
activities as well as self-learning activities providing professional exposure in order to help
develop professional skills.
OBJECTIVES:
1 Develop awareness about industrial scenario of world and India
2 Develop professional skills like leadership, stress and conflict management, team building skills
3 Develop awareness about major industrial projects and biographies of great industrial
Personalities.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A.THEORY :
Sr. Lectures
Topics / Sub-topics
No. (Hours)
1 Industrial Development of India 04

1.5 Introduction to industrial revolution in the world
1.6 Brief history of industry in India
1.7 Broad categories of industries : Manufacturing industry, service
industry
1.8 Present industrial scenario of India : Small scale, medium scale and
major industries in the programme discipline
1.9 Major issues related to industrialization
2 Profession and Professional Skills 06

2.1 Difference in profession, occupation, business
2.2 Leadership : definition, styles and skills
2.3 Team Building : Types of teams. Characteristics of good
team and effective teamwork
2.4 Conflict management : Definition and causes of conflict.
Methods of resolution - negotiating, compromising,
withdrawal, forcing, engagement
2.5 Self SWOT analysis as a professional technician
2.6 Aptitude test
3 Industrial Personalities and Major Projects 06

a. Pioneers of Industrial development of India : Brief biography
of Sir M. Visvesarrya and JRD Tata
b. Biography and contribution of two great industrial
personalities from programme discipline
c. Study of 5 major technological projects in the programme
discipline
Total 16
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
B.TERM WORK
The term work shall consist of a journal containing write ups by students on the following
assignments conducted in practical sessions of batches of about 22 students :
No. developed
1) Information Search through internet on Industrial Information search and
Scenario of India interpretation skills
2) Information Search through actual visit to Information search and
MIDCs on classification of industries interpretation skills
3) Biography and contribution of Sir M. Visverayya Information search and
and J.R.D.Tata presentation skills
4) Biography and contribution of two eminent Information search and
industrialists from programme discipline presentation skills
5) Individual SWOT analysis as a professional Self-analysis skills
technician
6) Leadereship Leadership skills
7) Stress and Conflict Management Stress and conflict management
skills
8) Aptitude test Self-testing skills
9) Case study of a major technological project in Case study skills
the programme discipline
(Included in the contents of Theory and Term work)

1. Theory inputs and practical survey TW Exercise No. 1 and 2
2. Study of biographies of industrialists TW Exercise No. 3 and 4
3. Case study of major industrial project TW Exercise No. 9

Assessment Criteria for Term work :
Sr. No. Criteria Marks allotted
4 Understanding / workmanship 10
Total 50
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks
ii) Progressive Skill Test:
One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted.
Final marks of term work shall be awarded as per Assessment Pro-forma III.
iii)Term End Oral Examination :
Term-end Oral Examination shall be conducted by internal examiner (course teacher) and
external examiner (course teacher of different class from the Institute).

1. Chalk board
Sr.
No.
1. EH McGrath, SJ Basic Managerial Skills for all McGraw Hill
2. Prakash Iyer The Secret of Leadership : Stories
to Awaken, Inspire and Unleash
the Leader Within
b) Websites
i) en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leadership
***
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Abbreviation : EENS

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 02
02
Practical -
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Total
Evaluation Theory Practical Practical TW
Examination
Average of
two tests of
Term End
Details of 20 marks
----- Theory Exam
Evaluation each to be ---- ---
(2 hours)
converted out
of 10 marks
Marks 10 -- 40 --- --- 50
RATIONALE:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and verve in
all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation by our
callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing a grave
environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the last 300
years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural resources,
degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global warming etc. It is
therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect the
environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to protect
the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
OBJECTIVES :
1. To appreciate importance of environment
2. To know key issues about environment
3. To know the reasons for environment degradation
4. To know methods and measures for preservation of environment .
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Nature of Environmental Studies 02 04
1.1 Definition, Scope and Importance of the

environmental studies
1.2 Need for awareness about environmental issues
2 Natural Resources and Associated Problems 06 06
2.1 Renewable and Non-renewable resources : Definition.

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources : General description of forest
resources. Functions and benefits of forest resources.
Effects on environment due to deforestation, timber
extraction, building of dams, waterways.
2.3 Water Resources : Hydrosphere and different sources
of water. Use and overexploitation of surface and
ground water. Effect of floods, draught, dams on
water resources and community
2.4 Mineral Resources : Categories of mineral resources.
Basics of mining activities. Mine safety. Effect of
mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources : Food for all. Effects of modern
Agriculture. World food problem.
3 Ecosystems 04 06
3.1 Concept of Ecosystem
3.2 Structure and functions of ecosystem
3.3 Energy flow in ecosystem
3.4 Major ecosystems in the world
4 Biodiversity and Its Conservation 04 06
4.1 Definition of biodiversity
4.2 Levels of biodiversity
4.3 Value of biodiversity
4.4 Threats to biodiversity
4.5 Conservation of biodiversity
5 Environmental Pollution 06 06
5.1 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources,
effects, prevention
5.2 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources,
effects, prevention
5.3 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
5.4 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects,
Prevention
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
6 Social Issues on Environment 06 06
6.1 Concept of development, sustainable development

6.2 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain
water harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
6.3 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone
layer depletion, Nuclear accidents and Holocaust:
Basic concepts and their effect on climate
6.4 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
7 Environmental Protection 04 06
7.1 Environmental Protection Act

7.2 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
7.3 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
7.4 Wildlife Protection Act
7.5 Forest Conservation Act
7.6 Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect
on environment
7.7 Human Health and Human Rights
Total 32 40
marks only.
Name of topic
No Knowledge Comprehension Application marks
Nature of Environmental
1 02 02 -- 04
Studies
Natural Resources and
2 02 02 02 06
Associated Problems
3 Ecosystems 02 02 02 06
Biodiversity and Its
4 02 02 02 06
Conservation
5 Environmental Pollution 02 02 02 06
Social Issues on
6 02 -- 04 06
Environment
Environmental
7 02 -- 02 06
Protection
Total >> 14 10 14 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1. Chalk board
4. Item Bank
Sr.
No.
1. Anindita Basak Environmental Studies Pearson Education
2. R. Rajgopalan Environmental Studies Oxford University Press
from Crises to Cure
3. Dr. R. J. Ranjit Environmental Studies Wiley India
Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish
Krishnaswamy
b) Websites
1) www.deanza.edu/bhes/StudentHandbook.pd
2) www.lib.berkeley.edu/BIOS/tutor.htm
3) www.southampton.ac.uk/library/infoskills/tutorials.html
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
LEVEL – III
BASIC
TECHNOLOGY
COURSES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : APPLIED MATHEMATICS
Course Abbreviation : EAMT

Pre-requisite Course(s) : CCE106 Engineering Mathematics
Teaching Scheme :
Theory 03
04
Tutorial 01
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Examination Examination)
Term End
Theory Exam As per
Evaluation 20 marks ii. One PST of Proforma
(03 hours) Proforma
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - -- 100
RATIONALE:
Mathematics is an important pre-requisite for the development and understanding of
engineering and technological concepts. For an engineer and technologist, knowledge of
Mathematics is an effective tool to pursue and to master the applications in the
engineering and technological fields. Applied mathematics is designed for its applications
in engineering and technology. It includes integration, differential equation, statistics &
probability. The connection between applied mathematics and its applications in real life
can be understood and appreciated. Integral calculus helps in finding the area, mean value
R. M. S value etc .In analog to digital converter and modulation system integration is
important. Differential equation is used in finding curve, rectilinear motion. Complex
Numbers are useful in Electrical and Electronics Engineering The fundamentals of this
topic are directly useful in understanding engineering applications in various fields.
OBJECTIVES:
The student will be able:
1.Apply rules and methods of Integration to Engineering and technical field..
2.Apply rules and methods of differential equation to solve Engineering and technical Problems
3.Apply various concepts of Statistics in Engineering and technical field.
4.Apply various concepts of Probability in Engineering and technical field
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A.THEORY :
Section I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Indefinite Integrals 12 20
1.1 Definition, Standard formulae
1.2 Integration of sum of two or more functions
1.3 Integration by substitution, Integration by parts
1.4 Integration by partial fractions
1.5 Integration by trigonometric transformations
2 Definite Integrals 06 10
2.1 Definition, Properties of Definite Integration
( without proof)
2.2 Examples based on properties
3 Application of Integration 06 10
3.1 Area under the curve and
3.2 Area between two curves
3.2 Mean value & R.M.S. value of a function
Total 24 40
1.Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each
topic is one and half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt
questions of the above allotted marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section II
Lecture Theory
Sr.
Topics / Sub-topics s Evaluation
No.
(Hours) (Marks)
4 Differential equations 02 04
4.1 Definition of a differential equations
4.2 Order & degree of Differential equations
4.3 General & particular solution of the Differential
equations
4.4 Solutions of Differential equations of first order &
first degree of following types 08 12
i. Variables separable
ii. Equation Reducible to Variable Separable
iii. Homogenous Equation
iv. Exact equations
v. Linear Equations
vi. Bernoulli’s Equation
4.5 Applications of Differential equations
4.5.1 Geometrical Application 02 04
4.5.2 Application to rates
5 STATISTICS
5.1 Measures of dispersion - range, mean deviation
from mean and median, and standard deviation.
5.2 Variance and its coefficient. 08 12
5.3 Comparisons of two sets of observations.
6 PROBABILITY
6.1 Definition of random experiment , Sample space,
event, occurrence of event & types of events 04 08
6.2 Definition of probability, addition &
multiplication theorems of probability, Simple
examples
Total 24 40
1.Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on
each topic is one and half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to
attempt questions of the above allotted marks only.
2. In each topic corresponding applications will be explained
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of topic
1 Indefinite Integrals 4 10 6 20
2 Definite Integrals 2 2 6 10
Application of
3 -- -- 10 10
Integration
Differential
4 6 6 8 20
equations
5 Statistics 4 4 8 12
6 Probability 2 2 4 8
B.TUTORIALS
Note: Tutorials are to be used to get enough practice [One batch for 20 Students ]
No.
Indefinite To evaluate Integration using standard formulae, To evaluate Integration
1 Integrals using Substitution Method
Indefinite To evaluate Integration of Various forms.

2 Integrals
Indefinite
To evaluate Integration using by Part rule and Partial fraction method
3 Integrals
4 Definite Integrals To evaluate Define Integration for various forms and using properties
5 Application of Apply Integration concepts to find Area ,Mean value, RMS value
Integration
Differential To determine Order and Degree of D.E. Formation and Solution of D.E.
6 Equations Examples on V.S. Form ,Reducible to V.S. Form of D.E.
7 Differential Examples on Homogeneous, Linear & Bernoulli’s form of D.E.

Equations Examples on Applications of D.E.
8 Statistics Examples on mean deviation from mean and median, Standard deviation
9 Statistics Variance and its coefficient, comparison of two sets

10 Probability Examples on addition & multiplication theorems of probability
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
C.INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES:
2. Tutorials
1. Chalk board
2. Item Bank
3 Formulae Charts
4 Power point presentation
REFERENCE MATERIAL:
a) Books:
Sr.
No.
Kolhapur
2. Patel, Rawal, Applied Mathematics Nirali Prakashan,Pune
3. P.M. Patil and Applied Mathematics Vision Publication,
others Pune
4. Sameer Shah Applied Mathematics Tech-Max Publication, Pune
5. P.N. Wartikar Higher engineering mathematics Pune vidyarthi Griha

Prakashan , Pune
6. H .K .Dass Applied mathematics S .Chand publication
7. B .S Grewal Higher engineering Mathematics Khanna publication, New
Delhi
b) Websites i) www.khanacademy.org
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : THERMAL ENGINEERING
Course Abbreviation : ETEG
TEACHING AND EVALUATION SCHEME:

Teaching Scheme:
Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End
Theory Exam -
Evaluation 20 marks ii. One PST of Proforma-I
(03 hours)
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - 25 125
RATIONALE :
Mechanical engineers have to work with various power producing & power absorbing devices
like boilers, turbines, compressors, pumps etc. In order to understand the principles, construction
& working of these devices, it is essential to understand the concept of energy, work, heat &
conversion between them. Hence it is important to study the subject of Thermal Engineering,
which is a core subject. It includes the study of various sources of energy, basic laws & concept
of thermodynamics, gas laws, properties of steam & generation. Heat transfer forms the basis for
different power engineering application. Boilers find application in different process industries.
Steam turbines and condensers are the major component of any steam power plant. Mechanical
engineer should understand working and application of these devices.
OBJECTIVES :
1. Apply fundamental concepts of thermodynamics to thermodynamic systems.
2. Understand various laws of thermodynamics.
3. Apply various Gas laws & ideal gas processes to various thermodynamic systems.
4. Calculate properties of two phase system by using steam tables/ Mollier charts.
5. Explain construction & working of boilers, mountings & accessories.
6. Apply the first law of thermodynamics various thermodynamic systems.
7. Understand the second law of thermodynamics.
8. Understand working principles of common high pressure boilers
9. Understand working principles of various mounting and accessories
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A.THEORY : SECTION-I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics / Sub-topic Evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS OF THERMODYNAMICS
1.1 Concept of pure substance, Thermodynamic system, boundary, 06 10
surrounding
1.2 Classification of thermodynamic systems: Open system, Closed
system & Isolated system
1.3 Properties of system, extensive & intensive properties like specific
volume, Density, pressure, Temperature, enthalpy, entropy, total
volume, Specific enthalpy etc., State of a system, Point function and
Path function, Thermodynamic process and cycle
1.4 Energy: Potential, kinetic and internal energy, Law of conservation of
energy, concept of heat and work, similarities and differences
2. LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS
2.1 Zeroth law of thermodynamics 08 12
2.2 First law of thermodynamics: statement, limitations, Application to
close & open System, Flow work, Steady flow energy
equation(SFEE), SFEE applied to engineering systems like boiler,
condenser, evaporator, nozzle, turbine, pump & compressor (Simple
Numerical)
2.3 Second law of thermodynamics:
Kelvin Plank and clausius statement and their equivalence,
application of Second law: Heat engine, heat pump and refrigerator
3. THERMODYNAMIC PROCESSES OF IDEAL GASES
3.1 Ideal gas (perfect gas), Boyle’s law, Charle’s law, Gay-Lussac’s law, 06 10
Ideal gas equation, Characteristic & universal gas constants, Specific
heat at constant pressure & constant volume, ratio of Specific heats
3.2 Thermodynamic processes of perfect gases: Isochoric, Isobaric,
Isothermal, Adiabatic, Polytropic, Throttling, Representation on P-V
and T-S diagrams, Calculation of work done, Heat transfer, Change
in internal energy in each process (simple Numerical)
4. HEAT TRANSFER
4.1 Modes of heat transfer 04 08
4.2 Fourier’s law, Thermal conductivity, Heat transfer through slab
(Simple Numericals)
4.3 Newton’s law of cooling
4.4 Stefan-Boltzman Law, Concept of Black Body
4.5 Heat exchangers: Classification and Applications
TOTAL 24 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics/Sub-topic Evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
5. PROPERTIES OF STEAM 08 12
5.1 Steam as a pure substance, Generation of steam at constant
pressure (P-V, T-S, H-S and P-H Diagram)
5.2 Types of steam: wet, dry, superheated steam
5.3 Properties of steam: sensible, latent and total heat, specific
volume, dryness fraction (simple Numericals)
5.4 Use of steam table: Determination of steam properties
5.5 Mollier diagrams ( H-S diagrams): Simple Numerical
5.6 Combined separating and throttling calorimeter (No numerical)
STEAM GENERATION
6. 6.1 Classification of boilers, construction and working of common 06 10
boilers (Lancashire boiler and Babcock & Wilcox boiler)
6.2 Mountings and Accessories: Function and locations of
Mountings and Accessories on boiler
6.3 Study of high-pressure boilers like Lamont boiler, Loeffler
boiler, Benson boiler and velox boiler
6.4 Boiler draught: Objectives, classification, relative merits and
Demerits
STEAM NOZZLES AND TURBINES
7. 7.1 Steam Nozzle: Types and applications, Nozzle efficiency 06 10
7.2 Steam Turbines: Principles of working, Classification
7.3 Compounding of steam turbine: Necessity and methods of
compounding
7.4 Methods to improve efficiency of steam turbine, reheat of steam
& regenerative feed heating
CONDENSERS & COOLING TOWERS
8. 8.1 Objectives, working of Jet & Surface condensers & differences 04 08
8.2 Elements of steam condensing plant
8.3 Dalton’s law of partial pressure and its application
8.4 Sources of air leakage and its effects
8.5 Cooling towers and spray ponds: types, construction & Working.
TOTAL 24 40
half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Distribution of marks (level wise)
Section / Total
Name of topic Comprehensio
Topic no. Knowledge Application marks
n
I/1 Heat Transfer 04 02 02 08
I/2 Fundamental Concepts of
04 04 02 10
thermodynamics
I/3 Laws of thermodynamics 04 02 06 12
I/4 Thermodynamic processes
04 02 04 10
of Ideal gases
II/5 Properties of Steam 04 04 04 12
II/6 Steam Generation 04 04 02 10
II/7 Steam Nozzles and
04 04 02 10
Turbines
II/8 Condenser and Cooling
02 02 04 08
Towers
Total 28 28 24 80
B.TERM WORK
The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work as detailed in practical
sessions of batches of about 22 students:
Sr.
Title of Practical Exercise Skills / Competencies to be developed
No
Determination of Thermal Conductivity of Experimental Performance observation and
1.
Metal rod interpretation on the set up
Demonstration of construction and working Trace path of flue gasses., water and steam
of fire tube boilers & water tube boilers circuit in a boiler ,interpret steam tables,
2 with the help of models charts etc. mollier chart and relationship between
different thermodynamic properties
Demonstration of construction and working
3
of Boiler mountings with the help of above Function, working & use of boiler mountings
mentioned training aids
4 Demonstration of construction and working Function, working & use of boiler accessories
of Boiler accessories
Study of steam Nozzles and turbine Function, working use of steam Nozzles and
5
turbine
Study of condenser and cooling towers Function, working use of condenser ,cooling
6
tower in steam power plant
Industrial visit (sugar factory) Collect information about boiler, accessories,
7 mountings, condenser, cooling tower nozzle
and turbines used in industry
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
C.. INDUSTRIAL EXPOSURE :

a) As per practical no. 5 & 6 expert lectures by prominent personalities from industries.
b) As per practical no. 7 an Industrial visit of students to Sugar Factory.
D.ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK AND PRACTICAL EXAMINATION

i)Continuous Assessment of Practical Assignments :
Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per following criteria
Sr.
No.
1 Quality and neatness of term work 05
2 Attendance 05
3 Participation 05
4 Understanding 05
5 Representation 05
Total 25
ii)Progressive Skill Test :

One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted .
iii)Term-end Oral Examination :

Term-end Oral Examination shall be conducted as per the following criteria:
Sr.
no
1 Attendance 08
3 Participation 05
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
E.INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES :
1. Lectures and discussions
3. Laboratory experiences and laboratory interactive sessions
4. Experiences and discussions through industrial visits
5.Time bound assignments

1 Chalk board
2 Demonstrative kits
3 Demonstrative charts
4 LCD presentations
5 Audio presentations
6 Item Bank
F.REFERENCE MATERIAL :
a) Books
Sr.
Author Title Publication
No.
01 Domkundwar V. M. A Course in Thermal Engineering Dhanpat Rai & Co.
02 P. L. Ballaney A Course in Thermal Engineering Khanna Publishers
03 R. S. Khurmi A Text book of Thermal S. Chand & co. Ltd.
Engineering
04 R. K. Rajput A Course in Thermal Engineering Laxmi Publication, Delhi
05 Patel and Karmchandani Heat Engine Vol. - I & II Acharya Publication
06 P. K. Nag Engineering Thermodynamics Tata McGraw Hill
07 B. K. Sarkar Thermal Engineering Tata McGraw Hill
b) Websites
1) http://chemwiki.ucdavis.edu/Physical_Chemistry/Thermodynamics/Ideal_Gas_Processes
2) http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Laws_of_thermodynamics
3) https://www.boundless.com/chemistry/thermodynamics--2/the-laws-of-thermodynamics/the-
three-laws-of-thermodynamics/
4) http://www2.estrellamountain.edu/faculty/farabee/biobk/biobookener1.html
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : MACHINE DRAWING
Course Abbreviation : EMDR
Pre-requisite Course(s) : CCE108 Engineering Drawing - 2
Teaching Scheme:
Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End
Theory Exam -
(04 hours)
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - 50 150
RATIONALE:
A Mechanical Engineering Diploma holder, irrespective of his field of operation in an industry,
is expected to possess a thorough understanding of drawing, which includes clear spatial
visualization of objects and the proficiency in reading and interpreting a wide variety of
production drawings. Besides, he is also expected to possess certain degree of drafting skills
depending upon his job function, to perform his day to day activity i.e. communicating and
discussing ideas with his supervisors and passing instructions to his subordinates unambiguously.
This course envisages reinforcing and enhancing the knowledge and skill acquired in the earlier
two courses viz. Engineering Drawing I & II.
OBJECTIVES:
The students will be able to,
1. Visualize the given object and its auxiliary view
2. Understand various conventions as per B.I.S.
3. Draw the interpenetration curves of common engineering objects used in sheet metal
work
4. Read and interpret the given production drawings
5. Know the significance and use of tolerances of size, forms and positions
6. Draw the assembly and details of the given object as specified
7. Prepare a production drawing of component using any CAD package
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A THEORY : SECTION-I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
AUXILIARY VIEWS
1. 1.1 Study of auxiliary planes, 06 08
1.2 Projection of objects on auxiliary planes,
Completing the regular views with the help of given auxiliary
views (Use first angle method of projection)
CONVENTIONAL REPRESENTATION
2. 2.1 Standard conventions using SP – 46 (1988) 04 08
(a) Materials C.I., M.S, Brass, Bronze, Aluminum, wood,
Glass, Concrete and Rubber
(b) Long and short break in pipe, rod and shaft.
(c) Ball and Roller bearing, pipe joints, cocks, valves, internal /
external threads
(d) Various sections- Half, removed, revolved, offset, partial
and aligned sections
(e) Knurling, serrated shafts, splined shafts and chain wheels.
(f) Springs with square and flat ends, Gears, sprocket wheel
(g) Countersunk & counter bore
(h) Tapers
ELEMENTS OF PRODUCTION DRAWING
3. 3.1 Characteristics of surface roughness: Indication of machining 06 12
symbol showing direction of lay, roughness grades, machining
allowances, manufacturing methods
3.2 Introduction to ISO system of tolerance, dimensional tolerances,
elements of interchangeable system, hole & shaft basis system, limits,
fits & allowances. Selection of fit (Simple Numerical)
3.3 Geometrical tolerances, tolerances of form, position & its
Representation
3.4 General welding symbols, sectional representation and symbols
used in Engineering practices
INTERSECTION OF SOLIDS
4. 4.1 Curves of intersection of the surfaces of the solids in the 08 12
following cases;
(a) Prism with prism, Cylinder with cylinder, Prism with
Cylinder; when (i) the axes are at 90° and intersecting
(ii) The axes are at 90° and Offset
(b) Cylinder with Cone
When axis of cylinder is parallel to both the reference planes
and cone resting on base on HP and with axis intersecting
and offset from axis of cylinder
Total 24 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
5. DETAILS TO ASSEMBLY 12 20
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Preparation of the assembly drawing from the given detailed
drawing of various machine components or parts
a) Couplings – Universal couplings & Oldham’s Coupling,
b) Bearing – Foot Step Bearing & Pedestal Bearing
c) Lathe tool Post
d) Machine vice & Pipe Vice
e) Screw Jack
f) Steam Stop Valve
6. ASSEMBLY TO DETAILS 12 20
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Preparation of detailed working drawing from the given
assembly drawing of machine component or part
a) Pedestal Bearing
b) Lathe Tail Stock
c) Drilling Jig
d) Piston & connecting rod
e) Gland and Stuffing box Assembly
f) Valve – Not more than eight parts
g) Fast & loose pulley
Total 24 40
Section Distribution of marks (level wise)
Total
/ Topic Name of topic
No.
I/1 Auxiliary Views 04 02 02 08
I/2 Conventional Representation 03 02 03 08
I/3 Elements of Production Drawing 04 02 06 12
I/4 Intersection of solids 04 02 06 12
II/5 Details to Assembly 06 06 08 20
II/6 Assembly to Details 06 06 08 20
Total 80
marks only.
B. TERM WORK
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sr.
Practical Exercises Skills developed
No.
Auxiliary views To Draw auxiliary view on given
1. One sheet containing two problems and at least two auxiliary plane.
problems as home assignment in sketch book.
2. Conventional Representation as per SP – 46 (1988) To be able to know standard
- one sheet. conventions & representation
3. Limit, Fit, Tolerances and Machining Symbols To understand the system of limits,
- one sheet. fits, tolerances and machining symbols
4. Study of production drawings of any two simple To understand the use of elements of
components and its preparation – one sheet production drawing for actual part
manufacturing
5. Intersection of Solids To draw curves of intersection of
One sheet containing at least two problems two solids
(At least four problems for home assignment in sketch
book)
6. Details to Assembly: To understand how to draw assembly
Preparation of assembly drawing of any one drawing from given detailed drawing
component from its detailed drawing covering
surface roughness symbols, limits, fits, tolerances
and part list – One sheet (at least two problems as
home assignment in sketch book)
7. Assembly to Details: To interpret and draw detailed drawing
Preparation of detailed drawing from the given assembly from the given assembly drawing
drawing of any one part covering all the elements of
production drawing – One sheet (at least two problems as
home assignment in sketch book)
8. One simple problem on assembly and detailed drawing To operate CAD package for drafting
using any CAD Package of small components
(Assembly containing maximum 6 to 7 components-
minimum)
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Included in practical no. 3 & 4 and expert lectures by prominent personalities from industry
D. ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK AND PRACTICAL EXAMINATION

a)Continuous Assessment of Practical Assignments :
Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per criteria given below:
Sr.
Criteria Marks Allotted
No.
1. Attendance 05
1. Preparedness for practical 05
3. Correctness and Understanding 10
4. Line work and neatness 05
Total 25
One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted as per criteria given in
proforma-I
c)Term-end Oral Examination :

Sr.
No.
1 Understanding of the subject 15
2 Quality of term-work 15
Dimensioning and judgment without
3 10
measurement
4 Proper use of drawing instruments 10
Total 50
Final Assessment of Oral Examination shall be done as per Pro-forma-I.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
E. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES:
5. Time bound assignments
1. Chalk board
2. Demonstrative kits
3. Demonstrative charts
6. Item Bank
F. REFERENCE MATERIAL :
a) Books
Sr. Publication
Author Title
No.
01 N.D.Bhatt Machine Drawing Charotar Publication,
Anand
02 IS Code SP 46 (1988) Code of practice for general Engineering Drawing
engineering drawing. Practice for School and
colleges
03 L.K.Narayanan, Production Drawing New Age International
P.Kannaich, Publication
K.VenkatReddy
04 P.S.Gill Machine Drawing S.K.Kataria and Sons
05 M.L.Dabhade Engineering Graphics (For
Topic on Auxiliary Views)
06 Sidheshwar Machine Drawing Tata McGraw Hill
b) Websites
a) http://draftingmanuals.tpub.com/14040/css/14040_49.htm
b) http://www.roymech.co.uk/Useful_Tables/Drawing/Mech_Drawings.html
c) http://www.me.metu.edu.tr/courses/me114/Lectures/assembly.htm#1
d) http://www.fkm.utm.my/~arahim/Assembly%20Drawing.pdf
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
Course Abbreviation : EMPR
TEACHING & EVALUATION SCHEME :

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 02
06
Practical 04
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Practical
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End As per
Theory Exam Pro forma-
Evaluation 20 marks ii. One PST of Pro forma-IV
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 25 150
RATIONALE :
Manufacturing process is a basic technology course for mechanical engineering. It enhances the skills
which the students have acquired in workshop practice and basic workshop practice. Manufacturing is the
basic area for mechanical engineering technician. The technician should be introduced to the basic
processes of manufacturing. The course will help the student to get familiarize with working principles
and operations like with various patterns, molding, casting, fabrication, brazing, press work etc.
The basic knowledge of these processes will be helpful to select most suitable processes
for conversion of raw material into finished product as per the requirement.
Objectives:
Students will be able to,
1) Know and identify basic manufacturing processes for manufacturing different
components.
2) Operate and control different machine tools and equipments.
3) Use the basic machine tools like lathe & drilling machine.
4) Select the specific manufacturing process for the job.
5) Use safety practices while working on various machines.
6) Select the basic manufacturing process for different components to be machined.
7) Explain the different types of plastic moulding processes.
8) Specify need of pattern allowances
9) Identify a joining method for fabrication.
CONTENT :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
A. THEORY SECTION - I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 PATTERN MAKING 03 08
1.1 Pattern making materials (wood, plastics, rubbers, plasters, waxes)
1.2 Types of patterns:
Single piece pattern, Split pattern, Match plate pattern, Sweep
pattern, Skeleton pattern
1.3 Pattern making allowances:Shrinkage, draft, machining, distortion, rapping
1.4 Core prints:Horizontal, vertical, hanging, balancing, wing
1.5 Colour coding for patterns and core boxes.
2 MOULDING 04 12
2.1 Molding sand
2.2 Types:
Green, Dry, Loam, Facing, Backing, System, parting, Core sand
2.3 Properties of Molding sand
2.4 Molding processes:
Green sand, Dry sand, Machine and Shell Moulding
3 CASTING 05 12
3.1 Casting Principle and operation
3.2 Die casting methods:
Hot chamber die casting method, Cold chamber die casting
method
3.3 Melting furnace for ferrous metals:
Cupola furnace: Construction and operation, zones ,capacity,
Temperature range
3.3 Melting furnace for non ferrous metals
3.4 Defects in casting:
Causes and remedies
4 FORGING 04 08
4.1 Forging Processes:
Drop forging, Upset forging, Die on Press forging.
4.2 Types of Dies:
Open die, closed die
4.3 Forging Operations:
Fullering, Edging, Bending, Blocking
4.4 Forgeable materials and Forge ability:
Forging temperature, Grain flow in forged parts
Total 16 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and half times
the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted marks only.
SECTION - II
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
5 PRESS WORKING 03 08
5.1 Types of presses and Specifications
5.2 Press working operations :
Cutting, bending, drawing, punching, blanking, notching,
lancing
5.3 Die set components:
Punch and die shoe, guide pin, bolster plate, Stripper, stock
guide, feed stock, pilot
6 FABRICATION 05 12
6.1 Classification.
6.2 Arc welding :
Principle, Applications
Shielded metal arc welding, Sub-merged arc welding
6.3 Resistance welding:
Spot, Projection, Seam, Percussion
6.4 Gas welding:
Techniques, Types of flames, Welding defects.
6.5 Soldering and Brazing:
Types, Principle and Application
7 MECHANICAL WORKING OF METALS 05 12
7.1 Principles of rolling and extrusion
7.2 Hot and cold rolling
7.3 Types of rolling mills
7.4 Different sections of rolled parts.
7.5 Methods of extrusion:
Direct, Indirect, Backward &Impact Extrusion
7.6 Advantages, disadvantages and applications
8 PLASTIC MOULDING 03 08
8.1 Introduction and properties of plastics
8.2 Types of plastics and applications
8.3 Plastic moulding methods, construction and working
principle
8.3.1 Compression molding
8.3.2 Injection molding
8.3.3 Blow molding
Total 16 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and half times the marks
allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Distribution of marks (level wise) Total
Topic No. Name of topic
1 Pattern Making 4 2 2 08
2 Molding 4 4 4 12
3 Casting 4 4 4 12
4 Forging 2 4 2 8
5 Press working 4 2 2 8
6 Fabrication 4 4 4 12
Mechanical working of
7 4 4 4 12
metals
8 Plastic Molding 4 2 2 8
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
No
One simple wooden Pattern job of maximum To develop the skill of manufacturing
1 4 students per group, each group should patterns and their allowances
make different type of pattern.
2 One turning job on lathe containing the To know about to operate lathe machine
operations like facing, plain turning, step and to know about speed, feed, depth of cut
turning, grooving, chamfering. and to perform different operations
3 Assignment on types of molding sands To know and identified different molding
methods for different casting methods.
4 One composite welding job having two To fabricate component by using welding
different joints. (Batch of four students per
job.)
5 Industrial Visit to TIG / MIG welding setup To know and observe TIG / MIG welding
and write report
6 Assignment on forging die nomenclature. To know forging die nomenclature.
7 Demonstration on molding processes. To understand the molding processes.
1 Industrial Visits Pattern Making , Molding & Casting
2 Industrial Visits Fabrication
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK :

____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1 Attendance at regular practical 05
2 Sequence of operations 05
3 Correct dimension 06
4 Overall finishing 05
25
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR PRACTICAL EXAMINSTION :
1 Preparation & procedure of component 05
4 Safety / use of proper tools / workmanship 05
Total 25
1) Lectures and discussions.
2) Laboratory experiences and laboratory interactive sessions.
3) Time bound assignments.
1) Chalk-board.
2) Demonstrative kits.
3) Demonstrative charts.
4) O.H.P
a) Books
S. K. Hajra Chaudary, Elements of workshop Technology – Volume I Media Promoters and
Bose, Roy & II Publishers limited
B.S. Raghuvanshi Elements of workshop Technology – Volume I
& II
O. P. Khanna and Lal Production Technology – Volume I & II
P. L. Jain Principles of foundry Technology
W.A.J. Chapman Workshop Technology – Volume I , II & III
b) Websites :
1) www.thegreenbook.com
2) www.proweldindustries.in
3) www.cmtwinches.com
COURSE ID :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Name : THEORY OF ENGINEERING DESIGN
Course Abbreviation : ETED
Pre-requisite Course(s) : CCE110 Applied Mechanics
Teaching Scheme :
Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Term End As per
Details of two tests of each practical --
Evaluation 20 marks ii.One PST of 25
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE :
This subject is a continuation of Applied Mechanics. It deals with mechanics of deferrable
bodies. Effects of various force systems on various machine components can be studied and
deformations and stresses can be determined using the principles in this subject. Mechanical
properties of engineering materials are also studied in this subject. It lays a foundation for the
subject Machine Design.
OBJECTIVES :
1. To study basic structural actions on various machine components.
2. To study properties of engineering materials by laboratory testing.
3. To determine stresses and strains simple and composite sections due to axial tension and
compression
4. To determine stresses and deformations using strain energy principles
5. To determine principle stresses in structural components
6. To determine shear force and bending moment diagrams for beams
7. To determine moment of inertia of various sections
8. To analyze circular sections for torsion
9. To determine flexural and shear stresses in members
CONTENT :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1. Axial Tension and Compression 08 12
1.1 Basic mechanical actions : i) axial tension, ii) axial compression,
iii) flexure, iv) shear, v) torsion. Combination of basic mechanical
actions
1.2 Definition of axial and eccentric loading. Definition of uni-axial,
bi-axial and tri-axial loading. Diagrams showing these loadings.
1.3 Examples of components in axial tension and compression
1.4 Numerical problems on elongation of uni-axial members made up
of i) single material ii) combination of two or more materials
along the length (compound members). Practical examples.
1.5 Composite sections : Stresses and elongation under uni-axial
loading. Modular ratio.
1.6 Lateral strains and deformation. Poisson's ratio
1.7 Bi-axial and tri-axial loading. Volumetric stress and strain, bulk
modulus.
1.8 Temperature stresses in simple members
2.8 Shear stresses and shear strains. Modulus of rigidity
2.9 Relation among elastic constants
2. Strain Energy 04 08
2.1 Definition of strain energy, resilience, proof resilience and
modulus of resilience. Strain energy stored due to gradual, sudden
and impact loading
2.2 Stresses and elongation due to gradual, sudden and impact loading.
3. Shear Forces and Bending Moments in Beams 08 12
3.1 Types of beams : simply supported, over-hanging, cantilever,

propped cantilever, fixed, continuous. Types of loads :
concentrated loads, uniformly distributed loads and uniformly
varying loads, couple loads
3.2 Definition of shear force and bending moment at a section.Sign
convention. Relation between shear force and bending moment
3.3 Shear force diagrams and bending moment diagrams for
cantilever, simply supported and overhanging beams subjected to
above loads. Point of contra flexure.
4. Moment of Inertia 04 08
4.1 Definition of moment of inertia. Moment of inertia of regular
plane figures square rectangle triangle circle
4.2 Parallel axes theorem and perpendicular axes theorem
4.3 Moment of Inertia of composite figures. Radius of gyration
Total 24 40
Section- II
Sr. Topics Teaching Theory
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
No. (Hours) evaluation
Marks
5. Direct and Bending Stresses 08 12
5.1 Flexural behavior of beams: Definition and assumptions in theory of
simple bending. Tension and compression zones, neutral axis, bending
stresses, stress distribution over the section, moment of resistance,
section modulus. Flexural formula and its application (no derivation)
5.2 Concept of direct and eccentric loading. Practical examples.
5.3 Stresses in machine components subjected to eccentric loads with
eccentricity about only one axis. Core of section
6. Shear Stresses in Beams 04 08
6.1 Assumptions and shear stress formula. (no derivation)
6.2 Shear stress distribution across different across sections of beam e.g.
rectangular, circular, I section, T section.
6.3 Relation between maximum and average shear stress
7. Principal Stresses and Principal Planes 04 08
7.1 Definition of principal stresses and principal planes. Different states of
stresses. Diagrammatic representation.
7.2 Analytical method : Determination of normal and shear stresses on
oblique planes of an element subjected to axial stresses and / or shear
stresses. Resultant stress and its obliquity. Determination of principal
planes, principal stresses, maximum shear stresses and their planes.
Planes of maximum obliquity.
7.3 Graphical method : Mohr's circle method to determine the above
stresses and planes
8. Torsion in Shafts 08 12
8.1 Assumptions in theory of torsion. Definition of torsional load, twisting
moment, angle of twist. Torsional equation, shear stress distribution
across a section of solid and hollow circular shaft.
8.2 Torsional strength of hollow and solid shafts. Saving in weight due to
hollow shafts. Power transmitted by shafts.
8.3 Combined torsion and bending
Total 24 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic are one
and half times the marks allotted above. Candidate can attempt questions for the above allotted marks.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Topic Distribution of Marks (level wise) Total

Name of topic
no. Knowledge Comprehension Application Marks
Axial Tension and Axial
1. 02 02 08 12
Compression
2. Strain Energy 02 02 04 08
Shear Forces and Bending
3. 02 02 08 12
Moments in Beams
4. Moment of Inertia 02 02 04 08
5. Direct and Bending Stresses 02 02 08 12
6. Shear Stresses in Beams 02 02 04 08
Principal Stresses and
7. 02 02 04 08
Principal Planes
8. Torsion in Shafts 02 02 08 12
Total 16 16 48 80
one and half times the marks allotted above and the candidates can attempt questions of the
above allotted marks only.
B. TERM WORK
(Laboratory Manual on Theory of Engineering Design developed by the Institute shall be used)
a) Laboratory Experiments and related skills to be developed :
Laboratory Experience (any 6) Skills / Competencies to be developed

Sr.
No.
1. Study of Universal Testing Machine.
2. Tension Test on mild steel bar.
1. To study behavior of materials under
3. Flexural and deflection test on steel
different actions.
beam specimen.
2. To follow standard test procedure.
4. Impact test on metals.
3. To interpret of test results with the help of
5. Compression test on metals.
relevant I.S. Code.
6. Hardness test.
4. To appreciate graphical methods.
7. Shear test on metals.
8. Non Destructive Testing using
Rebound Hammer
b) Graphical Assignments :
1. Principal stresses and planes ( Mohr’s circle ) ( 4 problems )

2. Shear force and bending moment diagrams. ( 4 problems )
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Tutorial exercises
1. Chalk board
2. Use of charts
3. Audio visual presentations
4. Item Bank
Sr.
No.
Timoshenko, S.P. Affiliated East West
1. Elements of Strength of Materials
and Young, D.H. Press Pvt. Ltd., Delhi
2. Deo, Sunil Text book on Mechanics of Structures Nirali Publications
3. Bhavikatti, S.S. Engineering Mechanics Peerson
4. Khurmi, R.S. Strength of Materials S.Chand & Co., Delhi
Harpe Collins
5. Singer, F.L. Strength of Materials
Publishers India Delhi
b) Websites
i. en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Structural_mechanics
ii. http://www.powershow.com/view/15b5baNzRmY/CE_203Structural_Mechanics_powerp
oint_ppt_presentation
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course ID
Course Name : MACHINE TOOLS
Course Abbreviation : EMTL
Pre-requisite Course(s) : MEE304 Manufacturing Processes
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
06
Practical 04
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Practical
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End As per
Evaluation 20 marks ii. One PST of Pro forma-IV
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 25 150
RATIONALE :
Diploma technician often comes across various types of basic production processes. He /
She required to select operate and control processes. He / She also required knowing about
various cutting tools, latest improvements in production processes, surface finishing process and
plastic processes.
Objectives :
The student should be able to,
1) Use the basic machine tools like lathe drilling milling machines.
2) Know about reciprocating machines like shaping slotting and planning machines and its
applications.
3) Understand the importance of surface finish and related surface finishing methods.
4) Understand and select the gear cutting process.
5) Know about grinding machines and grinding methods.
6) Understand and select plastic molding processes.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT
Theory
Sr. Lectures
Topics/Sub-topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 THEORY OF METAL CUTTING 04 12
1.1 Basic concepts of machining, cutting tool
1.2 Cutting tool materials & its properties
1.3 Single point cutting tool & its geometry
1.4 Tool signature
1.5 Tool angles
1.6 Cutting fluids or coolants:
Types, purpose and desirable characteristics
1.7 Formation of chips:
Continuous, discontinuous, built up edge
1.8 Chip breakers
1.9 Orthogonal cutting and oblique cutting
2 LATHE MACHINE 06 16
2.1 Types of lathes : Light duty, Medium duty and Heavy duty geared
lathe, CNC lathe
2.2 Specifications
2.3 Basic parts and their functions
2.4 Operations – Turning, parting off, Knurling,
facing, Boring, drilling, threading, step turning, taper turning
2.5 Cutting parameters
2.6 Cutting speed, feed, depth of cut & machining time
3 DRILLING MACHINES 06 12
3.1 Classification
3.2 Radial drilling machine
3.3 Specifications
3.4 Operations : Drilling, Boring, Counter boring, Countersinking,
Reaming, Spot facing, Tapping, Lapping, Grinding, Trepanning.
3.5 Twist drill nomenclature
3.6 Types of drills
3.7 Cutting parameters
3.8 Cutting speed, feed, depth of cut & machining time
TOTAL 16 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and half times the marks allotted
above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION - II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
Topics/Sub-topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
4 SHAPING, PLANING & SLOTTING MACHINES 04 10
5.1 Types of: Shapers, planners, slotting machines
5.2 Basic parts and their specifications
5.3 Quick return mechanism of shaping machine
5.4 Cutting speed, feed, depth of cut, machining time of each
machine
5 GRINDING 05 12
6.1 Classification of Grinding machines
6.2 Grinding wheel types and shapes
6.3 Tool & cutter grinder
6.4 Designation of grinding wheel as per IS 551-1954
6.5 Types of abrasive
6.6 Grit, grade & structure of grinding wheel
6.7 Selection of grinding wheels
6.7.1 Constant factors
6.7.2 Variable factors
6 SUPER FINISHING PROCESSES 04 10
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Methods of surface finishing & Set up, working, advantages,
limitation & applications of following processes
7.3 Honing Process
7.4 Lapping Process
7.5 Burnishing Process
7.6 Polishing and buffing process
7 BROACHING MACHINE 03 08
8.1 Introduction
8.2 Classification of broaching machine
8.3 Basic parts of horizontal broaching machine & their functions
8.4 Broaching methods & operations
8.5 Advantages & limitations of broaching machines
TOTAL 16 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of topic
1 Theory of Metal Cutting 04 04 02 12
2 Lathe Machine 05 05 05 15
3 Drilling Machine 04 04 05 13
Shaping, Planning &
4 04 04 02 10
Slotting Machines
5 Grinding Machines 04 04 04 12
6 Super Finishing Processes 04 04 02 10
7 Broaching Machine 02 04 02 08
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
Laboratory experience Skills developed
No.
One job on lathe containing the operations To select speed, feed and tool for various
1 like plain turning, threading, boring, taper operations like turning, boring , threading
turning. etc.
2 One job on Shaping/Slotting Machine To know Shaping/Slotting methods
One pattern making composite job of
3 To develop the skill of pattern making
thermocol material
One assignment on accessories &
attachment – chucks, mandrels, carrier and To know about various basic parts of lathe
4
catch plates rests, face plate and angle machine and various attachments.
plate, grinding attachment used on lathe.
One assignment on types of grinding To know about various grinding wheels
5
wheels. and shapes.
Demonstration of center less grinding
6 machine & report writing/ One job on To develop advance grinding methods.
grinding machine.
One assignment on cutting tool To know theory of metal cutting of single
7 nomenclature and tool signature of single point cutting tools geometry and
point cutting tool. nomenclature.
One assignment on accessories &
To maintain maintenance of machine tools
8 attachment, work holding & tool holding
like milling machine.
devises used on milling machine.
One assignment on shapers, planers and To know the working principle of shapers,
9
slotting machines. planers and slotting machines.
Assignment on accessories and To know various parts and attachments of
10
attachments used on lathe. lathe.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1 Industrial Visits Lathe Machine / Drilling Machine / Milling

Machine
2 Industrial Visits Broaching Machine / Grinding Machine

25

Total 25
1 Lectures and discussions.
2 Laboratory experiences and laboratory interactive sessions.

1 Chalk-board.
2 Demonstrative kits.
3 Demonstrative charts.
4 O.H.P
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Books
Sr. Author Title Publisher
No.
S. K. Hajra Chaudary, Elements of workshop Media Promoters and
1
Bose, Roy Technology-Volume I & II Publishers Limited.
O. P. Khanna & Lal Production Technology Dhanpat Rai
2
Volume- I & II Publications.
W. A. J. Chapman, S. Workshop Technology- Viva Books (p) Ltd.
3
J. Martin Volume –I,II & III
R.B. Gupta Production Technology Satya Prakashan New
4
Delhi
H.S.Bawa Workshop Technology Tata McGraw-Hill
5
Volume-I& II
John A. Schey Introduction to Manufacturing McGraw-Hill
6
Processes
M. Adithan Manufacturing Technology New age
7
A. B. Gupta International
B. L. Juneja Fundamental of metal cutting New age international
8
and machine tools limited.
Steve Krar, Technology of Machine Tata McGraw-Hill
9
Albert Check Tools. International.
P. N. Rao Manufacturing Technology Tata McGraw-Hill
10 Metal Cutting & Machne
tools
b) Websites :
1) www.swikuo.com
2) www.workshopmachinery.com
3) www.thomasnet.com
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : APPLIED ELECTRONICS

Course Abbreviation : EAEX

Teaching Scheme:
Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
each practical Term End As per As per
Details of two tests of
Theory Exam Pro forma- Proforma-
Evaluation 20 marks ii) One PST of
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 - 125
Rationale:
Nowadays electronic circuits are extensively used in industries as well as in
domestic uses like fan speed regulators, light flashers, electronic door bells etc. Hence
knowledge of various types of electronic components, circuits and their applications is a
necessity for an engineer from any branch of engineering. For understanding the operation of any
circuit it is essential to understanding the principles of operation of the basic devices used in
electronic circuits and the operation of some of simple circuits basic electronics, applied
electronics & digital electronics which forms the subject matter of this paper.
Objectives:
1) Understand the basic concepts about current, voltage, and power.
2) Understand the basic concepts about resistor, inductor, and capacitor.
2) Apply these principles to analysis of electronic circuits.
3) Understand number system.
4) Learn logic gates & Boolean algebra.
5) Design digital circuit using K-Map techniques.
6) Test circuits/equipment as per relevant standards.
7) Use electronic circuits in various applications.
8) Learn the applications of the devices studied in different circuits.
9) Learn more details of the devices, circuits and applications.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION – I
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 06 16
1.1 Conductor – semiconductor.
1.2 Intrinsic/ extrinsic semiconductor.
1.3 Diode:
P-N junction diode, Zener diode, characteristic and
Applications.
1.4 Transistor:
Common base, common collector, Common emitter.
Characteristics and applications.
Introduction of Biasing of Transistor.
1.5 Common emitter as a single stage amplifier.
1.6 Field effect transistor: JFET and its two types- N channel
and P channel. Characteristics and Application,
MOSFET it’s types.
2. UNREGULATED POWER SUPPLY 05 12
2.1 Concept of unregulated power supply.
2.2 Rectifier: Half wave, Full wave and Bridge rectifier-
Circuit diagram and waveforms.
2.3 Comparison of rectifiers -efficiency, Ripple factor &
application.
2.4 Need of filter.
2.5 Type of Filters: L, C, L-C, π- filters operation &
working.
2.6 Comparison of filters.
3. REGULATED POWER SUPPLY 05 12
3.1Zener diode as a voltage regulator in line and load
Regulation
3.2 Regulator ICs 78XX, 79XX series.
3.3 Principle of operation, block diagram and Application of
Shunt regulated, series regulated, switch mode power
Supply (SMPS), IC 723 power supply.
3.4 Block diagram of UPS, Concept of online & offline UPS.
3.5 Concept of constant current limiting, fold back current
limiting, constant voltage source and constant current
Source.
TOTAL 16 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION - II
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
4. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 04 10
4.1 Decimal, binary, octal and hexadecimal number systems.
4.2 Decimal to binary and binary to decimal conversion.
4.3 Decimal to octal and octal to decimal conversion.
4.4 Decimal to hex and hex to decimal conversion.
4.5 Binary to hex and hex to binary conversion.
4.6 Logic Gates: Symbols, truth table.
4.7 Boolean Algebra: Demorgans theorem.
5. COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 06 15
5.1 Sum of product and product of sum reduction.
5.2 Max term and Min term, conversion between SOP and
POS form.
5.3 K – map reduction techniques (upto 3 variables).
5.4 Adders/ Substractor: Diagram, truth table, principal of
operation.
5.5 Encoder/ Decoder: Diagram, truth table, principal of
operation.
5.6 Mux / Demux: Diagram, truth table, principal.
6. SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 06 15
6.1 Sequential circuits: SR, JK, Flip-flop, latch.
6.2 Registor: Modes - SISO, SIPO, PIPO, PISO and
application.
6.3 Counter: Up counter, Down counter, Up-Down counter,
and mode N.
TOTAL 16 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section / Distribution of marks (level wise) Total
Name of topic
Topic no. Knowledge Comprehension Application marks
Semiconductor
I/1 Devices 12 2 2 16
I/2 Unregulated Power 4 4 4 12
Supply
I/3 Regulated Power 4 4 4 12
Supply
II/4 Digital Electronics 4 2 4 10
II/5 Combinational 8 4 3 15
Circuits
II/6 Sequential Circuits 7 4 4 15
marks only.
Laboratory experiences and related skills developed.
Sr.
No.
1 To study a diode characteristics. Understanding characteristics diode.
2 To study transistor characteristics. Understanding characteristics transistor.
3 To study CE amplifier. Observing working of CE amplifier.
4 To study Rectifiers circuits Observing working & waveforms.
5 To study Filter circuits Observing working & waveforms
6 To study three terminal Observing working Principle
regulators(78XX,79XX Series)
7 To study logic gates. Understanding working of logic gates.
8 To study MUX/DEMUX decoder. Observing working of MUX/DEMUX decoder.
9 To study register/counter. Understanding working of registers /counters.
Criteria for Continuous Assessment of Practical work :

5 Understanding/Safety / use of proper tools 5
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Instructional strategies:
Teaching and Learning resources, including references:
1) Chalk-board.
Criteria for assessment of Progressive Skill Test:
no
Safety / use of proper tools /
4 05
workmanship
Total 25
References:
A) Books
Sr Author Title Publisher

No.
01 V K Mehta Principles of Electronics S. Chand and company Ltd.
02 Paul Malvino Electronic Principles Tata McGraw Hill Publishers
03 A Mottershed Electronic Devices and Prentice Hall of India
Components
04 R P Jam Modern Digital Electronics Tata McGraw Hill Publishers
05 Grob Bernard Basic Electronics Tata McGraw Hill Publishers
B) Websites
1) www.ni.com/pdf/manuals/371585a.pdf
2) proton.ucting.udg.mx/tutorial/multisim/mm_9/MultiSIM_9_PRO.pdf
3) www.engr.newpaltz.edu/~bai/CSE45208/ewb.pdf
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : THEORY OF MACHINES & MECHANISMS
Course Abbreviation : ETMM

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - 25 125
Rationale:
Mechanical Engg. Diploma holders are more concern with various mechanisms, and
machines in workshops, industries and in practices. The diploma technicians therefore have
knowledge of repair, keep maintenance, modify if required the various machines and
mechanism. He should able to analyze and identify construction, interpret operation and become
expertise in repair and maintenance of various machines and mechanism. This course is a study
of different mechanism, their analysis and synthesis, which includes study of motion and forces
concerning different part of mechanisms. Also it makes student’s acquaint to study about
transmission and transformation of motion, its analysis its and improvement.
Objectives:- The student will able to,
1. To analysis velocity and acc of different parts of simple mechanisms.
2. To understand the construction and working of different mechanisms like motion
conversion mechanism, motion transmission device and their selection for
Engineering applications.
3. To understand analysis of motion, improve and its control.
4. To draw cam profiles and gear profiles.
5. To understand working principle of friction clutch & governor
6. To develop some innovative ideas with existing simple mechanism with its simple
modifications.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT
A. THEORY
SECTION - I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics Evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. FUNDAMENTAL AND TYPES OF MECHANISMS
1.1 Link, Kinematic link, Types of links, Structure, Difference
between machine and Structure
1.2 Kinematics pair and its type, Constrained Motion and its types
Kinematics chain, Mechanism and machines 06 12
1.3 Four bar mechanism ,its inversions and Characteristics
1.4 Single slider crank chain and its inversions
1.5 Double slider crank chain and its inversions
2. VELOCITY AND ACCELERATION ANALYSIS
2.1 Absolute and relative motion
2.2 Motion of a link, angular velocity of link
2.3 Determination of velocity of link by Instantaneous centre
method
08 14
2.4 Determination of velocity of link by relative velocity method
2.5 Acceleration, angular acceleration, Centripetal and tangential
acceleration
2.6 Determination of acceleration in simple mechanisms
2.7 Klein’s construction to determine velocity and acceleration
3. LOWER PAIRS
3.1 Straight Line Mechanisms
3.2 Paucellier, Hart, Scott-Russell, Grass-Hopper, Tchebicheff
04 06
Mechanisms
3.3 Pantograph
3.4 Types of Steering Gear- Davis and Ackermann Steering Gear
4. CAMS
4.1 Types of cams, types of followers
4.2 Terminology of cams
06 08
4.3 Motion of followers: Uniform velocity, Simple harmonic motion
and Uniform acceleration and retardation
4.4 Construction of cam profile
Total 24 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and half times the marks allotted above
but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION – II
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
5. POWER TRANSMISSION
5.1 Belt Drives: Types, Material, velocity ratio, Length of belt, Slip
and Creep, Ratio of tensions, Initial tension,
Centrifugal tension. (Simple Numerical)
5.2 Power transmitted by belt drive, Condition for maximum
power transmission (Simple Numerical) 08 12
5.3 Rope Drives: Types, Material, Application, Advantages and
Limitations
5.4 Chain Drive: Types, Material, Application, Advantages and
Limitations
6. FRICTION CLUTCHES
6.1 Types of clutches: singleplate, multiplate, cone, centrifugal

04 08
Clutches
6.2 Derivation for torque and power transmission by uniform
pressure and uniform wear theory (Simple Numerical)
7. GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS
7.1 Gears: Types, Materials, Terminology of gears.
7.2 Forms of teeth, cycloidal and involute profile teeth, comparison
between them. 06 10
7.3 Gear Trains: Types, Velocity ratio (Simple Numerical)
8. GOVERNORS
8.1 Governor: Need, Function, Terminology, Classification and
Application
8.2 Construction and working of Centrifugal, Watt, Porter, Proell,
06 10
Hartnell, Wilson-Hartnell, Pickering and inertia type governor
Total 24 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of topic
Fundamental and types
I/1 4 4 4 12
of mechanisms
Velocity and
I/2 4 4 6 14
acceleration analysis
I/3 Lower Pairs 2 2 2 06
I/4 Cams 4 6 - 08
II/5 Power Transmission 4 4 4 12
II/6 Friction clutches 4 - 4 08
II/7 Gears and gear trains 4 2 4 10
II/8 Governors 3 4 3 10
Total 80
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
no
List the mechanisms available in the Observation and collection of information
surrounding; identify its name, links, regarding various mechanisms in view of
1
kinematic pairs and type of kinematics theoretical concepts.
pair, types of inversions.
Solve any two problems on velocity & Solving problems by graphical method
acceleration in mechanism.
i) By Instantaneous Center
2
Method
ii) By Relative Velocity Method
iii) Klein’s Construction
Information regarding application of
3 Assignment on Straight line mechanisms
mechanism
Construction of cam profiles with two skill required to draw cam profile.
4
different follower motion
Identify any type of clutch mechanism Application in practice as the concept in theory.
5 from an automobile and calculate torque,
power etc.
Study of belt, rope and chain drives Observation, drawing & collection of
6
information regarding various types of drives.
7 Drawing sheet on gear tooth profile Skill required to draw tooth-form of gear
Demonstration of Governor Calculation of Angular Velocity ,Radius of
8
rotation and Centrifugal Force
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Criteria for Continuous Assessment of Practical work and Progressive Skill Test:
Sr.
No.
2 Attendance 05
3 Participation 05
4 Understanding 05
5 Representation 05
Total 25
ii)Progressive Skill Test :
iii)Term-end Oral/Practical Examination :
Sr.
no
1 Understanding 10
3 Participation 05
4 Presentation 05
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1 Lectures and discussions.
2 Laboratory experiences and laboratory interactive sessions.
3 Time bound assignments.

1 Chalk-board.
2 Demonstrative kits.
3 Demonstrative charts.
Sr.
no
4 10
workmanship
Total 50
a) Books
Sr.
No.
01 P. L. Ballaney Theory of machines Khanna Publishers, Delhi
02 Thomas Bevan Theory of machines Pearson Education, India
03 S.S. Rattan Theory of machines Tata McGraw Hill
04 R.S. Khurmi & J.K. Gupta Theory of machines S. Chand & co. Ltd.
b) Websites
1. books.google.co.in/books/about/Theory_of_Machines.html?id...
2. www.freebookez.com/theory-of-machine-by-r-s-khurmi/
3. mechatronics2u.blogspot.com/.../theory-of-machines-by-khurmi-e-book.html
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY

Course Abbreviation : EELT

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
i. 25 marks for
Average of Term End As per
Details of each practical As per
two tests of 20 Theory Exam Proforma-
Evaluation ii. One PST of 25 Proforma-III
marks each (03 hours)
marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
Rationale:
The basics of Electrical engineering are in the study of simple preliminary circuits provided
with D.C supplies. All Electrical Engineering applications are based on the behaviour of the three basic
parameters viz. resistance, inductance and capacitance when provided with different types of energy
inputs (e.g. Direct current and alternating current). The electro-magnetic devices work on the principle of
magnetism and electromagnetism. All electrical machines can be studied and understood only if these
principles are well understood with a little bit of sound mathematical base. Students should deal with the
Principle, construction and applications of various electrical measuring instruments used in electrical
circuits.This course aims to empower mechanical engineering students with basic knowledge of
electricity and its field applications related to industries.
Objectives:
The students will be able to:
1. Describe fundamental quantities in electricity and magnetism
2. Study of basic electrical elements
3. Classify DC and AC motors.
4. To measure electrical quantities
5. Select motors/ drives for application.
6. Study importance of starters in AC and DC machines.
7. Study working principle, construction, types, losses of transformer.
8. Understand the application of electrical heating.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT
A. THEORY
Section I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1. Introduction to elements of electric networks 05 12
1.1. Ohm’s law and Definition of Electric networks
1.2. Definitions of Resistance, Inductance, and capacitance.
1.3 Equivalent resistance of series, parallel and
combination resistance systems.
1.4 Kirchhoff’s laws
1.5 Work, power and energy
1 6 Simple numerical problems based on the above.
2 Measuring Instruments & Alternating Current Circuits: 06 16
2.1 Types of Measuring Instruments
2.2 Use of Ammeter, Voltmeter, Wattmeter,
Energy meter , Clip – on – Meter
& Digital Multi meter .
2.3 Law of Electromagnetic Induction
2.4 Concept of sinusoidal waveform.
2.5 Definition of cycle, frequency and periodic time.
2.6 Instantaneous value, average value, R.M.S & peak value
2.7 Purely Resistive A.C. Circuit.
2.8 Purely Inductive A.C. Circuit.
2.9 Purely Capacitive A.C. Circuit.
2.10 Definition of reactance, impedance and their units.
2.11 R-L, R-C and R-L-C series circuit
3 Three Phase Alternating Current Circuits: 05 12

3.1 Polyphase System
3.2 Generation of Three-Phase Voltages.
3.3 Three-Phase Supply Systems.
3.3 Three-Phase Three-Wire System.
3.5 Three-Phase Four-Wire System.
3.6 Balanced Load.
3.7 Voltage, Current and Power relation in STAR
connection.
3.8 Voltage, Current and Power Relation in DELTA
connection.
3.9 Earting – Necessity , Types of earthing
i) Plate earthing ii) Pipe Earthing
3.10 Megger – Construction and its use
Total 16 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
4 Single Phase Transformer 04 10
4.1 Principle of working
4.2 Constructional features
4.3 E.M.F. equation statement
4.4 Voltage and current ratios of Ideal transformer.
4.5 Practical transformer
4.6 Losses and efficiency
4.7 Approximate voltage drop and regulation by
Direct loading.
5 Electric Heating (Only Description & Diagram): 05 12
5.1 Resistance Heating (Ovens).
5.2 Induction Heating Principle and Induction Heating
Furnaces.
5.3 Block Diagram/ Schematic Diagram and working
of induction Furnace.
5.4 Dielectric heating principles.
5.5 Block Diagram/ Schematic Diagram of dielectric
heating Unit.
5.6 Application of above heating system.
5.7 concepts Illumination.
5.8 Laws of Illumination
5.9 Illumination level for different working areas
such as small & big workshop, drawing hall.
6 Electrical Motors : D.C. Motors 03 08
6.1 Need of D. C. Machines
6.2 Classifications , Schematic representation
and their applications.
6.3 Working Principle , Construction and applications of
a) Steeper Motor
b) Servo Motor
7 04 10
Electrical Motors: A.C. Motors
7.1 Classification and characteristics of single-phase and
three-phase motors (Only torque-speed).
7.2 Their schematic representation and their applications.
7.3 Study of different types of starters used for three-phase
Squirrel cage and slip-ring induction motors.
7.4 Reversal of rotation
7.5 Industrial applications.
Total 16 40
allotted marks only
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Total
/ Topic Name of topic Knowled
Comprehension Application marks
no. ge
Introduction to elements of
I/1 electric networks 4 4 4 12
Measuring Instruments & A.C.

I/2 Circuits 4 4 8 16
I/3 Three Phase A.C.Circuits 4 4 4 12

II / 4 Single Phase Transformer: 2 2 4 10
II /5 Electric Heating 2 4 6 12
Electrical Motors : D.C.
II/6 2 2 4 08
Motors
II/7 Electrical Motors : A.C. Motors 2 2 4 10
B. TERM WORK
Sr Laboratory
Skills developed
no experience
Verify the relation 1) Connect the various components as per the circuit diagrams (after
for current and reading them) using proper size wires
1
voltage/s in series 2) Write the relation for applied voltage and the voltage drops in
resistances series resistances circuit.
Verify the relation 1) Connect the various components as per the circuit diagrams (after
for current and reading them) using proper size wires
2
voltage/s in parallel 2) Write the relation for current entering the parallel resistance circuit
resistances and the individual resistances.
To determine
1) Connect the various components as per the circuit diagrams (after
Calculation of
reading them) using proper size wires
3 inductance and
2) Fine the values of resistance and Inductance
resistance of choke
coil.
Measurement of
power by using
4 reading them) using proper size wires
ammeter, voltmeter 2) Measure Current , Voltage , Power Find
& wattmeter
Verification of
relationship between
1) Measure line & phase values of voltage, current. Verify their
5 line and phase values
relationship for voltage & current. Calculate Power
of voltage & current
in STAR connection.
Verification of 1) Measure line & phase values of voltage, current. Verify their
6
relationship between relationship for voltage & current. Calculate Power
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sr Laboratory
Skills developed
no experience
line and phase values
of voltage & current
in DELTA
connection
Determination of 1) Connect the various components as per the circuit diagrams (after
regulation and reading them) using proper size wires.
efficiency of a 2) Measure voltages, currents using voltmeters, ammeters; resistances
7 single-phase using multi-meters and note their values in an orderly manner.
transformer. 3) Calculate regulation and efficiency of a single-phase
Transformer.
To Connect A.C. 1) Connect the various components as per the circuit diagrams (after
reading them) using proper size wires.
starters to an
8 2) Read the circuit diagram to connect the various starters used for
induction motor A.C. Machines
3)
Study of steeper and
9 reading them) using proper size wires.
Servo Motor
2) Read the circuit diagram to connect the 3-point starter
10 Industrial Visit 1) Study of induction furnace
Sr.
No.
Total 50
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1) Chalkboard.
a) Books
b)
Sr.
No.
01 Edward Hughes Electrical Technology Hilly Brown Smith
02 V. N. Mittal Basic Electrical Engineering CBS,Delhi
03 B. L. Theraja Electrical technology S. Chand and Company,Delhi
04 V. K. Mehta Fundamentals of Electrical S. Chand and Company,Delhi
Engineering
b) Websites
1) www.ece.rice.edu
2) igs.nigc.ir/STANDS/BOOK/Electrical-Eng-HB.pdf
3) aggregate.org/hankd/piaee12.pdf
COURSE ID :
Course Name : ENGINEERING METALLURGY & MATERIALS
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Abbreviation : EEMM
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End As per
Details of two tests of each practical -
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE :
Mechanical Engineering students always come across with the selection of material as
per requirement. So, knowledge of their properties and composition is essential. This subject
deals with the solidification of metals and alloys, equilibrium diagrams and their applications. It
covers metallurgical aspects of metals and alloys such as micro and macroscopic examination of
metals and alloys. The subject includes study of iron-iron carbon equilibrium diagrams, TTT
diagram, various heat treatment, non-destructive testing and ferrous and non ferrous metals .
OBJECTIVES :
1. Student will understand the use of equilibrium diagrams and Iron-Carbon diagram.
2. Student will understand structure and various micro structural aspects of metals.
3. To understand Non-Destructive testing methods and its applications.
4. To understand various Heat-treatment processes and its applications.
5. To understand composition, Properties , application and selection of ferrous and
Non-ferrous metals and alloys.
CONTENT :
A) THEORY : SECTION-I
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Introduction to Metallurgy 02 04
1.1 Definition, Need and scope
1.2 Types of Metallurgy
1.2.1 Extractive Metallurgy
1.2.2 Physical Metallurgy
1.2.3 Mechanical Metallurgy
2 Structure of Metals and Alloys 04 10
2.1 Crystal Structures of Metals :Space Lattice
Unit Cell
2.2 Types of Crystal Systems, Common Crystal
Structure-BCC, FCC, HCP, Packing Factor
2.3 Mechanism of Crystallization-Nuclei formation and
Crystal Growth, Dendritic Structures Structures of
alloys: Solid Solution-Types ,
2.4 Hume Rothery’s rules,
2.5 Imperfection of Crystals: Types : Point ,Line,
Surface
2.6 Polymorphism and Allotropy
3 Equilibrium Diagram 04 10
3.1 Cooling Curves of Metals and alloys
3.2 Construction of Binary Equilibrium diagram
3.3 Phase Rule, Lever Arm Principle.
3.4 Reaction in Binary System-Eutectic, Partial
Solubility
3.5 Peritectic, Eutectoid and Peritectoid reaction
4 Ferrous Metals 06 16
4.1 Allotropic transformation of pure iron
4.2 Iron-Iron Carbide Equilibrium Diagram
a. Peritectic , Eutectic and Eutectoid reaction
b. Slow cooling of steel: Microstructures of slowly
cooled steels
c. Effect of Alloying elements on Fe-C diagram
4.3 Engineering Material: Selection of material,
classification
4.4 Cast Iron – Types, Properties and applications
4.5 Steel - Plain Carbon steel, Stainless steel,
heat Resisting steel, High Speed steel,
Indian standard specification,
Total 16 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and half times the
marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted marks only.
THEORY : SECTION-II
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Lectures
Sr. Topics / Sub-topics Evaluation
(Hours)
No. (Marks)
5 Principles of Heat Treatment 03 06
5.1 Isothermal transformation of Austenite
5.2 TTT diagram: Significance and Construction
of eutectoid steel
5.3 Introduction to Pearlitic, Bainitic and Martensitic
Transformation
6 Heat Treatment Processes 06 14
4.1 Purpose of Heat Treatment
4.2 Different heat treatments processes -
microstructure changes, advantages , limitations of
a. Annealing
b. Normalising
c. Hardening and Hardenability- significance,
d. Tempering
e. Austempering and Martempering
f. Case Hardening Treatments – Carburising, Nitriding,
Cyaniding, Carbonitriding
g. Surface Hardening Treatment - Flame Hardening and
Induction Hardening
7 Non-Ferrous Metals and Alloys 04 12
(Composition , properties and applications)
6.1 Copper and its alloys-Brasses and Bronzes
6.2 Aluminum and its alloys
6.3 Magnesium and its alloys
6.4 Titanium and its alloys
6.5 Platinum and its alloys
6.6 Bearing Alloys
6.7 Nickel and its alloys
6.8 Cobalt-Chromium alloys
6.9 Super alloys
6.10 Shape Memory alloys
8 Testing of Materials 03 08
8.1 Types – Destructive and Non-destructive tests
8.2 Introduction to Non-destructive tests
a. Radiography of metal test
b. MagnaFlux test.
c. Penetrant test
d. Ultrasonic test
e. Eddy current test
Total 16 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of topic
Introduction to
1 02 02 - 04
Metallurgy
Structure of Metals and
2 04 04 02 10
Alloys
3 Equilibrium Diagram 02 04 04 10
4 Ferrous Metals 06 06 04 16
Principles of Heat
5 Treatment 04 - 02 06
Heat Treatment
6 06 04 04 14
Processes
Non-Ferrous Metals
7 04 04 04 12
and Alloys
8 Testing of Materials 02 03 03 08
Total 30 27 23 80
B.TERM WORK
The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work .
No. developed
1. Study and Demonstration of Metallurgical Skill of operating and adjustment
Microscope in metallurgical microscope
2. Preparation of Metallurgical specimen Skill to prepare Metallurgical
specimen
3. Study of microstructures of the steels. Identification of phases of steel
4. Study of microstructures of the Cast iron. Identification of microstructures of
various types of Cast iron
5. Study of Annealing and Normalizing of the steel Familiarize with heat treatment
6. Study of Hardening and of the steel Familiarize with heat treatment
7. Study of Tempering of the steel Familiarize with heat treatment
8. Study and demonstration of Non-Destructive Skill to perform Non-Destructive
testing (any one) testing
1. Industrial visits Heat Treatment Processes
2. Industrial Expert Lecture Non-Destructive Testing

Continuous Assessment of Practical Experiment : Every experiment of practical shall be assessed
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
for 25 marks as per criteria.
2 Attendance 05
3 Participation 05
4 Understanding 05
5 Representation 05
Total 25
Progressive Skill Test : One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted.
2. Classroom Practices
1. Chalk board
3. Video presentations
4. Assignments
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. Avner.S.H Introduction to Physical Metallurgy McGraw-Hill Book company
2. V.Raghvan Physical Metallurgy Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd
3. Singh Vijendra Physical Metallurgy Standard Publishers Distributers
New Delhi
4. D.Swarup Elements of Metallurgy Rastogi Publication
5. R.Srinivasan Engineering Material metallurgy Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing
Co.Ltd.,New Delhi.
6. Rollason.E.C Metallurgy for Engineers English Language Book Society
7 V.D. Kodgire Metallurgy & Material Science Everest Publication
8 R.A. Higgins Engineering Metallurgy Viva Books Pvt. Ltd
b) Websites
i) www.metallurgy.com/
ii) www.steelmetallurgy.com/
iii) www.sciencedaily.com/articles/m/metallurgy.htm
iv) www.thefreedictionary.com/metallurgy
v) http://www.asminternational.org
vi) http://www-materials.eng.cam.ac.uk/mpsite/
vii) http://www.materialstoday.com
COURSE ID :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Name : POLLUTION CONTROL
Course Abbreviation : EPCL
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
Pollution of air, water, etc. has become a great problem and headache to all human beings and
nature due to more and more industrialization. The subject aims at providing students the knowledge of
Pollution, various pollutants, their effects, sampling & analysis, pollution control techniques, emission
standards etc. This knowledge is essentially required for technicians to look after the pollution control
acts requirement & operation of pollution control systems for clean environments.
OBJECTIVES:
Chemical, pharmaceuticals, leather paper distilleries, industries produce effluent and gases
which are harmful to nature, control system has given norms and therefore some methods are
signified by experts and technologists.
Students will be able to know and study,
1. Nature of effluent water and flue gases.
2. Methods of treatments adopted.
3. Methods of analysis.
4. Norms decided by experts, etc
CONTENT:
A.THEORY : Section I
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 INTRODUCTION 02 04
1.1 Environment
1.2 Ecosystem
1.3 Classification of pollution & pollutants
2 AIR POLLUTION 04 12
2.1 Classification, sources & effects of air pollution
2.2 Meteorological factors influencing air pollution
2.3 Sampling & analysis of air pollutants
3 WATER POLLUTION 06 16
3.1 Classification, sources & effects of water
pollution
3.2 Important terms used in water pollution: Dissolved
oxygen
Chemical oxygen demand Biological oxygen demand
Theoretical oxygen demand Total solids Total suspended
solids
Total dissolved solids Turbidity, alkalinity, acidity
3.3 Sampling & analysis of water pollutants
3.4 Water quality standards
4 NOISE POLLUTION 02 04
4.1 Sources & effects of noise pollution
4.2 Measurement of noise pollution
4.3 Prevention & control of noise pollution
5 GLOBAL POLLUTION 02 04
5.1 Green- house effect
5.2 Acid rain
5.3 Ozone depletion problem
5.4 Thermal Pollution and Radiation Pollution
Total 16 40
1.Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one
Section II
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr Lectures
No (Hours)
(Marks)
6 03 06
WASTE WATER TREATMENT
6.1 Preliminary treatment. Primary treatment. Secondary
treatment
6.2 Tertiary treatment, Sludge treatment & disposal
7 HAZARDOUS WASTE 03 08
7.1 Defining hazardous waste. Treatment & disposal of

hazardous waste
7.2 Hazardous waste management
7.3 Solid Waste: Classification of solid wastes. Ultimate
disposal
7.4 Solid waste management. Methods of solid waste
disposal, Reuse, Recycling & Recovery of materials
from refuse
8 06 16
POLLUTION CONTROL METHODS
8.1Air pollution control methods for:
Gaseous pollutants, Particulate pollutants
8.2 Emission Standards
Cane sugar, Distilleries, Textile and Foundry Industry
(Block diagram treatment)
9 ENVIRONMENT & POLLUTION CONTROL ACTS 04 10

9.1 Problems of Pollution, Justification of Environment
Act
9.2 Noise, Air and Water Acts
Total 16 40
one and half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the
above allotted marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Secti Distribution of marks (level wise)
on / Total
Name of Topic Knowledg Comprehensi Applicatio
Topi Marks
e on n
c No.
I/1 Introduction 02 02 - 04
I/2 Air Pollution 04 04 04 12
I/3 Water Pollution 04 06 06 16
I/4 Noise Pollution 02 02 - 04
I/5 Global Pollution 02 02 - 04
II / 6 Waste Water Treatment 02 04 - 06
Hazardous Waste
II / 7 02 02 04 08
II / 8 Pollution Control Methods 04 04 04 16

Environment & pollution control
II / 9 04 04 - 10
Acts.
B.TERM WORK
Laboratory experiences and related skills developed:
Sr. no Laboratory experience
1 Estimation of Suspended Particulate Matter
2 Analysis of CO, CO2, SO2 by using Orsat’s Apparatus
3 Exhaust Gas Analysis of Automobiles.
4 Determination of turbidity of given Sample
5 Water Analysis
Determination of total dissolved solids, suspended solids in given
sample.
Determination of Dissolved Oxygen in given sample.
Determination of Biological Oxygen Demand in given sample.
Determination of Chemical Oxygen Demand in given sample.
Determination of Acidity and Alkalinity of in given water sample.
6 Measurement of Sound level meter.
Visit the nearby industries and prepare the report on Pollution
7
Control devices and Equipment.
C.INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES:
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Chalk board
2. Item Bank
REFERENCE MATERIAL:
a) Books:
Sr.
Author Title
No.
1. B S N Raju Fundamentals of Air Pollution
2. P Venugopala Rao Environmental Engineering
3. C S Rao Environmental Pollution Control
Engineering
4. C Jamnadas Environmental Law
b) Websites
1) www.deanza.edu/bhes/StudentHandbook.pd
2) www.lib.berkeley.edu/BIOS/tutor.htm
3) www.southampton.ac.uk/library/infoskills/tutorials.html
COURSE ID :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Name : NON- CONVENTIONAL ENERGY SOURCES
Course Abbreviation : ENCE

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
Energy is an important aspect in all sectors of country’s economy. The energy crisis
is mainly caused due to increased population and enhanced standard of living and life style of
people. The conventional sources of energy are insufficient to meet these demands. Hence,
alternative energy sources are utilized for power production. The use of alternate energy sources
is increasing day by day. Diploma engineers are expected to develop, operate and maintain these
systems. It is therefore essential to know basics of energy conversion, conservation, and energy
audit and waste heat recovery techniques.
Objectives:
Students should be able to,
1. Develop awareness for effective utilization of alternative energy sources.
2. Identify different components of solar energy and wind energy devices.
3. Identify and analyze biomass plant.
4. Identify and apply energy conservation techniques for commonly used power
absorbing and generating devices.
5. Apply principles of energy conservation and energy management techniques.
CONTENT:
A.THEORY : SECTION-I
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 SOLAR ENERGY 06 20
1.1 Major Sources of Energy: Renewable and Non-
renewable.
1.2 Need and Prospectus of Alternate Energy Sources
1.3 Solar radiation Geometry: Declination, hour
Angle, Altitude angle, incident angle, Zenith
angle, solar Azimuth angle
1.4 Instruments for measuring solar radiation
1.5 Construction and working of typical flat plate
collector, solar concentrating collector and their
applications, Advantages and Limitations
1.6 Solar Photo voltaic Electric Conversion
1.7 Solar pond, solar electric power generation, Solar
cooking and furnace.
2 WIND ENERGY 06 12
2.1 Principle of Wind energy conversion, Nature of
the Wind energy.
2.2 Power in wind, Power coefficient, Maximum
power, Wind Energy Conversion
2.3 Selection of site for wind mill.
2.4 Classification of WEC systems.
2.5 Advantages and limitations of WECS
2.6 Basic components of WECS.
2.7 Wind energy collectors- Horizontal and Vertical
axis machines,
2.8 Safety systems and Environmental aspects.
3 BIO-MASS ENERGY 04 08
3.1 Biomass conversion technologies - 1) combustion
2) Thermo chemical 3) Biochemical
Wet processes, Dry processes.
3.2 Biogas generation – anaerobic digestion,
3.3 Types of Bio-gas plants, KVIC Digester,
Deenbhandu, Pragati Biogas plant.
3.4 Materials used for biogas generation. Selection of
site for biogas plant. Applications.
SECTION – II
4 ENERGY FROM THE OCEANS 04 08

____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
4.1 Ocean Thermal Electric Conversion-Methods of
Power Generation,Open and closed cycle OTEC
system
4.2 Tidal power –Basic Principle, Components of
Tidal Power Plants,
4.3 Operation Methods-single basin and double basin
4.4 Advantages and limitations for tidal power
Generation
4.5 Sites Requirements.
5 OTHER ALTERNATE SOURCES OF ENERGY 06 16
5.1 Geothermal Energy –Sources, Principle,
Geothermal energy power plant, Advantages ,
Limitation & application of Geothermal Energy.
5.2 Small Hydroelectric Plant(Mini and Micro hydel):
Nature,Classification of SHPstation,
Components of SHP, Advantages and Limitation
of SHP
5.3 Fuel Cell- Principle of Operation, Classification,
Advantages, Limitation and Application of Fuel
cell
5.4 Magneto-Hydro Dynamic(MHD) Power
Generation- Principles, MHD system,
Advantages, Future Prospects
6 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT 06 16
6.1 Energy scenario in various sectors and Indian
Economy.
6.2 Need and importance of energy conservation and
management.
6.3 Concept of payback period, Return on
Investment (ROI),Life cycle cost, Sankey diagrams,
Specific Energy consumption
6.4 Principle and methods of energy conservation
6.5 Energy Audit and its types.
6.6 Co-generation and its Application
6.7 Waste Heat Utilization
6.8 Concept and Technique of energy management
Total 32 80
marks only.
Topic Name of topic Distribution of marks Total
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1 Solar Energy 10 04 06 20
2 Wind Energy 04 04 04 12
3 Bio-Mass Energy 04 02 02 08
Energy From the
4 02 04 02 08
Oceans
Other Alternate
5 08 04 04 16
Sources of Energy
Energy Conservation
6 04 04 08 16
and Management
Total >> 32 22 26 80
B.TERM WORK
The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work in practical sessions of
batches of about 22 students:
No. developed
1) Study and Demonstration on solar flat plate Use and working of Solar flat
collector used for water heating. plate collector.
2) Study and Demonstration of working of photo Use and working of Photo voltaic
voltaic cell. cell.
3) Demonstration on working of solar cooker. Using the solar cooker.
4) Visit to Mini and Micro hydel power plant. Awareness to hydel power plant
5) Visit to solar heating system/ wind power plant. Awareness of solar heating
system/ wind power plant.
6) To study construction and working of horizontal Use and working of wind mill.
axis wind mill or to visit a nearest wind farm.
7) To study construction and working of a biomass/ Use and working of Biogas plant.
biogas plant or visit a biomass/ biogas plant of
municipal waste or elsewhere.
8) Case study on Energy Audit. Suggest the methods of energy
saving

1. Industrial Visits Wind Energy and Biomass Energy
2. Industrial Visits Solar heating system
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks.
4 Understanding / workmanship 10
Total 25
ii)Progressive Skill Test:
One Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted.
Final Assessment of Term work shall be done as per Pro-forma III.
E.INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES:
1. Chalk board
4. Item Bank
F.REFERENCE MATERIAL:
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. Dr B.H.Khan Non conventional energy Tata McGraw Hill
Resources
2. G. D. Rai Non conventional energy sources Khanna publication
3. S. P. Sukhatme Solar energy Tata McGraw Hill
4. H. P. Garg Solar energy Tata McGraw Hill
5. Arora Power plant engineering Dhanpat Rai & Co.
6. Arora and Power plant engineering Dhanpat Rai & Co.
Domkundwar
7 P.H. Henderson India- The energy sector Oxford University Press
8 D. A. Ray Industrial energy conservation Pergaman Press
9 W. C. Turner Energy management handbook Wiley Press
b) Websites
i) www.mahaurja.com
ii) www.indiasolar.com
iii)www.beeindia.in
COURSE ID :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Name : HIGHER MATHEMATICS
Course Abbreviation : EHMT

Pre-requisite Course(s) : Engineering Mathematics CCE106
Applied Mathematics MEE301
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End As per
Evaluation 20 marks ii. One PST of Proforma-
(03 hours) III
each 25 marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
Mathematics is an important pre-requisite for the development and understanding of
engineering and technological concepts. For an engineer and technologist, knowledge of
Mathematics is an effective tool to pursue and to master the applications in the
engineering and technological fields. The connection between Higher Mathematics and its
applications in real life can be understood and appreciated. Finite Differences helps in
finding population Temperature of a city etc . Laplace Transform is used to solve ordinary
differential equations.
OBJECTIVES:
The student will be able:
1. Apply methods of finite differences to Engineering and technical field..
2. Apply rules and methods of partial differentiation equation to solve Engineering and technical
Problems
3. Apply various concepts of Laplace transform and Probability in Engineering and technical field.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
FINITE DIFFERENCE
1.1 Finite differences, forward difference Δ , Backward

differences ∇ ,Operator E and Difference tables.
1.2 Inverse of E , Δ,∇,
1 1.3 Factorial notations of polynomials 08 20
1.4 To find missing terms by using difference table
1.5 Newton’s forward & backward differences interpolation
formulae (Examples )
1.6 Lagrange’s interpolation formula for unequal
intervals.(Examples )
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIATION
2.1 Partial Derivatives of first order (Definition,
Examples )
2.2 Partial Derivatives of higher Order (Definition,
2 Examples ) 08 20
2.3 Homogeneous functions , Euler’s theorem on
homogeneous functions (Examples )
2.4 Jacobians ( Definition, Examples )
Total 16 40
1.Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each
topic is one and half times the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt
questions of the above allotted marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
LAPLACE TRANSFORM
3.1 Definition ,Linearity property,
3.2 Laplace Transforms of Standard functions
3.3 First shifting property ,
3.4 Multiplication by t n Property
3.5 Division by t property,
3.6 Inverse Laplace Transform, Definition
3.7 Standard formulae (Examples )
3.8 Inverse L.T.by using First shifting property
3.9 Inverse L.T. by using Partial fraction method, 12 28
3 3.10 Inverse L.T. by using Convolution theorem
3.11Applications of Laplace transforms
to solve differential equations by Laplace
Transforms
LINEAR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION WITH

CONSTANT COEFFICIENTS
4.1 Definition, operator D, Inverse of D
4.2 To find C.F. of L.D.E. when;
04 12
i) Roots are real and equal,
4
ii) Roots are real and different
iii) Roots are Imaginary
iv) Pair of equal imaginary roots
1.Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and
marks only. 2. In each topic corresponding applications will be explained
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of topic
1 Finite Differences 4 6 10 20
Partial
2 4 6 10 20
Differentiation
Laplace Transform
3 4 6 18 28
L.D.E. With
4 constant 4 4 04 12
Coefficients
PRACTICALS.
Note: Practical’s are to be used to get enough practice [One batch for 20 Students ]
No.
Finite Differences To evaluate examples on operators as E , Δ,∇ and Factorial notation
1
Finite Differences To evaluate Newton’s forward & backward differences interpolation
2 formulae
Finite Differences To evaluate Lagrange’s interpolation formulae

3
Partial Differential To evaluate Partial Derivatives of higher Order
4 Homogeneous functions ,
Partial Differential To evaluate examples on Euler’s theo. On homogeneous functions,

Jacobian’s
5
Laplace transform Examples on first shifting property ,Multiplication by tn Property,

6
Division by t property
7 Inverse Laplace Examples on inverse L.T. by Partial fraction method and by
transform Convolution theorem ,To solve differential equations by Laplace T
8 Applications of Examples on application of Laplace Transform

Laplace transform
9 L.D.E. With constant To solve equation f(D )=0
coefficient
10 L.D.E. With constant To solve equation f(D )=0

coefficient
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Tutorials
1. Chalk board
2. Item Bank
3 Formulae Charts
REFERENCE MATERIAL:
a) Books:
Sr.
No.
Kolhapur
2. P.N. Wartikar Applied mathematics Pune vidyarthi Griha
Prakashan , pune
3 H.K. Dass Higher engineering mathematics S .Chand publication
4 B.S.Grewal Higher engineering Mathematics Khanna publication,
New Delhi
b) Websites
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
LEVEL – IV
APPLIED
TECHNOLOGY
COURSES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : POWER ENGINEERING

Course Abbreviation : EPEG
Pre-requisite Course(s) : MEE302 Thermal Engineering
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Average of i.25 marks for
Term End As per
Evaluation 20 marks ii.One PST of 25 Proforma-I
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - 25 125
* External Oral examination as per Pro-forma - I
RATIONALE:
Engines have vital role in human life. Today’s fast lifestyle of human is complimented in great
proportion by engine started from steam engine. Presently steam engine are dominated by IC
engines. IC engines are used for so many application in practices, which makes our life handicap
without them. Therefore knowledge of various parts, working, testing maintenance etc of IC
engine, its pollution control and studies is became necessary. Next generation of IC engine is gas
turbine which also has application in air transport and power generation. Hence knowledge of
basic cycle and theoretical aspect involved is necessary. Almost every industries, garages etc
requires an air compressor for various applications hence knowledge of air compressor is
essential.
OBJECTIVES:
1. Understand the fundamental aspect of IC engine.
2. Understand working of different types of IC engine and there systems
3. Learn the testing of IC engines.
4. Be conversant with IC. engine pollutants and its control.
5. Understand working of gas turbine application.
6. Understand working, construction and maintenance of various air compressors.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A.THEORY :
Section-I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1. INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 12 20
1.1 Classification of IC engines
1.2 Various terms of engines: Bore, Stroke, Dead centers, Compression
ratio, Piston displacement, Piston speed
1.3 Power cycles: Otto, Diesel, Dual, Rankine cycle, Representation on
P-V and T-S diagram, Derivation on Otto and Diesel cycle, Simple
numerical on Otto and diesel cycle
1.4 Two stroke & four stroke engines: Construction, Working,
Comparison, Valve timing diagram and Turning moment diagram
1.5 Brief description of IC engine combustion stages (SI & CI),
Scavenging, Pre-ignition, detonation, supercharging, Turbo charging
1.6 List of fuels, Lubricants, Additives and their advantages
1.7 Location, Functioning and Materials of various parts of engine.
2. IC ENGINE SYSTEM, TESTING AND POLLUTION CONTROL 12 20
IC engine system:
Construction and Working of
2.1 Carburetion system (Principle and simple carburettor)
2.2 CI engine fuel injection system
2.3 Ignition system (Battery and Magneto)
2.4 Lubrication system (Principles of Lubrication)
2.5 Cooling system (Air and Water Cooling)
Engine Testing:
2.6 Indicated Power, Brake Power, Mechanical, Thermal, Relative
and Volumetric Efficiency, BSFC. (Simple Numerical)
2.7 Morse and Motoring test
2.8 Heat Balance sheet and performance curves (Simple
Numerical)
Pollution Control:
2.9 Pollutants in exhaust gases of SI and CI engines and their
Environmental Effects
2.10 Pollution measurement
2.11 Methods of controlling pollutants
2.12 Standard norms of pollution control: Bharat Stage I,II,III,IV
and Euro I, II, III
only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section-II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
3. AIR COMPRESSORS 14 24
3.1 Classification
3.2 Terminology: Pressure ratio, Compressor capacity, Free Air
delivered, Swept volume
3.3 Industrial use of compressed air
Reciprocating Compressor:
3.4 Construction & working of single and two stage reciprocating
compressor
3.5 Equation of work done (Simple Numerical)
3.6 Efficiency: Volumetric, Isothermal and Mechanical
(Simple Numerical)
3.7 Intercooler, Advantages of multistage compressor
Rotary Compressors:
3.8 Construction and working of Roots blower, Vane blower,
Screw-Types: Oil Flooded, Oil Free, Centrifugal and Axial
flow Compressors (No Numerical)
3.9 Methods of Energy saving in Compressors
4. GAS TURBINES AND JET PROPULSION 10 16

Gas Turbines:
4.1 Classifications, Applications
4.2 Constant volume and Constant pressure gas turbines: Closed
and Open cycle with their comparisons
4.3 Methods to improve thermal efficiency: regeneration,
Intercooling, Reheating using T-∅ diagram (No numerical)
Jet Propulsion:
4.4 Principles of Turbo jet, Turbo Propeller, Ram jet
4.5 Rocket propulsion: Solid propellants, Components of liquid
propellants and liquid propellant rocket
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
I/1 Internal combustion engine 08 08 04 20
IC engine system, Testing and
I/2 08 08 04 20
Pollution control
II / 3 Air compressors 10 10 04 24
II / 4 Gas turbines And Jet Propulsion 06 06 04 16
Total >> 32 32 16 80
B.TERM WORK
Laboratory Exercises and related skills to be developed:
The following Laboratory exercises shall be conducted as Term Work during the practical
Sr.
Title of Experiment Skills / Competencies to be developed
No.
Dismantling and assembling of Petrol / Diesel To identify and understand the function of
1.
four stroke Engines various component of I. C. Engines.
To observe and understand the function of

2. Demonstration of various engine systems.
various engine systems.
Trial on Petrol and Diesel engine with Heat
3. To analyze the performance of Engine.
Balance sheet
To understand practically working of Diesel/
Petrol engine manufacturing plant.
Visit to Diesel/Petrol engine manufacturing
4.
plant To study the Exhaust gas analysis at engine
testing department.
To develop ability to analyze the performance
5. Trial on air compressor
of an air compressor.
To understand practically working of gas power
6. Visit to gas turbine power plant
plant.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Included in experiment no. 4 & 6.
a) Continuous Assessment of Practical Assignments :
Proforma-I
b) Progressive Skill Test :
in Proforma-I
c) Term-end Oral Examination (External) :
Term-end Oral Examination (External) shall be conducted as per the following criteria:

2 Preparedness for oral 5
25
Final Assessment of Termwork / Oral Examination shall be done as per Pro-forma I.
E. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES :

1. Chalk board
4. Item Bank
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. Patel & Karamchandani Heat Engine vol II & III Acharya Publication
2. Kumar Vasandani Heat Engineering Metropolitan
3. Mathur Sharma Course in IC Engines Dhanpat Rai
4. V Ganeshan IC Engine Mc-Graw Hill
b) Websites
http://freevideolectures.com/Subject/Mechanical
http://www.grc.nasa.gov
http://www.wartsila.com
http://www.engihub.com
http://www.air-compressor-guide.com
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : MACHINE DESIGN

Course Abbreviation : EMDN
Pre-requisite Course(s) : MEE305
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :

Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - 25 125
RATIONALE:
Machine design consists of application of scientific principles, technical information and
imagination for the development of a new or improved mechanical system to perform specific
function with maximum efficiency and economy.
This needs students to know load analysis, stress analysis and material properties. They should
also be familiar with various mechanical elements, their design method and selection. And
procedure using design data book or manufacturers catalogue.
OBJECTIVES:
Students will be able to identify the problem.
1) Students will know the procedure and selection method for different mechanical elements.
2) Students will be able to design simple mechanical elements.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Section-I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Mechanical engineering design- steps involved in design process
1
1.2 Aesthetic consideration in design. 04 06
1.3 Ergonomic consideration in design.
1.4 Use of standards in design.
1.5 Selection of preferred sizes.
ENGINEERING MATERIALS
2.1 Stress: strain diagram of ductile & brittle material. Modes of failure,
factor of safety.
2 03 04
2.2 Selection of materials.
2.3 Casting materials: gray C.I., white C.I., and malleable C.I.
2.4 Plain carbon steel alloy steel and its BIS designation
DESIGN AGAINST STEADY LOADING
3.1 Normal stress- strain.
3.2 Shear stress -strain.
3 3.3 Stress due to bending and torsion moment.
3.4 Principal stresses. 06 12
3.5 Theories of failure: max normal stress theory, max shear stress
theory, distortion energy theory.
3.6 Design of cotter and knuckle joint.
DESISN OF POWER SCREWS
4.1 Introduction, application, form of threads.
4.2 Torque required to lift and lower the screw and efficiency of screw
4 threads and overall efficiency, self locking of screw
4.3 Stresses in screws 08 10
4.4 Collar frictional torque
4.5 Design of screw jack, C-clamp, vices.
(analytical treatment for square threads only)
DESIGN OF FASTNERS AND THREADED CONNECTIONS
5.1 Threaded joints, Advantages of Threaded joint, ISO metric screw
threads.
5.2 Basic types of screw fastening and bolts of uniform strength
5 5.3 Bolted connection- external load in tension, calculation of 03 08
Resultant bolt load.
5.4 Preload on bolt and its torque requirements.
5.5 Eccentrically loaded bolted joint in shear, Eccentric load perpendicular
to axis of bolt
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section-II
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
DESIGN AGAINST VARIABLE LOADING
6.1 Fluctuating stresses, fatigue failure, S-N diagram, endurance limit.
6 6.2 Stress concentration, Stress concentration factors, reduction in stress. 02 04
6.3 Concentration effects, notch sensitivity.
6.4 Soderberg and Goodman diagram.
7 DESIGN OF SHAFTS, KEYS, AND COUPLINGS
7.1 Introduction of shaft, Determination of shaft diameter subjected to 06 12
torsional and bending moment.
7.2 Design of shaft for torsional rigidity.
7.3 Types of keys, design of square and flat keys.
7.4 Types of coupling, Design of rigid coupling
8 MECHANICAL SPRINGS
8.1 Types of spring, Applications of springs.
8.2 Helical springs: Stress equation.
06 10
8.3 Helical springs: deflection equation.
8.4 Series and parallel connection of springs
8.5 Spring materials, styles of end.
9 SPUR GEARS
9.1 Advantages of Gear drive.
9.2 Types of gears, Nomenclature of spur gear teeth.
06 08
9.3 Standard systems of gear tooth.
9.4 Force analysis of spur gears.
9.5 The Lewi’s formula, Dynamic load in spur gears.
10 ROLLING CONTACT BEARINGS
10.1 Types of rolling contact bearings.
10.2 Static load carrying capacity.
10.3 Dynamic load carrying capacity.
10.4 Bearing load, Load-Life relationship. 04 06
10.5 Procedure for selection of bearing for single row deep groove ball
bearing.
10.6 Lubrication and mounting of bearings.
10.7 Sliding contact bearing: Modes of lubrication, Bearing materials
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Total
No.
1 Introduction. 04 02 00 06
2 Engineering materials. 02 02 00 04
3 Design against steady loading. 06 04 02 12
4 Design of power screws. 06 02 02 10
5 Design of fasteners and threaded 04 02 02 08
connections.
6 Design against variable loading. 02 02 00 04
7 Design of shafts, keys, and 04 04 04 12
couplings.
8 Mechanical springs. 04 04 02 10
9 Spur gears 04 02 02 08
10 Rolling contact bearings 04 00 02 06
B. TERM WORK

Sr.
No.
Laboratory Experiments: -
(List of Experiments)
Term work should consist of any five
Students will acquire the skills of selecting
assignments including design and working
the material, selecting the factor of safety,
drawing of mechanical elements.(project is
finalizing the permissible stresses by use of
compulsory).
1 design data and with given loading to make
1) Design of cotter joint or knuckle joint. a decision regarding the dimensions of the
2) Design of power screw. loaded components.
3) Design of threaded connection.
4) Design of coupling
5) Design of springs.
6) Design of project.
Included in experiment no. 6
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Proforma-I

in Proforma-I


4 Design calculations. 5
25
Final Assessment of Oral Examination shall be done as per Pro-forma I.

1) Chalk-board.
F. REFERENCE MATERIAL:
a) Books
Sr. No Author Title Publisher
01 B.V. Bhandari Machine Design MGH
02 Khurmi -Gupta Machine Design MGH
03 PSG Design Data Book PSG
04 Shigely Machine Design Pearson
b) Websites : http://www.mhhe.com/bhandari/dme3e
Course ID
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Name : ADVANCED MACHINING PROCESSES
Course Code : MEE 403
Course Abbreviation : EAMP

Pre-requisites : MEE306 Machine Tools
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 2
6
Practical 4
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 --- 25 125
RATIONALE :
This is applied technology course. Due to the technological development, manufacturing process
is advancing fast. This subject will provide basic insight in the students to look to various problems on the
shop floor. After getting conversant with the basic production processes, it is necessary for a technician
to know about the advancements in the area of production and manufacturing processes. The course will
provide knowledge and skills necessary for working in modern manufacturing environment .This course
will help to the students to study working principles and operations performed
on milling machines, gear cutting, transfer machines, non-conventional machining processes,
CNC machine & maintenance of machine tools.
Objectives :
The student will be able to:
1) Understand principle, construction and working of different advance machine tools.
2) Operate the machine tools independently to produce jobs as per specified requirements by selecting
specific machining processes.
3) Know different nontraditional machining processes like EDM, EBM, LBM and EBM.
4) Understand construction & working principle of Milling machine and Machining centers.
5) Adopt safety practices and rules while working on various machines.
6) Develop modern trends in manufacturing and automation.
7) Appreciate the importance of maintenance
CONTENT
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
A. THEORY SECTION I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
Topics / Sub-topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1. MILLING MACHINES 05 12
1.1 Classification
1.2 Basic parts and their functions – column and knee type
1.3 Specifications of milling machines
1.4 Types of operations : Up milling, Down milling, Plain
milling, Side and face milling, Form milling, Gang milling,
End milling, Face milling, T- slot milling, Slitting
2. GEAR MANUFACTURING 04 10
2.1 Gear Cutting : Indexing, Indexing Methods
2.2 Gear Hobbing
2.3 Gear Shaping : Principle, Advantages and Disadvantages
2.4 Gear Finishing Processes : Shaving, Grinding, Burnishing,
Lapping
3. TRANSFER MACHINE TOOLS: 02 06
3.1 Introduction.
3.2 Classification of transfer machines.
3.3 Main parts of transfer machines.
3.4 Advantages & limitations of transfer machines.
4. NON CONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES: 05 12
4.1 Classification
4.2 Electro discharge machine (EDM) : Construction, Working
principle , Applications and Advantages &
Disadvantages.
4.3 Wire cut EDM : Construction, Working principle ,
Applications, Advantages & Disadvantages.
4.4 Electro chemical machining (ECM):
Construction, Working principle , Applications and
Advantages & Disadvantages.
4.5 Laser beam machining (LBM):
4.6 Electron beam machining(EBM):
TOTAL 16 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION II
Theory
Sr. Topics / Sub-topics Lectures
evaluation
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
5. 03 08
CNC MACHINES :
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Basic components of Numerical Control System
5.3 Parts suitable for CNC machine
5.4 Horizontal Machining Center –Block diagram & principle parts
5.5 Vertical Machining Center - Block diagram & principle parts
5.6 Advantages & limitations
6. CLASSIFCATION OF NC / CNC MACHINES : 03 08
6.1 Classification : Based on Feedback control, Based on control
system features.
6.2 Methods of listing co-ordinates : Absolute co-ordinate system,
Incremental co-ordinate system.
6.3 Axis identification in CNC machine : Linear axis, Rotary axis.
7. FUNAMENTALS OF PART PROGRAMMING. 05 12
7.1 Objectives, NC words
7.2 Rapid Transverse Function (G00),Liner Interpolation Function
(G01), Circular Interpolation Function (G02)/(G03), Dwell
Function(G04)
7.3 Programming Formats.
7.4 Writing a part programming
7.5 Point to point machining.
7.7 Part programming for machining straight line.
7.8 Machining along straight Line.
7.9 Lathe Operations.
7.10 Programming for CNC milling machine
7.11 Tooling for CNC.
7.12 Canned cycle.
7.13 Do loop subroutine.
8. MAINTAINANCE OF MACHINE TOOLS: 05 12
8.1 Need, Importance & Types
8.2 Basic maintenance practices : For Bearings, Couplings,
Pulleys and Shafts
8.3 Repair cycle analysis
8.4 Maintenance records
8.5 Housekeeping.
8.6 Introduction to Total Preventative Maintenance (TPM)
TOTAL 16 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic is one and half times
the marks allotted above but the candidates are able to attempt questions of the above allotted marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Distribution of marks Total

1 Milling Machines 04 04 04 12
2 Gear Manufacturing 04 04 02 10
3 Transfer Machine Tools 02 02 02 06
Non Conventional Machine
4 04 04 04 12
Process
5 CNC Machines 04 02 02 08
Classification of NC / CNC
6 04 02 02 08
Machines
Fundamentals of Part
7 04 04 04 12
Programming
Maintenance of Machine
8 04 04 04 12
Tools
marks only.
B. TERM WORK
Practical exercises and related skills to be developed :
Sr.
No.
One job on gear blank turning , drilling & To know the outer diameter, width, turning,
1
facing facing , keyway & drilling
Any one Job on gear cutting/milling To know & develop gear cutting methods and
2
keyway/grooves/slots/end milling slot cutting on milling machines.
Five CNC programming on CNC Lathe &
VMC Machines having operations turning, step To Program & use of basic concepts of
3 turning, face milling, slotting, counter programming of CNC lathes & VMC
machining ( Group of two students, each group Machines.
must use software for different dimensions )
Demonstration of producing one component
To know & understand the basic operating
4 on CNC production lathe machine ( Batch of 4
system of CNC production lathe machine
to 6 students )
One assignment of part programming on To understand & develop part programming
5
machining center on machining centers
To know about the machining processes of
6 One Industrial Visit to HMC / VMC
HMC / VMC
To develop construction, working and
7 One assignment on EDM, ECM, LBM, EBM. applications of non conventional machining
methods
To prepare maintenance record / History
On assignment on maintenance of Machine
8 cards, basic maintenance procedure for
Tools
bearing & coupling
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sr. No. Mode of Exposure Topic

1 Industrial Visits CNC Machines
Demonstration of producing one component on CNC Fundamentals of part
2
production lathe machine programming
CRITERIA FOR TERMWORK :

2 Prepareness for practical 3
3 Workshop diary, Correct figures / diagrams 5
TOTAL 25
2) Workshop experiences and Workshop interactive sessions.

1) Chalk-board.
4) LCD
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Books
Sr. No. Author Title Publisher
01 Amitabh Ghosh , Mallik Manufacturing Science East-West Press Pvt. Ltd.
02 HMT, Banglore Production Technology Tata Mc-Graw Hill
03 Pabla B. S.M. Adithan CNC machines New Age international Ltd.
04 H.P.Garg Industrial maintenance S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
05 P. K. Mistra Non conventional Machining Narvasa Publishining
House
06 Lindley R. Higgins Maintenance Engg. Handbook Mc-Graw Hill
07 B egman , Amsted Manufacturing Processes John Willey and Sons.
08 B. L. Juneja Fundamental of metal cutting New age international
and machine tools limited.
09 Steve Krar, Technology of Machine Mc-Graw-Hill
Albert Check Tools. International.
10 P. N. Rao CAD/CAM Principals and Tata McGraw-Hill
Applications
11 P. N. Rao Manufacturing Technology Tata McGraw-Hill
Metal Cutting & Machine
tools
b) Websites :
1) www.swikuo.com
2) www.workshopmachiery.com
3) www.thomasnet.com
4) www.sodick.com/
5) www.dmscncrouters.com/
6) www.enterprisemachinery.co.uk/
COURSE ID :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Name : PROJECT- I

Course Abbreviation : EPRT
Teaching Scheme :

Theory -
02
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Theory Exam Proforma- Proforma-I
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks -- -- 25 - 25
Notes: 1. Two practical hours are for industrial project I .This is prior to project II
Rationale:
Most of the engineering activities fall within the category of seminar requiring individual or group
decisions, variety of solutions. The purpose of providing seminar in the curriculum is to expose the students
to such situations so that they can gain confidence in taking decisions and taking their problem on their own.
The emphasis on the project work must shift from teacher centered to student-centered activities and the
creative ability of the student to come forward.
A technician should be able to effectively communicate in writing and orally. Proper group
functioning is a prerequisite for maximizing output from a problem- solving group in work environment.
Proper organization seminar should be able to stimulate such a continuation so that the students are able to
work effectively work in a group and thus gain confidence to effectively take up responsibilities in their
careers
Objectives: The student will be able to:
1. Identify, analyze & define the problem.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Generate alternative solutions to the problem identified.
3. Compare & select feasible solutions from alternatives generated.
4. Design, develop, manufacture & operate equipment/Program.
5. Acquire higher-level technical knowledge by studying recent development in
mechanical
engineering field.
6. Compare machines/devices/apparatus for performance practices.
7. Work effectively in team.
Industrial Project
Following activities related to project are required to be dealt with, during this semester
1. Form project batches & allot project guide to each batch. (Max. 4 students per batch)
2. Each project batch should select topic / problem / work by consulting the guide & / or
industry. Topic / Problem / work should be approved by Head of department.
3. Each project batch should prepare action plan of project activities & submit the same to
respective guide.
4. At the end of semester, each project batch should submit the action plan and abstract of
the project along with list of materials required if project involves fabrication or other
facilities required in other kinds of project.
5. Action Plan should be part of the project report.
A. CONTENT
Components of Pre Project Report:
1. Project Summary (One page summary of entire project )
2. Introduction (Promoters, Market Scope/ requirement)
3. Project Concept & Product (Details of product)
4. Promoters (Details of all Promoters- Qualifications, Experience, Financial strength)
5. Manufacturing Process & Technology
6. Plant & Machinery Required
7. Location & Infrastructure required
8. Manpower ( Skilled, unskilled )
9. Raw materials, Consumables & Utilities
10. Working Capital Requirement (Assumptions, requirements)
11. Market ( Survey, Demand & Supply )
12. Cost of Project, Source of Finance
13. Projected Profitability & Break Even Analysis
14. Conclusion
SEMINAR:
Every student will prepare & deliver the seminar. Evaluation of seminar will be carried out by
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
panel of at least three teaching staff from mechanical/ production /automobile department.
1. Selection of topic for the seminar should be finalized in consultation with teacher guide allotted
for the batch to which student belongs.
2. Seminar report should be of min.10 & max. 20 pages & it should be certified by guide teacher
and head of the department
3. for presentation of seminar, following guide lines are expected to be followed:
a) Time for presentation of seminar : 7 to 10 minutes /student.
b) Time for question/answer : 2 to 3 minutes /student.
c) Evaluation of seminar should be as follows:
d) Use of audio visual aids or power point presentation is desirable.
4. Topic of the seminar should not be from diploma curriculum
5. Seminar shall be based on tentative topic of project such as review paper on some specific well
defined area/ specialized stream of mechanical engineering.

2 Market survey 02
3 Project concept 03
4 Delivery of seminar 18
Total 25
1) Guidance and discussions.
COURSE ID :
Course Name : PROJECT- II
Course Abbreviation : EPRO
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Pre-requisite Course(s) : MEE404 PROJECT- I
Teaching Scheme :
Theory -
04
Practical 04
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External)
Theory Exam Proforma- Proforma-I
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks -- -- 25 50 50
Notes: 1. Four practical hours are for industrial project -II

Rationale:
In practice the diploma technicians come across problems of varied nature. He/she will have
to solve the problems involving drawings, designs, manufacturing, installation, testing and
Maintenance of machines. In order to cultivate the systematic methodology for problem solving
using acquired technical knowledge & skills, this particular subject is introduced.
This subject will also help to enhance the generic skills & professional skills.
Objectives:
The student will be able to-
1. Identify, analyse & define the problem.
2. Generate alternative solutions to the problem identified.
3. Compare & select feasible solutions from alternatives generated.
4. Design, develop , manufacture & operate equipment/program.
5. Acquire higher-level technical knowledge by studying recent development in mechanical
Engineering field.
6. Compare machines/devices/apparatus for performance practices.
7. Work effectively in team.
Industrial Project II
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Following activities related to project are required to be dealt with, during this semester.
1. Form project batches & allot project guide to each batch. (Max. 4 students per batch)
2. Each project batch should work on the problem identified in project I by consulting the guide
or industry. Topic / Problem / work should be approved by Head of department.
3. Each project batch should prepare action plan of project activities & submit the same to
respective guide.
4. At the end of semester, each project batch should submit the action plan ,project report and
project .
A) CONTENT
Components of Project Report:
1. Project Summary (One page summary of entire project )

2. Introduction (Promoters, Market Scope/ requirement)
3. Project Concept & Product (Details of product)
4. Promoters (Details of all Promoters- Qualifications, Experience, Financial strength)
5. Manufacturing Process & Technology
6. Plant & Machinery Required
7. Location & Infrastructure required
8. Manpower ( Skilled, unskilled )
9. Raw materials, Consumables & Utilities
10. Working Capital Requirement (Assumptions, requirements)
11. Market ( Survey, Demand & Supply )
12. Cost of Project, Source of Finance
13. Projected Profitability & Break Even Analysis
14. Conclusion
SEMINAR BASED ON PROJECT:
Every student will prepare & deliver the seminar. Evaluation of seminar will be carried out by
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
panel of at least three teaching staff from mechanical/ production /automobile department.
1. Selection of topic for the seminar should be finalized in consultation with teacher guide allotted
for the batch to which student belongs.
2. Project report should be of min.25 & max. 35 pages & it should be certified by guide teacher and
head of the department
3. for presentation of seminar, following guide lines are expected to be followed:
a) Time for presentation of seminar : 7 to 10 minutes /student.
b) Time for question/answer : 2 to 3 minutes /student.
c) Evaluation of seminar should be as follows:
d) Use of audio visual aids or power point presentation is desirable.
4. Topic of the seminar should not be from diploma curriculum
5. Seminar shall be based on tentative topic of project such as review paper on some specific well
defined area/ specialized stream of mechanical engineering.
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR ORAL/PRACTICAL:

2 Market survey 05
3 Project concept 05
4 Presentation of seminar/Oral 15
5 Participation in work and understanding level 20
Total 50
1) Guidance and discussions.
COURSE ID :
Course Name : HYDRAULIC MACHINERY

____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Abbreviation : EHYM
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
each practical Term End As per -
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 - 80 25 - 125
RATIONALE :
Knowledge of fluid flow & related machinery is essential in all fields of engineering. Hydraulic
machines have important role in power generation, water supply and irrigation and also in most of
engineering segments. This subject requires knowledge of basic engineering sciences, applied mechanics,
mathematics etc. The fundamentals of this subject are essential for the subject “ Industrial Fluid Power”
in sixth semester.
OBJECTIVES :
Student will be able
1) Measure various properties such as pressure, velocity, flow rate using various instruments.
2) Calculate different parameters such as co-efficient of friction, power, efficiency etc of various
systems.
3) Describe the construction and working of turbines and pumps.
4) Test the performance of turbines and pumps .
5) Plot characteristics curves of turbines and pumps .
CONTENT :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
PROPERTIES OF FLUID
1.1 Density, Specific gravity, Specific Weight, Specific Volume
01 1.2 Dynamic Viscosity, Kinematic Viscosity, Surface tension, 04 08
Capillarity
1.3 Vapour Pressure, Compressibility
FLUID PRESSURE AND PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

2.1 Fluid pressure, Pressure head ,Pressure intensity,
2.2 Concept of absolute vacuum, gauge pressure, atmospheric pressure,
02 absolute pressure. 07 12
2.3 Pressure head measurement by Piezometer, U -tube manometer,
inverted U -tube manometer, and Bourdon's pressure gauge.
2.4 Concept of total pressure on immersed bodies, center of pressure.
FLUID FLOW
3.1 Types of fluid flows
3.2 Continuity equation
3.3 Bernoulli’s theorem, Reynolds's number.
3.4 Venturimeter: Construction, principle of working, Coefficient
03 of discharge, Discharge through venturimeter. 07 12
3.5 Orifice meter: Construction, Principle of working, hydraulic
coefficients, Derivation for discharge through Orifice meter
3.6 Pitot tube: Construction, Principle of Working
Note : Numericals on Venturimeter, orifice meter, pitot tube
FLOW THROUGH PIPES

4.1 Laws of fluid friction ( Laminar and turbulent)
4.2 Darcy’s equation and Chezy’s equation for frictional losses.
4.3 Minor losses in pipes
04 4.4 Hydraulic gradient and total gradient line. 06 08
4.5 Hydraulic power transmission through pipe, transmission efficiency ,
water hammer and its effects.
Note: Numerical to estimate major and minor losses
only.
SECTION II
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
IMPACT OF JET
5.1 Impact of jet on fixed vertical, moving vertical flat plates.
5.
5.2 Impact of jet on curved vanes with special reference to
turbines & pumps
Note: Simple Numerical on work done and efficiency 04 06
6. HYDRAULIC TURBINES
6.1 Layout of hydroelectric power plant.
6.2 Features of Hydroelectric power plant.
6.3 Classification of hydraulic turbines.
6.4 Selection of turbine on the basis of head and discharge
available 10 18
6.5 Construction and working principle of Pelton wheel, Francis
and Kaplan turbine.
6.6 Draft tubes: Types and construction, Concept of cavitations
in turbines.
6.7Velocity diagram for Pelton wheel & Francis turbine.
6.8 Calculation of Work done, Power developed losses & different
efficiency .
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
7.1 Construction , principle of working and applications
7.
7.2 Types of casings and impellers.
7.3 Concept of multistage
7.4 Priming and its methods, Cavitations
7.5 Manometric head, Work done, Manometric efficiency, 05 08
Overall efficiency, NPSH
7.6 Performance Characteristics of Centrifugal pumps
7.7 Trouble Shooting
7.8 Construction, working and applications of submersible, jet
pump
Note : Numerical on calculations of overall efficiency and
power required to drive pumps.
RECIPROCATING PUMP
8.1Construction, working principle and applications of single
8. 05 08
and double acting reciprocating pumps
8.2 Concept of Slip, Negative slip, Cavitation and separation
8.3 Air Vessels, functions & advantages.
8.4 Indicator diagram with effect of acceleration head &
frictional head
Note: Numerical to calculate power required to drive, slip, head etc
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of topic
1 Properties of Fluids 4 0 4 8
2 Fluid pressure & its measurement 4 4 4 12
3 Fluid flow 4 4 4 12
4 Flow through pipes 4 - 4 8
5 Impact of Jets 3 - 3 6
6 Hydraulic Turbines 6 6 6 18
7 Centrifugal Pumps 4 - 4 8
8 Reciprocating Pumps 4 - 4 8
B. TERM WORK
No. developed
1. Use of Pressure measuring devices. Ability to select and use appropriate
pressure measuring devices.
2. To determine Coefficient of friction for flow through Ability to use manometer and
pipes. measurement of discharge.
3. Measurement of head, calculation of
Trial on centrifugal pump.
pump efficiency.
4. Measurement of head, calculation of
Trial on Reciprocating pump.
pump efficiency.
5. Measurement of head, discharge,
Demonstration on Pelton Wheel.
power, efficiency.
6. Measurement of head, discharge,
Demonstration on Francis Turbine.
power, efficiency.
7. Measurement of supply head,
Demonstration on Hydraulic Ram.
discharge head, ram efficiency.
8. Maintenance and trouble shooting for centrifugal Find out different problems &
pumps. remedies for centrifugal pump.
9. Industrial visit to Hydro-electric Power plant &
Report.

1. Industrial visit to Hydro Electric power plant. Industrial situations
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a)Continuous Assessment of Practical :

No.
Total 25
One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted as per criteria
No.
Total 25
1. Chalk board
4. Computer
5. Question Bank
REFERENCE MATERIAL
a) Books
Sr.
No.
01 R.S. Khurmi Hydraulic Machinery S chand.
02 S.K.Agrawal Fluid mechanics & machinery. Tata McGraw Hill
03 Bansal Fluid mechanics & machinery Tata McGraw Hill
04 Streeter Victor, Bedford Fluid Mechanics McGraw Hill Int.
05 K. Subramanya One Thousand Solved Problems in Tata McGraw Hill
Fluid Mechanics
06 John D Anderson Computational Fluid Dynamics Tata McGraw Hill
The Basic With Application
07. W.Kanzman Fluid Mechanics
08 Streeter Fluid Mechanics Tata Mcgraw Hill
09 James A.Fay Introduction to Fluid Mechanics Phi pvt. ltd. NEW DELHI
10 Mohanty A.K. Fluid Mechanics Phi pvt. ltd. NEW DELHI
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course ID
Course Name : METROLOGY
Course code : MEE407
Course Abbreviation : EMQC
Pre- requisite Courses (s) : NIL

Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Progressive Assessment Term End Examination Total

Mode of Practical
Theory
Evaluation Theory Practical Term work Examination
Examination
(External)
Average of i 25 marks for each Term End As per
Details of As per
two test of 20 practical Theory Exam Performa-
Evaluation Performa- IV
marks each ii One PST of 25 marks (03 hours) III
Marks 20 -- 80 - 25 125
Rationale:
The mechanical Engineering technician often come across measuring different parameters of
machined components and the appropriate fitments of interchangeable components in the assemblies. For
the above purpose he/she is also required to analyze the quantitative determination of physical magnitude
and ensure the control of quality. During previous semesters different systems of measurement and their
units etc have been introduced in the subject, basic physics. The different methods and instruments which
can be used for linear and angular measurements, geometrical parameters (like surface finish, Square
ness, Parallelism, Roundness etc....) and the use of gauges and system of limits, Fits, Tolerances etc. are
often required to be dealt in detail by diploma technician on the shop floor. He/she is also required to
analyze, Interpret and present the data collected, graphically & statistically for ensuring the quality. The
knowledge of the subject also forms the basis for the design of mechanical measurements systems, design
& drawing of mechanical components.
Objective:
Students will be able to
1) Define accuracy, precision, calibration, sensitivity, repeatability and such relevant terms in
metrology.
2) Select appropriate instrument/s for specific measurement.
3) Analyze and interpret the data obtained from the different measurements processes and present it
in the graphical form, statistical form.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT
Theory
Sr. Topics Lectures
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
INTRODUCTION TO METROLOGY
01. 1.1 Metrology Basics, Definition of metrology, Categories of 04 10
metrology, Scientific metrology, Industrial metrology, Legal
metrology, Need of inspection, Precision, Accuracy, Sensitivity,
Readability, Calibration, Traceability, Reproducibility.
1.2 Sources Of errors, Factors affecting accuracy,
Selection Of instrument, Precautions while using an instruments for
getting higher precision and accuracy.
STANDARDS AND COMPARATORS
02. 2.1 Definition and introduction to line standard end standard, Wavelength 04 10
standard, Slip gauge and its accessories, Length bars.
2.2 Definition, Requirement of good comparator, Classification, use
of comparators, Working principle of comparators, Dial indicator,
Sigma comparator, Pneumatic comparator, Electrical, Electronic,
Relative advantages and disadvantages.
LIMITS, FITS, TOLERANCES & GAUGES
03. 3.1Concept Of Limits, Fits, And Tolerances, Selective Assembly, 05 12
Interchangeability.
3.2 Hole And Shaft Basis System, Taylor’s Principle, Design Of Plug,
Ring Gauges.
3.3 IS919-1993 (Limits, Fits & Tolerances, Gauges IS 3477-1973.
3.4 concept of multi gauging and inspection.
ANGULAR MEASURMENT
04. 4.1 Concept, Instruments For Angular Measurements, Working 03 08
and Use Of Universal Bevel Protractor, Sine Bar, Spirit Level,
Principle Of Working Of Clinometers, Angle Gauges
TOTAL 16 40
only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION – II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
5. SCREW THREAD MEASUREMENT
5.1 ISO grade and fits of thread, Errors in threads, Pitch 04 10
errors.
5.2 Measurement of different elements such as major
diameter, minor diameter, effective diameter, pitch ,
Two wire method.
5.3 Thread gauge micrometer, Working principle of floating
carriage dial micrometer.
6. GEAR MEASUREMENT AND TESTING
6.1 Analytical and functional inspection, Rolling test, 04 10
6.2 Measurement of tooth thickness
( constant chord method), gear tooth vernier,.
6.3 Errors in gears such as backlash, run out,
7. MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE FINISH

7.1 Primary and secondary texture, Sampling length, Lay, 04 10
terminology as per IS 3073- 1967, direction of lay,
Sources of lay and its significance.
7.2 CLA, Ra, RMS, Rz values and their interpretation,
Symbol for designating surface finish on drawing,
7.3 Various techniques of qualitative analysis, Working
principle of stylus probe type instruments
8. MACHINE TOOL TESTING
8.1 Parallelism, Straightness, Squareness, Coaxiallity,roundness, run 02 04
out
8.2 Alignment testing of machine tools as per IS standard
Procedure
9. TESTING AND CALIBRATION OF GAUGES.

9.1 Introduction, definition of calibration, importance of 02 06
calibration of measuring instruments.
9.2 Calibration procedure for general metrological instruments.
(Vernier Caliper, Micrometer, Dial Gauges.)
TOTAL 16 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Specification table for setting question paper for semester end theory examination
Sr. Distribution of marks (level wise) Total

Name of topic
1 Introduction To Metrology 6 2 2 10
2 Standards And Comparators 4 2 4 10
3 Limits, Fits, Tolerance& Gauges 4 4 4 12
4 Angular Measurement 2 2 4 8
5 Screw Thread Measurement 4 2 4 10
6 Gear Measurement And testing 4 2 4 10
7 Measurement of Surface Finish 4 2 4 10
8 Machine Tool Testing 2 - 2 4
9 Testing And Calibration of Gauges 2 - 4 6
marks only.

Sr.
No.
Take measurement with Linear measuring
Linear measuring instruments
1 instruments
2 Use of slip gauges measurement with slip gauges

3 Use of mechanical comparators Use of mechanical comparators
4 Screw thread measurement To make Screw thread measurement
5 Angular measurement To make Angular measurement
6 Surface roughness measurement Measurement of Surface roughness
7 Demo on Gear parameters measurement Understanding of gear parameters
8 Tool makers microscope Use of Tool makers microscope
Calibration of vernier caliper, micrometer, dial
9 Calibration
gauge
Sr.
No.
50
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1) Chalk-board.
4) Books: Engineering Metrology by R.K.Jain
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR PRACTICAL EXAMINATION:

4 10
workmanship
Total 50
REFERENCE MATERIAL:
1) Books :
Sr. Author Title Publisher

No.
01 R.K.Jain Engineering Metrology Tata Mc Graw Hill
02 Mahajan Engineering Metrology S Chand & Co.
03 J.F.W. Galyer and C. R. Metrology for Engineers ELBS
Shotbolt
04 K. J. Hume Engineering Metrology Kalyani publishers
05 I.C. Gupta A text book of Engineering Dhanpat Rai and
metrology Sons,
06 M. Adithan and R. Bahn Metrology Lab. Manual T.T.T.I. Chandigarh.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. IS/ International Codes : IS 919 – 1993 Recommendation for limits, fits and tolerances
IS 2029 – 1962 Dial gauges.
IS 2103 – 1972 Engineering Square
IS 2909 – 1964 Guide for selection of fits.
I S 2921 – 1964 Vernier height gauges
IS 2949 – 1964 V Block.
IS 2984 – 1966 Slip gauges.
IS 3139 – 1966 Dimensions for screw threads.
IS 3179 – 1965 Feeler gauges.
IS 3455 – 1966 Tolerances for plain limit gauges.
IS 3477 – 1973 Snap gauges.
IS 6137 – 1971 Plain plug gauges.
IS 3651 – 1976 Vernier Caliper
IS 4218 - Isometric screw threads
IS 4440 – 1967 Slip gauges accessories
IS 5359 – 1969 Sine bars
IS 5402 – 1970 Principle and applications of sine bars
IS 5939 – 1970 Sine angles, sine tables.
b) Websites :
1) www.mechanical.in/engineering-metrology-
2) www.nist.gov/iaao/.../SIM-dimensional-metrology
3) www.barringer1.com/mil_files/NASA-Metrology.pdf
4) www.pmelforum.com/downloads/met-hdbk.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : COMPUTER PROGRAMMING
Course Abbreviation : ECPR
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 2
4
Practical 2
Evaluation Scheme :

Mode of
Theory Practical Total
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks - - - 50 - 50
RATIONALE :
This course is designed to develop programming attitude and attract the interest of the students in
the C Language .Nowadays almost every set up in Engineering domain chooses C as a basic tool
to develop software, so it is useful to study structured and dynamic language like C.
OBJECTIVES :
The students will be able to:

1. Write short and simple C programs.
2. Implement data types and structures related to problems.
3. Solve the problems / tasks in a structured way.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
Lectures
Sr. No. Topics / Sub-topics
(Hours)
1 C FUNDAMENTALS 06
1.1History of c
1.2 C character set
1.3 Identifiers & Keywords,
1.4 Data types
1.5 Variables
1.6 Declarations
1.7 Constants
1.8 Expressions
1.9 C Instructions
1.10 The first C program
1.11 Compilation & Execution
2 OPERATORS& DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS 06
2.1 Operators
2.1.1 Arithmetic Operators
2.1.2 Assignment Operator
2.1.2 Unary operators
2.1.3 Relational & Logical Operators,
2.1.4 Conditional & Comma Operator
2.2 Simple Statement
2.3 Input and Output Library Functions
2.3.1 printf() 2.3.2 scanf()
2.3.3 getchar() 2.3.4 putchar()
2.3.5 gets() 2.3.6 puts()
(Simple Program For Concepts)
3 CONTROL STATEMENTS 07
3.1 Decision making and branching

3.1.1 if Statement(if, if-else, if-else ladder,
nested if-else)
3.1.2 Switch, break, continue, goto statement
3.2 Decision making and looping
3.2.1 While, do – while, for Statements
3.2.2 Nested loops
4 FUNCTIONS 04
4.1 Defining a Function, Accessing a function,

4.2 Passing arguments to a Function(call by value),
Specifying argument data types
4.3 Scope and lifetime of variables
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section II
Lectures
Sr. No. Topics / Subtopics
(Hours)
5 ARRAYS & CHARACTERS & STRINGS 05
5.1 Defining an array,

5.2 One dimensional array ,Declaration and
Initialization of Arrays,
5.3 Two Dimensional Arrays Declaration and
Initialization of Arrays
5.4 The char data type, using character
variables, using string
5.5 Declaring and initializing string variables,
5.6 Reading strings from terminal
5.7 Writing Strings to screen, putting strings together.
5.8 Comparison of two strings
5.9 String- handling Functions
6 STRUCTURES AND POINTERS 04
6.1 Simple structures (Defining & declaring

structures, accessing structure members)
6.2 Understanding pointers, declaring pointer
variable, initialization of pointer variable,
accessing address of a variable
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
B. TERM WORK
Term work shall consist of the following:
i) Laboratory experiments and related skills to be developed :
Sr. Title of
Skills to be developed
No. Experiment
01 Study of 1.1 Understanding an Algorithm
Flowcharts 1.2 Understanding the Flowchart
and Algorithm 1.3 Study of various Flowchart Symbols
1.4 To draw Flowchart on any Practical routine
02 Character set and 2.1 Detail study of character set of C language
operators 2.2 Understanding Operator
2.3 Various types of operator and their use
03 Simple 3.1 Standard Input function- scanf(),gets(), getchar()
programming 3.2 Standard Output function-printf(), puts(), putchar
using Input and 3.3 Syntax and use of scanf() and prinf() function with example
Output Functions.
04 Use of Operators 4.1 Study of Different operators in C
4.2 Use of arithmetic expression.
4.3 Use of Logical Expression
4.4 Programs Based on Different Operators
05 Study of Control 5.1 conditional and unconditional branching
statements 5.2 syntax and use of go to statement
5.3 Program based on go to statement & Conditional operators
06 Study of control 6.1 necessity of control structure
structure 6.2 types of control structure
• Decision making statements
• If statement
• If-else statement
6.3 syntax and flowchart of if-else statement
6.4 Program based on if –else statement
07 Study of control 7.1 use of switch statement
structure: switch 7.2 Syntax and flowchart of switch statement.
statement 7.3 Program using switch statement
08 Study of for 8.1 definition of loop
statement 8.2 syntax and flowchart of for loop
Study of while 8.3 Program based on for loop
loop 8.4 Exit control and Entry control loop
8.5 syntax and flowchart of while loop &Do- while loop
8.6 program based on while loop & Do
09 Study of function 9.1 Understanding function
9.2 function declaration or prototype
9.3 syntax to declare a function
9.4 function call
9.5 Program using functions
10 Study of an array 10.1 Understanding and use of an array
10.2 syntax to declare an array
10.3 read and print the elements of an array
10.4 Any Two programs based on arrays
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
11 Study of standard 11.1 syntax and use of strcat(),strlen(),strcmp(),strcpy()
string function 11.2 Program based on string functions
12 Study of Simple 12.1 Understanding and syntax of structure
Structure 12.2 Declaration and use of variables of structure
12.3 Program for declaring and defining a structure
ii) Progressive Skills Test :

Sr.
No.
1 Attendance 5
3 Algorithm 4
4 Flow chart 4
5 C program 4
6 Logical Approach 4
Total 25
Assessment of term work as per Pro-forma III.
1. Books
2. Transparencies
3. Power Point Presentation
4. Self-learning
a) Books / Codes
Sr.
Author Title
No.
1. E.Balgurusamy Programming in ANSI C
2. YashwantKanetkar Let us C
3 kerninghan & Ritchie The .C. Programming language
b) Websites
1· http://cplus.about.com/od/beginnerctutoriali/a/blctut.htm.
2· http://computer.howstuffworks.com/c.htm
3· http://www.indiastudycenter.com/studyguides/sc/objtest/default.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

Course Abbreviation : ECPA
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of Practical
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal))
Theory Exam Proforma- Proforma-II
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks - - - 25 25 50
Rationale:
The need of today’s manufacturing industrial world is based on best quality & precision
oriented shorter manufacturing cycle time .To satisfy this need the use of CAD/CAM & automation is
inevitable .To satisfy industrial need, diploma engineer should be able to cope with CAD/CAM
technology. With this intention this subject is introduced in the curriculum. The prerequisites of this
subject have been introduced in earlier subjects such as engineering graphics, engineering drawing &
mechanical engineering drawing.
CAD/CAM technology is moving in the direction of greater integration of design
activities & manufacturing activities. CAD covers the use of computer to assist creation, modification and
analysis of design CAM include the use of computer to plan manage & control the operation in
manufacturing
Objectives:
1. Students will able to draft 2D drawing.
2. Students will able to draw assembly drawings and its details drawing.
3. Students will able to draw an isometric view of simple components.
4. Students will able to work on 3 D Modeling.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A) THEORY : SECTION-I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 INTRODUCTION TO AUTO CAD
1.1 GUI and work places
1.2 File Management: New, Open, Save
1.3Drawing simple sketches
06
1.4Draw tool bar: Line, Circle, Arc, rectangle, Polygon,
polyline, Ellipse, Spline Display Control: Zoom, Pan.
1.5Setting up limits, units, drafting settings.
1.6Types of Co-ordinate systems: Absolute, Relative , Polar
2 MODIFY AND PROPERTY MANAGEMENT:

2.1 Modify tool bar: Move, Copy, Rotate, Array, Scale,
Mirror, Offset, Trim, Join, Break, Extend, Hatch,
Fillet, Chamfer.
04
2.2 Managing Properties: Line Type, Colour, Line weight, Use
of quick properties
2.3 Layer Management
2.4 Match properties
3 ANNOTATIONS:
3.1 Text: Mtext, Single line text, Style manager, Text editor.
3.2 Dimensioning: Line, Circle, Angle, Arc, Jogged, Ordinate,
Arc Length.
3.3 Base line and Continuous dimensioning, Quick
dimensioning.
04
3.4 Enquiry Commands: Utilities tool bar(Checking Distance,
Angle and Area)
3.5 Dimension style manager
3.6 Multileader style manager
3.7 Table, Table style manager
4 BLOCK: 02
4.1 Block editor, design, center, tool pallet.
TOTAL 16 NA
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
05 INTRODUCTION TO 3D MODELLING:
5.1 Work places: 3D Modeling

5.2 Solid primitives: Box, Wedges, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere,
Torus, Pyramid, Polysolid.
5.3 Creating regions, Boundary
5.5 Difference between region and boundary,
5.5 Extrude and Revolve 08
5.6 isometric and Perspective views
5.7 Boolions: Union, Subtract, Intersect, Interfere.
5.8 3 D Move, 3D Array, 3 D Rotate, 3D Mirror
5.9 Navigation Tools: orbit, Free orbit, Continuous orbit.
5.10 Sweep
5.11 Loft: c/s only, guides, path.
06 SOLID EDITING AND RENDERING:
6.1 Solid Editing: Face operations, Edge operations, 04

Shell, Separate slice.
6.2 Rendering: Applying materials, Managing view ports.
07 VIEWS MANAGEMENT: 04
7.1 Layout Management: Layouts, Using Templates, V ports

7.2 plotting and plot control
TOTAL 16 NA
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Specification table for setting question paper for semester end theory examination: N.A.
B ) Laboratory experiences and related skills developed.
Sr.
No.
1 Using 2D auto CAD, draw orthographic Drafting of 2D drawing.
Projection of any two simple components.
2 Using 2D auto CAD, draw orthographic Drafting of 2D drawing.
Projection of machine components: Coupling
and Pulley.
3 Using 2D Auto CAD draw anyone of the listed Drafting assembly drawings and its details.
assembly drawing having at least five
components: foot step bearing, Plummer block,
Four way tool post, Pipe vice
4 Using 3D auto CAD draw Isometric views of Drafting an isometric view of simple
any two components. components.
5 Using 3D auto CAD draw Isometric views of Drafting an isometric view of simple
any one among the listed components: Pipe components.
joint, Pin Joint.
Sr.
No.


50
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1) Chalk-board.


Total 50
a) Books:
Sr. No. Author Title Publication
01 P.N. Rao CAD/CAM Principles and Tata McGraw-Hill
Applications
02 RadhaKrishna P. & CAD/CAM/CIM Wiley Eastern Ltd.
Subramanyam
03 AutoCAD R-14 David Frey BPB Publications
b) Websites :
www.cadtutor.net/tutorials/autocad/
www.cad-notes.com/contents/autocad-articles
www.auto-cad-tutorial.com
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS AND
MECHATRONICS
Course Abbreviation : EMMM

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
i. 25 marks for
Average of each practical Term End -
Details of As per
two tests of 20 Theory Exam
Evaluation ii.One PST of 25 Proforma-III
marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 - 125
RATIONALE :
Measurement plays an important role in all branches of engineering. Students needs to familiar with
the advanced measurement techniques along with the principles of instruments. The integration of
electronics engineering, electrical engineering, computer technology and control engineering with
mechanical engineering is increasing in industrial sector, forming a vital part in the design, manufacture
and maintenance of wide range of engineering products, processes and measurement systems. As a
consequence, there is a need for a diploma engineers to understand such systems used in measurement
and automation.
OBJECTIVES : Student will be able to:
1. Understand the principle of operation of an instrument,
2. Select Suitable measuring device for a particular application,
3. Distinguish between various types of errors,
4. Identify various input and output devices in an automated system,
5. Understand interfacing of input and output devices.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 MEASUREMENT SYSTEM & CHARACTERISTICS 08 12
OF MEASURING INSTRUMENTS:
1.1 Measurement -Methods of measurement,
Classification of Instruments
1.2 Generalized measurement system and its
functional elements
1.3 Static terms and characteristics: Range ,Span, Accuracy ,
Precision, Reliability, Errors and Correction, Calibration,
Hysteresis and Dead zone, Drift, Sensitivity, Threshold
and Resolution, Repeatability and Reproducibility,
Linearity
1.4 Dynamic Terms and Characteristic :
Speed of response, Measuring Lag, Dynamic Error
and Fidelity, Overshoot, Dead Time and Dead Zone
1.5 Zero, First and Second order instruments
1.6 Classification of errors, Causes of errors & remedies
2 MEASUREMENT SENSORS 10 16
2.1 Position measurement: Proximity Sensors and
Switches, Potentiometer, Digital Optical Encoders ,
Linear Variable Differential Transformer(L.V.D.T.)
2.2 Speed Measurement:
Mechanical Tachometers: High speed indicator,
Centrifugal force tachometer
Electrical Tachometer: Drag cup, Cumulated
capacitor, Tachogenerator.
Contactless Electrical Tachometer:
Inductive pick up, capacitive pick up,
Photoelectric pick up, Stroboscope
2.3 Strain measurement:
Types of strain gauge, applications , Gauge Factor,
Requirements and materials of strain gauge,
Selection and installation of strain gauge,
Resistance Strain gauge, Measuring different
states of stress with strain gauge ,Load Cell
2.4 Temperature Measurement: Classification,
Liquid in Glass, Pressure ,Bimetallic thermometer
Thermocouple, Electrical Resistance Thermometer
Optical and Radiation pyrometer, Thermistor
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
3 MISCELLANEOUS MEASUREMENT 06 12
3.4 Force &Torque Measurement-Hydraulic Dynamometer
Eddy current Dynamometer, Strain gauge transmission
Dynamometer
3.2 Flow measurement-special methods-Turbine type flow
Meter, Hot wire Anemometer, Ultrasonic flow meter
3.3 Liquid level Measurement-direct and indirect method
3.4 Humidity Measurement :Absorption Hygrometer
3.5 Acoustics Measurement: Sound level meter,
Piezoelectric crystals type, Microphones-Carbon and
Electrodynamics Microphone
TOTAL 24 40
marks only.
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
4 MECHATRONICS SYSTEM 10 16
4.1 Mechatronics- Introduction
4.2 Introduction of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Microprocessor systems-Buses, Memory, Input/Output
4.3 8051 Microcontroller
Architecture, Pin configuration, working of
Microcontroller and applications.
4.4 Comparison of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
4.5 Programmable Logic Controller(PLC)-Introduction,
PLC definition, Basic structure-PLC block diagram,
Input/Output, Selection of PLC
5 DATA ACQUISITION 04 08
5.1 Generalized data Acquisition system
5.2 Data loggers
5.3 Analog to Digital conversion:
A/D Converters-Successive Approximation A/D
Converter, A/D Flash Converter,
Digital to Analog conversion
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
6 ACTUATORS 10 16
6.1 Electromagnetic principles.
Solenoids and Relays:
Electromagnetic Relay, Reed Relay,
Mercury wetted reed relay.
6.2 Electric motors: Construction and working
Field- current, Field-Field Interaction, D.C.Motors
6.4 Stepper motors.
6.5 Variable Frequency Drives
6.6 Selection of motors.
6.7 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Actuation systems
Hydraulic and Pneumatic system-components and
General Working,
Hydraulic valves-Directional control valves,
Pressure control valve
Hydraulic and Pneumatic Actuators (Cylinder).
Rotary Actuators.
Total 24 40
marks only.

Name of topic
MEASUREMENT
SYSTEM &
CHARACTERISTICS
1 04 04 04 12
OF MEASURING
INSTRUMENTS:
MEASUREMENT
2 SENSORS 04 04 08 16
MISCELLANEOUS
3 MEASUREMENT 04 04 04 12
MECHATRONICS
4 SYSTEM 08 04 04 16
DATA ACQUISITION
5 02 04 02 08
ACTUATORS
6 08 04 04 16
Total >> 30 24 26 80
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
B. TERM WORK
The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work .
No. developed
1. Determination of flow rate Measurement of fluid flow.
2. Speed measurement by Magnetic and Photoelectric Measurement of speed of Shaft.
Pick up
3. Pressure measurement by using Piezo- resistive Measurement of Pressure.
Sensor.
4. Temperature measurement by using Thermocouple. Measurement of Temperature.
5. Displacement measurement by Linear variable Measurement of displacement.
differential transformer.
6. Strain measurement by Resistive wire strain gauge. Measurement of strain
7. Identification and demonstration of different Operation and selection of
actuators. Various actuators
8. Demonstration of the working of various digital to Operating
analog and analog to digital converters A/D & D/A converters
C. ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK
a) Continuous Assessment of Practical :
Every practical experiment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per following criteria
2 Attendance 05
3 Participation 05
4 Understanding 10
Total 25
D. INDUSTRIAL EXPOSURE :

1 Expert Lecture from Industry Mechatronics System and application
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Classroom Practices
1. Chalk board
2. LCD
3. Videos presentations
4. Assignments
REFERENCE MATERIAL :a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. Bolton W Mechatronics- Electronic control Pearson Education Ltd
systems in Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering
2. Histand B.H. and Introduction to Mechatronics and Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Alciatore D.G Measurement systems
3. R.S. Sirohi and Mechanical Measurements New Age international
H.C. Radhakrihna
Publishers
4. HMT Mechatronics Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
5. Mahalik N.P. Mechtronics principles, concepts and Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
applications
6. Singh, Joshi Mechatronics Prentice-Hall India
7 NIIT Programmable Logic Control Prentice-Hall India
8 A.K. Sawhney Mechanical Measurements & Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi
Instrumentation
b) Websites
i) http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/18/enotes/10ME42/Unit%205-6-GSP.pdf
ii) http://www.npl.co.uk/upload/pdf/beg-guide-measurement-mech-eng.pdf
iii) http://www.hljp.edu.cn/attachment/20120831082417983.pdf
iv)http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/18/enotes/10ME42/Unit%205-6-GSP.pdf
v)http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/pdf/mod1.pdf
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Abbreviation : EMGM

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :
Mode of
Theory Oral Total
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 - 125
RATIONALE:
This subject deals with marketing aspect of an industry. Market planning or development
is the most important part of any organization. There should be market for any product which is
produced. This is of prime importance from profit of the industry and running or any industry. In the
increasing competition various technical services are being marketed as well as in product design various
inputs from marketing should be taken into product design various inputs from marketing should be taken
into consideration. Thus marketing has become a technical job and numbers of students are entering this
field.
OBJECTIVES :
1. The students will learn various elements of the market survey.
2. To study types of marketing organizations, duties of marketing engineers or managers.
3. To know market requirements of any product.
4. To plan marketing straightedges over competing industries.
5. To study financial aspects of marketing division.
6. To forecast sale or diversification in products
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A. THEORY :
SECTION I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1. MARKETING CONCEPTS 06 08
1.1 Marketing function and concepts of marketing
1.2 Approaches to study of marketing
1.3 Management orientation
1.4 Process of marketing, product, pricing, promotion, physical
distribution
2. MARKETING ORGANIZATION 08 12
2.1 Marketing organization

2.2 Marketing and Customer Service-Customer Satisfaction
2.3 Environmental Variables-Market Planning-
Buyer behaviour Study
2.4Stages in Buying Process
2.5Marketing concept Vs Selling Concept
2.6 Duties and responsibilities at different levels
2.7 Career alternatives in marketing
3. MARKETING ENVIRONMENT AND RESEARCH 06 12
3.1Marketing environmental scanning for different

industries/business in Indian context
3.2 Introduction to marketing research-
Necessity, Classification
3.3 Product Analysis
Market Analysis
Competition Analysis
3.4 Market Research Techniques
Function, Characteristics
4. MARKET SEGMENTATION 04 08
4.1 Market segmentation
4.2 Consumer, behaviors, types of markets, industrial, rural,
government purchases
4.3Services and marketing
Total 24 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic are one and
half times the marks allotted above. Candidate can attempt questions for the above allotted marks.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION II
Theory
Sr. Topics Lectures
No. evaluation
(Hours)
Marks
5. MARKETING STRATEGY 04 08
5.1 Marketing strategy formulations
5.2 Marketing planning
5.3 Analyzing Competitors, Competitive strategies
5.4 Indentifying Market Segments and Selecting Target Market
Differentiating and Positioning Market Offering
6. MARKETING DECISIONS AND MARKETING CONTROL 06 10

6.1 Product life cycle-Pricing
6.2 New product decisions
6.3 Branding, packaging, pricing decisions
6.4 Distribution and communication decisions
6.5 Marketing Management Process
6.6 Marketing Information System
6.7 Marketing control
6.8 Budgeting, Marketing Audits
6.9 Use of marketing ratios
7. CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR AND MARKET PROMOTION 06 10
7.1 Factors affecting Buyer behavior
7.2 Consumer needs, Consumer Perception-Learning,
7.3 Consumer Attitudes-Communication and Pursuation
7.4 Influence of Culture-Consumer Decision making process:Opinion
Leadership, Attracting and retaining Customers
7.5 Market Promotion-Advertising, Press relations, Communication
Customer Relation-Stockholder Relations-Employee relation
Public Relations
8. SALES AND SALES FORECASTING 08 12
8.1 Staff and Function of Sales Department
8.2 Distribution Channel
8.3 Marketing Intermediaries
8.4 Packaging-Packaging Materials
8.5 Sales forecasting-Importance-Types of forecasting, Methods used for
forecasting
8.6 Survey of Buyer views ,Collective opinion ,Sales analysis,
8.7 Elements of good Forecasting –Procedure for Forecasting
8.8 Selection and Evaluation of Forecast
8.9 Uses of Forecast-Statistical Data helpful in Forecasting
Total 24 40
Semester end exam question paper should be such that total marks of questions on each topic are one and half
times the marks allotted above. Candidate can attempt questions for the above allotted marks.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Specification table for setting question paper for semester end theory examination
Section / Distribution of marks Total
Name of topic
I/1 Marketing concepts 04 04 -- 08

I/2 Marketing organization 08 04 -- 12
I/3 Marketing environment 06 06 -- 12
I/4 Market segmentation 04 04 -- 08
II/5 Marketing strategy 02 04 02 08
II/6 Marketing decisions and 06 04 -- 10
Marketing control
II/7 Consumer Behavior and Market 04 04 02 10
Promotion
II/8 Sales and Sales forecasting 04 04 04 12
marks only.
One assignment based on each chapter is to be submitted.
Sr.
No.
2 Punctuality in submission 5
3 Quality of term work 5

4 Understanding Level 10
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1) Chalk-board.

2. Tutorial exercises

1. Chalk board
2. Demonstrative kits.
3.Demonstrative charts
B. Books / Journals
Sr.
No.
Phillip Kolter Marketing Management – Analysis Tata Mc. Graw Hills.
1.
Planning and control Sales Management.
2. Cunliffe L. Blooing Sales Management Decision, Policies and Prentice Hall,
Cases. Publications.
3. R.R. Still, Modern Marketing Management. Tata Mc. Graw Hills.
E.W.Condiff,
N.A,.P.Govoni
4. Rustom Davar Fundamentals of Marketing. S.Chand, Publications
Stanton Marketing, A Management Introduction Prentice Hall,
5.
Marketing. Publications
6 Gandhi Marketing Management S.Chand, Publications
Borce,Joseph Selling Principles & Practices Khanna Publications.
7
Guiltinan
8 B. Riuchard Marketing Management Tata Mc. Graw Hills.
Dholakia, Bhandari & Basic marketing – A Managerial Prentice Hall,
9 Khurana Approach. Publications.
McCarthy.
Banga, Sharma Industrial Organisation and Engineering Khanna Publishers
10
Economics
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : QUALITY SYSTEM

Course Abbreviation : EQLS
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :

Mode of
Theory Oral Total
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 - 125
RATIONALE:
Industrial organizations all over the world have accepted ISO 9000 series as standard for Quality
assurance systems and become essential to adopt ISO 9000 in order to compete with
international industrial world.
This becomes necessary to impart knowledge and understand the concepts of ISO 9000 series
and its equivalent Indian standards. To develop the consciousness about quality and its assurance
among students before they enter the profession this course is introduced in the curriculum of
final year mechanical Engineering students.
OBJECTIVES:
1) Understand ISO certification procedure and quality systems.
2) Understand importance and necessity of quality assurance system.
3) Understand how to work according to quality policy of the organization.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Section-I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
QUALITY FUNCTION
1.1 Basic concepts related with quality function,

1.2 Quality of design, conformance, quality, policy, objectives, 04 06
1 specifications,
1.3 Quality economics, cost and value,
1.4 Quality assurance, Quality audit, Quality mindedness,
Vendor rating, Inspection and Quality control, Quality organization,
Quality circles.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT FOUNDATION

10 16
2.1 Strategic quality management (Hoshin Kanri)
2.2 Strategic quality planning, quality goals. Time frame by
participation of top management.
2.3 The vision : Future state of organization, good understanding by
everyone, inspiration, achievable QCDF (Quality Cost Delivery
Flexibility),
2.4 Customer focus, sharing by all values of the leadership,
organization and employees, respect for environment.
2.5 Status analysis: Shaping the portion, Shaping the environment.
2.6 Analysis for key strategies:
Specific goals –
2 i) Specific, measurable, attainable.
ii) Moving with changing world.
iii) Setting priorities.
iv) Aligning and interlocking all departments and individual
project goals to corporate goals and eliminating duplication of
efforts.
v) Communicating to every employee his or her role in
achieving the company vision.
vi) Closely monitor performance using carefully devised
measures of programme.
2.7 Process management – initiatives, job duties, responsibility,
accountability.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCESSES
3.1Quality management process : 10 18
i) Quality planning
ii) Quality culture ( Kaizen and Quality circle )
iii) Diagnosing the root cause of inefficiency in organization – how do
world class management systems help.
iv) What is Kaizen?
- Evolving the kaizen system of zero investment improvement.
- Identification of wastes.
- Case studies.
- Achievement after Kaizen
- Linking ISO 9000
- Linking QFD – Taguchi Techniques.
3.2 Quality improvement :
- Old statistical and analytical tools for quality.
i) Tally-sheet
ii) Graphs
iii) Histograms
3 iv) Stratification
v) Scatter diagram
vi) Control chart
vii) Pareto diagram
- New tools of quality
i) Ishikawa diagram
ii) Arrow diagram
iii) Relations diagram
iv) Tree diagram
v) Affinity diagram
vi) Matrix diagram
vii) Process design diagram chart
- Additional tools
i) Brains storming
ii) Flow charts
iii) 5W & 1H
iv) 5 WHYS
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section-II
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
04.
QUALITY MANAGEMENT INFRASTRUCTURE 08 10
4.1 Quality assurance system –ISO 9000
Quality system ISO 9000 series standards ISO 9000 elements
understanding requirement, assessment with respect to quality system.
4.2 Documentation and implementation
i) Quality manual, structure, internal quality audit, external audit
and certification, statistical process control and Quality Control
tools.
ii) Customer – supplier partnership.
iii) Total organization involvement.
iv) Measurement and information
v) Education and training.
05. ISO 9000
5.1 History of ISO 9000. 03 06
5.2 European economic community ( EEC ),
5.3 Need for quality system standards,
5.4 International organizational for standardization ( ISO )
adopted by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS ),
5.5 Developments up to 1986.
5.6 Equivalent IS 14000 series.
06. QUALITY SYSTEMS VOCABULARY
6.1 ISO 8402 : 1994 Indian Standard Quality Management And 10 14
Quality Assurance – Vocabulary.
6.2 ISO 9000-1 : 1994 Indian Standard Quality Management And
Quality Assurance Standards.
Part 1 – Guidelines for selection and use.
Part 2 – Generic Guidelines for the Application of ISO
9001, ISO 9002 AND ISO 9003
Part 3 – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001 to the development,
supply and maintenance of software.
Quality Assurance Standards..
07. Quality Systems
7.1 ISO 9001 : 1994 Indian Standard Quality Systems 03 10
7.2 Model For Quality Assurance In Design
7.3 Development, Production, Installation And Servicing.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of topic
1. Quality function 02 04 - 06
2. Quality Management Foundation 08 - 08 16
3. Quality Management Process 06 06 06 18
4. Quality Management Infrastructure 04 04 02 10
5. ISO 9000 04 - 02 06
6. Quality Systems Vocabulary 05 04 05 14
7. Quality Systems 05 05 - 10
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
No.
1. Assignment on Quality policies, Understand basic concept, able to work according to
objectives, vendor rating. quality policy, objectives of the organization.
2. Assignment on QFD Understand future state of organization or vision of
organization. Achievable quality cost delivery
flexibility of the organization..
3. Assignment on Able to understand importance of statistical tools,
1) Kaizen identify root course of the failure mode in process,
2) Statistical tools design, product.
Ishikawa Diagram
4. Case study on ISO 9002,9004 Understand the concepts, able to develop a model for
ISO9002, 9004 in an industry.
5 Case study on Quality Systems Understand model for quality assurance in design
development, production, installation and servicing.
C. INDUSTRIAL EXPOSURE : Included in experiment no. 5 .Case study on Quality Systems

D. ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK AND PRACTICAL .
Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per criteria.
2 Attendance 05
3 Participation 05
4 Understanding 10
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________


1) Chalk-board.
a) Books
01 Juran Quality planning and analysis Tata McGraw Hill Pvt Ltd.
02 E.L. Grant Quality control The McGraw Hill Co. Ltd.
03 Helpern Assurance Science Swan Publication New
Delhi
04 Suresh M. Mody Tools for quality D.L.Shah Trust
05 Mr. Shyam Wonderland of Kaizen – A Quality Management
Talawadekar total quality control for System, Thane
survival
06 Shrinivasan N.S., TQM concepts and Tasks New age International (p)
Narayanan V 12Ltd. publishers, New
Delhi
07 Tapan Bagchi ISO 9000 Wheeler Publication, New
Delhi
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
LEVEL – V
MANAGEMENT
AND DIVERSIFIED
COURSES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

Course Abbreviation : EEDP
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 01
03
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme :

Mode of
Theory Oral Total
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks -- -- -- 50 - 50
RATIONALE:
In the global market and economy of the date, innumerable opportunities have opened for the
technicians. On the other side, the same situation has brought in many challenges. The student requires to
be equipped with the competencies to take benefit of the opportunities and also the strength to meet the
challenges. This course is designed to make the student aware about his own professional career and
provide exposure to the world of entrepreneurship. Whether or not he starts his own enterprise, it is
necessary for every student to have a bird’s eye view of the whole industrial scenario and the related
issues as that is going to be his future professional world. The three earlier courses in the series of
Personality Related Courses will work as foundation for this terminal course of the series.
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of this Course, the student is expected to be able to
1. Prepare career plan for himself.
2. Appreciate the issues related to globalization with reference to Indian industrial scenario.
3. Appreciate the concept and elements of entrepreneurship.
4. Evaluate himself for entrepreneurship competencies.
5. Appreciate financial and marketing concepts and issues regarding entrepreneurship.
Prepare a sample project report
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sr. TOPICS
Lectures
No. (hours)
1. CAREER PLANNING
1.1 Professional Career: Concept and definition. Occupation, profession 02
and business.
1.2 Importance of career planning, goal setting.
1.3 Various career options for a diploma technician
1.4 Factors affecting choice of career: Personal factors – personality and
competencies, family background, individual strengths and constrains,
etc. External factors – Market situation and future trends, etc.
1.5 Preparing a career plan: Concreteness and flexibility of a career plan
2. GLOBALIZATION, WORLD MARKET AND NATIONAL
INDUSTRIAL POLICIES 03
2.1 Globalization and world market: Concept and phenomenon.
2.2 Influences of globalization on developing countries
2.3 Policies of Union and State Government on industrialization
and marketing
2.4 Various statutory bodies like DIC, MCED, MITCON, etc.
formed by the Government
2.5 Various Government schemes like Prime Minister Rojgar Yojana, etc.
3. ENTREPRENEURSHIP
3.1 Concept, classification and characteristics of an entrepreneur 03
3.2 Advantages and risks for an entrepreneur
3.3 Resources required for an enterprise
3.4 Growing an enterprise
3.5 Professionalism
3.6 Biographies of at least four great entrepreneurs
4. ENTERPRISE PLANNING AND PROJECT REPORT
4.1 Steps in starting an enterprise : Individual SWOT analysis 02
and personality factors assessment, emerging market trends
and market opportunities survey, feasibility analysis
4.2 Project Report : Contents of project report. Proforma of project report.
5. FINANCIAL ANALYSIS AND ACCOUNTING
5.1 Cost of project : Sources of finance. Assessment of working 02
capital. Product costing. Profit and break even analysis.
Financial ratios and their significance.
5.2 Financing Institutions
5.2 Business Accounting : Accounting principles and
methodology.
6. MARKET ASSESSMENT AND MARKETING
6.1 Definition of market and marketing 02
6.2 Marketing channels and strategies
6.3 E-commerce
7. ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT AND DEVELOPMENT
7.1 Resources management 02
7.2 Quality standards : ISO
7.3 Professional ethics, environmental protection, social aspects
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TERM WORK:
The assignments / exercises are designed so as to make the student apply the theoretical inputs to
himself and get realistic guideline for his own career and entrepreneurship development skills.
Sr. Skills / Competencies to be

Title of the Lab work
No. developed
1. Goal setting and career planning for myself Self-analysis and concept
application
2. Exercise on working on a group task Working in a group and leadership
3. Leadership exercise Leadership skills
4. Group discussion on issues related to
globalization Discussing given problem in all
5. Group discussion on issues related to impact of dimensions
globalization on India
6. Survey of industrial environment of Kolhapur Carrying out a survey.
with reference to particular engineering Getting awareness of industrial
discipline scenario.
7. Internet based information search and Analysis and inspiration
presentation of biography of two great
entrepreneurs in particular engineering
discipline
8. Me as a future entrepreneur : self SWOT Self-analysis and concept
analysis application
9. Brain storming exercise for generating creating
ideas for products Generating creative business ideas
10. Brain storming exercise for generating creating and evaluating them
ideas for opportunities in service sector
11. Interviewing an entrepreneur Interviewing
Analyzing situations
12. Sample project report preparation Undergoing complete sample
exercise for starting a new enterprise
Every practical experiment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per following criteria
2 Attendance 05
3 Participation/Presentation 05
4 Understanding 10
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Lectures cum Discussions
2. Experts’ guest Lectures

1. Chalk board
2. LCD
3. Videos Audio presentations
4. Video films.
5. O.H.P, Slides
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. J.S.Saini and Entrepreneurship - Theory and Wheeler Publisher, New Delhi
B.S.Rathore Pracice
2. TTTI Chandigarh Entrepreneurship Development ----
3. E. Gorden and Entrepreneurship Development Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai
K.Natrajan
4. J.B.Patel and A manual on How to prepare a --
D.G.Allampally project report
5. J.B.Patel and A manual for business opportunity --
D.G.Allampally. identification and selection
6. P.C.Jain A handbook of new entrepreneurs
7 S.B.Sareen and H. National Directory of entrepreneur

Anil Kumar Motivator and Resource Persons
8 The seven business V.G.Patel
crisis and how to
beat them
c) Websites
i) www.ediindia.org
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : INDUSTRIAL ORGANISATION & MANAGEMENT

Course Abbreviation : EIOM
TEACHING & EVALUATION SCHEME:
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
03
Practical --
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Practical
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal))
Term End As per
Evaluation 20 marks ii.One PST of 25 Proforma-II
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 - -- 100
Rationale:
Management ability is a higher-grade ability, which every successful Engineer
must possess. This science has been developed in those days when it was treated as an art in earlier
stages. It is impossible for an individual though technically sound to achieve goals of the organizations.
Effective implementation of management policies is a tough task. The Diploma holder should know
these management techniques.
Objectives:
1. Understand different types of Business Organization.
2. Prepare feasibility reports of projects.
3. Develop leadership qualities.
4. Manage human resources.
5. Understand different Acts.
6. Use CPM & PERT Techniques.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT : A. THEORY SECTION - I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMNET 08 12
1.1 Principles of management.
1.2 Concept, management
1.3 Objectives of management
1.4 Scope and importance of management
1.5 Levels of management
1.6 Managerial competencies : Communication, Planning and
Administration, Team work, Strategic action and General awareness
2 FORMS OF BUSINESS ORGANISATION 04 08
2.1Types of industrial sectors
2.2 Forms of business organization
2.3 Individual Proprietorship
2.4 Partnership
2.5 Joint stock companies
2.6 Co-operatives
2.7 Public sectors
2.8 Government undertakings.
3 FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 04 08
3.1 Planning: Forms of planning, Strategic levels and Planning,
Phases of Planning
3.2 Decision Making: Decision making conditions, Basic types
of Decisions
3.3 Organizing: Introduction to Organization design, basic types of
Departmentalization, Co-ordination, Authority
3.4 Motivation: Work Motivation, Three approaches to Motivation,
3.5 Leadership: Leadership and Power, Leadership Development
3.6 Communication: The Communication process, Impact of
Information Technology, Hurdles to effective communication
3.7 Controlling: Foundations of control, creative Effective control,
Primary methods of control
4 HUMAN RESOURSE MANAGEMENT(Personnel Management) 08 12
4.1 Definition and concept, Aim, Objectives and function
4.2 Principles of personnel policy
4.3 Recruitment and selection of employees
4.4 Training : Objectives, benefits, types and methods
4.5 Safety management: safety in industry, committees, programs, trainings
4.6 Accidents: Economic aspects, direct and in direct cost of accidents,
causes, types and prevention, personal protective devices.
4.7 Housekeeping: definition concept necessity, advantages, procedure
Total 24 40
only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION - II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
5 MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 08 12
5.1 Importance of purchase
5.2 Functions’ Objectives
5.3 Duties of purchasing officer
5.4 Methods of purchasing and procedure
5.5 Scope and importance of material management
5.6 Objectives material management
5.7 Duties of Material manager
5.8 Concept of supply chain management
6 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 04 08
6.1 Concept, Scope and Importance
6.2 functions of financial management
6.3 Types of capital: Fixed, working
6.4 Factors affecting Working capital
6.5Capitalisation : over, under
6.6 Sources of Finance
7 INDUSTRIAL ACT & SAFETY 04 08

7.1 Factory Act, Boiler Act, Workmen Compensation Act,
ESI Act, pollution Control Act
7.2 Accidents: Causes, Types, Remedies, Reporting &
Investigation
7.3 Safety codes, Safety training,
7.4 Occupational Safety and Health Administration Promoting
8 MODERN MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 08 12

8.1 PERT & CPM
8.2 Various terms related with network analysis
8.3 Various Time estimates
8.4 Construction of Network Diagram
8.5 Computation of Critical Path
8.6 Workers Participation in Management
8.7 Modern trends in material management : MRP,ERP
8.8 Lean manufacturing
Total 24 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Distribution of marks (level wise) Total

Principles Of Management
1 4 4 4 12
Forms Of Business
2 4 2 2 08
organization
Functions Of Management
3 4 2 2 08
Human Recourse
4 4 4 4 12
management
Materials Management
5 4 4 4 12
Financial Management
6 4 4 4 08
Industrial Act & Safety
7 4 4 4 08
Modern Management
8 4 4 4 12
Techniques
1 Industrial Visits Organization Structure
2) Group discussion
3) Interactive sessions.

1) Chalk-board.
3) O.H.P
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Books
Banga Sharma Industrial Organisation & Management Khanna Publisher
O P Khanna Industrial Engg. & Management Dhanpat Rai & sons New
Delhi
P.C. Pandey & C.K.Sing Management Science Dhanpat Rai & sons New
Delhi
Suresh Deleal Manssorali Industrial Engg. & Management System Prentice- Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd. New Delhi
Industrial Oraganisation P.T. Ghan Tata Mc Graw Hill
Management Information Waman S. Jawadekar Tata Mc Graw Hill
System
P.C. Pandey & C.K.Sing Management Science Dhanpat Rai & sons New
Delhi
b)Website
i) nptel/iitm.ac.in
ii)http://iete.ac.in/subjects/amindustry/Mgmt.htm
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Course Abbreviation : EQLM

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 02
04
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
In spite of great development in machine tool technology it becomes necessary to confirm the
variation in dimensions of the work pieces. This is because the change in dimension may occur due to
variation in 3Ms- Man, Machine & Material. Variation in 3M S directly of the work piece. The
variation in dimensions from the given tolerance of the machine part of work piece affects on the
performance of that machine. Confirmation of the variation in dimensions can be achieved by
collecting data & by using different statistical methods, which further helps control on variation in
manufacturing process & of quality of product.
OBJECTIVES:
1) To study facts, concepts, principles & procedure of quality control used in manufacturing
industry.
2) To enable the students to work as supervisor on shop floor, quality control Dept. in
manufacturing industry.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Section-I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY CONTROL
1.1 Definition & concept of Quality.

1.2 Inspection – concept, need, planning, difference between inspection & 06 16
1 quality control
1.3 Quality of design, quality of conformance, & Quality policies.
1.4 Concept of reliability & maintainability.
1.5 Role of management & suppliers to ensure quality of the product.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
06 14
2.1 Concept of Quality Assurance.
2 2.2 Responsibilities of quality assurance.
2.3 Quality audit.
2.4 Quality circles, concept, purpose & function.
QUALITY ECONOMICS
04 10
3.1 Cost of quality, value of quality & balance between the two.
3.2 Economics of quality design & quality of conformance
3 3.3Cost of quality : Appraisal, Prevention, External & Internal
failure cost.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section-II
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
4.
STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 05 12
4.1 Meaning and importance of SQC

4.2 Meaning of frequency distribution, mean, mode, median standard
deviation,
4.3 Normal distribution curve, Area under the curve & its interpretation.
4.4 Control charts for variables X & R charts
4.5 Process capability Analysis
5. TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT(TQM)

05 14
5.1 TQM Definition & Basic Concepts
5.2 Deming philosophy of TQM
5.3 Characteristics of Quality Leaders.
5.4 Quality Council
5.5 Quality statements: Vision, Mission, Quality Policy
5.6 Characteristics of successful Teams
5.7 Continuous Process Improvement : Juran Triology, Kaizen, PDSA Cycle
Poka Yoka
6. TQM: TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES

06 14
6.1 Seven tools of TQM: Pareto Diagram, Process Flow diagram,
Cause and Effect(ISHIKAWA)Diagram, Check sheet, Histogram,
Control Chart, Scatter Diagram
6.2 Benchmarking: Definition, Purpose of Benchmarking
6.3 Six Sigma: Principle and application
6.4 Theory of 5 S.
6.5 ISO : Benefits of ISO, ISO 9000 Series of standards, ISO 14000 Series
of Standards
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Total
No.
I/1 Introduction to Quality Control. 04 08 04 16
I/2 Quality Assurance. 05 05 04 14
I/3 Quality Economics. 06 04 -- 10
II/4 Statistical Quality Control. 04 04 04 12
II/5 TQM 04 04 06 14
II/6 TQM Tools & Techniques. 04 04 06 14
B. TERM WORK

Sr.
No.
1. Preparation of Histogram and calculation of Student will get familiar to apply quality control
standard deviation. techniques for the analysis of process.
2. Preparation of X bar and R Chart. Student will get familiar to apply quality control
techniques for the analysis of process.
3. Preparation of ‘p’ and ‘c’ Chart. Student will get familiar to apply quality control
techniques for the analysis of process
4. Case study on Process Capability Students will calculate process capability of a
machine.
5. Study of ISO9000 series. To know significance of ISO9000.
6 Case study of Kaizan To develop skills in Quality Techniques
7 Case study of Six Sigma To develop skills in Quality Techniques
8. Visit to industry to study Quality Tools and Students will learn hands on experience.
Techniques
Included in experiment no. 8
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per criteria .

c) Term-Work Examination (Internal) :

Term-Work Examination (Internal) shall be conducted as per the following criteria:

25
Final Assessment of Term Work Examination shall be done as per Pro-forma III.


1) Chalk-board.
a) Books
1 R.C. GUPTA Statistical quality control Tata Mc Graw Hill.
2 Grant Statistical quality control New Age Publication.
3 Ed. Robert Peach ISO9000 Hand book Tata Mc Graw Hill.
4 Furan & Grayna Quality control Prentice Hall Publication.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Course Abbreviation : EIEG
Pre-requisite Course(s) : ----------- Nil------------

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
This subject is technology subject. A Technician is required to work at the highest

Productivity level. His productivity is dependent on the productivity of the machines and the
people in the manufacturing system. Hence he should learn the techniques for improvement in
productivity of the people and equipment. A technician required to plan the production schedule
accordingly organize material supply for the manufacturing activities. The total cost of goods
produced contains large portion of overhead cost. Technician is required to minimize the direct
and indirect cost by optimizing the use of resources available to him. Hence he should learn
accounting process, inventory control and process planning. Modern manufacturing system
employ techniques such as JIT, TPM, FMS, 5’S’, kaizen which should be known to the
technician.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
OBJECTIVES :
Students will be able to;
1. Understand importance of productivity and factors for improvement of productivity.
2. Know different production systems and modern trends in manufacturing systems.
3. Find the breakeven point for manufacturing a product.
4. Prepare / modify layout of production system.
5. Select suitable material handling devices and plant facilities.
6. Prepare process plan and specify tooling’s for it.
7. Prepare process chart for analysis of existing process.
8. Use pert & CPM techniques for scheduling and controlling the manufacturing activities.
9. Apply techniques of method study and work measurement for improvement of existing
Manufacturing methods.
10. Find the economic order quantity (EOQ) for given situation
CONTENT :
A. THEORY : SECTION -I
Theory
Sr. Topics Lectures
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. Production System 04 06
1.1 Production - Definition , Types of production systems
1.2 Productivity - Importance , Measurement of Productivity ,
1.3 Techniques of improving productivity
1.4 Elements of cost- Fixed cost, Variable Cost.
1.5 Break even analysis, Calculation of Breakeven point.
Plant location, Plant layout and Material Handling

2.3 Plant Location - Importance of Site Selection, Factors
affecting Site Selection , Government Policies , relaxation
for Backward Areas.
2.4 Plant Layout - Objectives, types, design principles,
characteristics of Plant Layout, Symptoms of Bad Plant
Layout.
2.3 Group technology , Cellular layout,
2. 2.4 Material handling – Need, Principles and Types of material 08 14
handling devices – conveyors , Hoist & cranes , forklift
truck, trolleys, Pipes, Automated Guided Vehicles (AGV’s)
Selection of Material Handling systems and Devices.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Process Planning 08 10
3.1 Planning of Processes from raw material to finished product,
Factors affecting Process Planning,
3.2 Deciding sequence of operations, Operation Sheet,
Combined operations, Determination of Inspection Stages.
3.3 Selection of Machine
3.4 Techniques of assembly planning, Types of assembly.
3.4 Plant Capacity, Machine Capacity, Plant Efficiency.
Numerical not to be asked,.
Production Planning and Control

4. 4.1Routing, Sequencing [n job 2 machines],
4.2 Scheduling, Dispatching,
4.3 Meaning of Control, Progressive Control, Gantt chart. 04 10
Concept of Line balancing,
Total 24 40
marks only.
SECTION II
Theory
Sr. Topics Lectures
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
5. Work Study 08 16
5.1 Method Study- Objectives, Procedure, Selection of work.
5.2 Recording Techniques Process Charts ,Outline process chart,
5.3 Flow process chart, Two Hand process chart, Multiple
activity chart, Flow diagram, String diagram, Travel chart.
5.4 Micro motion study-Critical Examination, Principles of
Motion Economy.
5.5 Concept of ergonomics and workplace layout.
5.6 Work Measurement -Objectives, procedure, Time Study,
5.7 Time Study Equipments. Stop Watch Time Study, Standard
Time,
5.8 Work Sampling, Analytical Estimating, Predetermined
Motion Time Study, Allowances, Calculation of Standard
Time, Concept of Merit Rating.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Inventory Control
6.1 Methods of Inventory Management, Inventory Cost
6. relationship,
6.2 Deciding Economic Batch Quantity, EOQ Model, 04 08
Calculation of
6.3 EOQ, Concepts of discounts.
6.4 Introduction of Material Requirement Planning,
6.5 Stores Function – Storage systems – One bin , Two bin
System, Material issue request (MIR), bin card.
7. Jigs and Fixtures 04 06
7.1Introduction. Difference between jig and fixture
Different components of Jig/ fixture
7.2 3-2-1 principle of location. Types of locators and clamping
devices.
7.3 General principles of jig/fixture design.
7.4 Types of jigs and fixtures.
Modern Trends
8.1 Just In Time manufacturing – Pull and push types of 08 10
manufacturing systems,
8. 8.2Waste reduction, 5’S’, inventory reduction, single piece
Production systems. Concept of continuous improvement
(Kaizen) – DMIAC cycle,
8.3 Brain storming. Poka Yoke. Concept of Rapid Prototyping
8.4 Concept of Flexible manufacturing system
Total 24 40
marks only.

Name of topic
Production System
1 02 02 02 06
Plant location, Plant layout
2 and Material Handling 04 06 04 14
Process Planning
3 04 02 04 10
Production Planning and
4 Control 04 04 02 10
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Work Study
5 08 04 04 16
Inventory Control
6 02 04 04 08
Jigs and Fixtures
7 02 02 02 06
Modern Trends
8 04 04 02 10
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
No
1
To prepare a Plant Layout of a Small Scale To understand functioning of various
Industry.(industrial visit) departments in a Small Scale Industry.
2 To prepare process planning sheet of a To understand and plan sequence of

component. operations of given component.
3 To prepare Gantt Chart. To prepare Gantt Chart to minimize the
movements of man, material and machine.
4 To prepare different process chart (any two) To optimize the operations and sequencing
various operations using different process
chart symbols.
5 Case study on Modern Trends. Awareness of latest techniques being used
in the new management era.
6 To Prepare Jig for Simple component To understand functioning of various
components of jig prepare drawing and list
the component
1 Industrial Visits Plant location, Plant layout and Material

Handling
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

25

Total 25
2) Industrial Visits interactive sessions.
1) Chalk-board.
4) O.H.P
a) Books
P.N.Rao CAD/CAM Principles and Applications
RadhaKrishna P. & Subramanyam CAD/CAM/CIM
Wiley EasternLtd
B.S.Pabla and CNC Machine New age
M.Adithan International(P)Ltd
Groover M.P. & Zimmers Jr Computer Aided
design and
T R Banga S C Sharma Industrial Engineering & Management Khanna Puplishers
O.P.Khanna Industrial Engineering Khanna Puplishers
I.L.O Introduction to work Study Tata McGraw Hill
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING

Course Abbreviation : ECIM

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
The need of today’s manufacturing industrial world is based on best quality & precision
oriented shorter manufacturing cycle time .To satisfy this need the use of CAD/CAM &
automation is inevitable .To satisfy industrial need, diploma engineer should be able to cope with
CAD/CAM technology. With this intention this subject is introduced in the curriculum. The
prerequisites of this subject have been introduced in earlier subjects such as engineering
graphics, engineering drawing & mechanical engineering drawing.
OBJECTIVES:
Student should be able to:
1. Understand the fundamentals & use CAD.
2. Conceptualize drafting and modeling in CAD.
3. Prepare CNC part programming.
4. Operate CNC machines.
5. Conceptualize automation and FMS.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A . THEORY SECTION -I
Theory
Sr. Topics Lectures
No. evaluation
(Hours)
Marks
1. Introduction to CAD/CAM 6 8
Computers in industrial manufacturing. Product Cycle, CAD/CAM

CAD/CAM hardware:- basic structure, CPU, Memory, I/O devices,
Storage devices and system configuration.
2. Geometric Modeling
Requirement of geometric modeling, Types of geometric models. 10 16

Geometric construction method-sweep, solid modeling- Primitives
& Boolean operations, free formed surfaces (Classification of
surface only) (No numerical treatment)
Introduction to computer numerical Control

3 Introduction - NC, CNC, DNC, Advantages of CNC,
The coordinate system in CNC,
Motion control system - point to point, straight line, Continuous
path (Contouring). Application of CNC. 8 16
Total 24 40
only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION II
Theory
Sr. Topics Lectures
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
4. Part programming 6 8
Fundamentals, manual part programming, NC –Words,
Programming format, part programming, use of subroutines
computer aided part programming (APT).
Industrial Robotics
5. Introduction, physical configuration, basic robot motions, technical 10 16
features such as - work volume, precision and speed of movement,
weight carrying capacity, drive system, End effectors, robot
sensors.
Application – Material transfer, machine loading, welding, spray
coating, processing operation, assembly, inspection
6. Automation
Basic elements of automated system, advanced automation 8 16
functions, levels of automation.
Flexible manufacturing system :-Introduction, FMS equipment,
FMS application,
24 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
1 Introduction to CAD/CAM 4 2 2 08
2 Geometric Modeling 8 4 4 16
Introduction to computer
3 8 4 4 16
numerical Control
4 Part programming 4 2 2 08
5 Industrial Robotics 8 4 4 16
6 Automation 8 4 4 16
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
No
Two assignments on CAD for 2D drafting Interpret the various features in the menu
1 Synthesize various parts or components in an
assembly.
2 Manufacturing one turning and one Turning Prepare CNC program for various jobs.
component on CNC.
3 At least four assignments on part programming Synthesize various parts or components in an
using subroutines for turning and assembly.
milling component.
4 Report writing on visit to industry having CNC Prepare a report of visits
machine.
5 Report writing on visit to industry having robot Prepare a report of visits
Application
6 Report writing on visit to Industry having Prepare a report of visits
Automation in manufacturing
1 Industrial Visits CNC machine, robot Application Automation

in manufacturing
2 Industrial Visits CNC machine, robot Application Automation in
manufacturing
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

25
Total 25

1) Chalk-board.
4) O.H.P
a) Books

P.N.Rao CAD/CAM Principles and Applications
RadhaKrishna P. & Subramanyam CAD/CAM/CIM Wiley
EasternLtd
B.S.Pabla and M.Adithan CNC Machine New age
International(P)Ltd
Groover M.P. & Zimmers Jr Computer Aided design
and
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEM

Course Abbreviation : EMHS

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 -- 125
RATIONALE:
This subject is classified as an Elective course for final semester. The 21st century predicts
revolutionary developments in material Handling Systems. The competitive environment in the industry
makes it necessary to think of newer and advanced handling systems in the industry and it is equally
important to know the safety in material handling. So this course will introduce the principles to be
adapted in the design of material handling system and the various material handling equipments.
OBJECTIVES:
1. Understand relationship with plant layout and productivity.
2. Understand the various material Handling Principles.
3. Recognition of characteristics of materials.
4. Adopt the various safety principles in Material Handling.
5. Classify the various material handling systems suitable with respect to the characteristics of the
material
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Section-I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. Introduction: 02 04
1.1Definition
1.2Overview of material handling
1.3 Relation with plant layout and productivity.
2. Principles of Material Handling: 08 12
2.1 Planning Principle

2.2 Standardization Principle,
2.3 Work Principle,
2.4 Ergonomic Principle,
2.5 Unit Load Principle,
2.6 Space Utilization Principle,
2.7 System Principle,
2.8 Automation Principle,
2.8 Environmental Principle
2.9 Life Cycle Cost Principle.
3. Characteristics of Materials: 04 10
3.1 Unit load concept,

3.2 Unit load design,
3.3 Considerations in material handling system design.
3.4 Criteria for selection of material handling system.
4. Safety in Material Handling: 10 14
4.1 Precautions before moving, handling, and storing materials,

4.2 Potential hazards for workers,
4.3 Precautions before moving materials manually, Precautions before
moving materials mechanically, Precautions to avoid storage hazards,
4.4 Safeguards when stacking materials, Important safety measures basic
safety and health principles, Training and Education.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section-II
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
5. Major Equipment Categories: 08 12
5.1 Classification
5.2 Transport equipments: Conveyers: Chute conveyor, Wheel conveyor,
Roller conveyor, Chain conveyor, Slat conveyor, Flat belt conveyor,
Magnetic belt conveyor, Troughed belt conveyor, Bucket conveyor,
Vibrating conveyor, Screw conveyor, Pneumatic conveyor, Vertical
conveyor, Cart-on-track conveyor, Tow conveyor, Trolley conveyor,
Power-and-free conveyor, Monorail, Sortation conveyor
5.3 Cranes: Jib crane, Bridge crane, Gantry crane, Stacker crane
5.4 Industrial Trucks: Hand truck, Pallet jack,, Walkie stacker, Pallet truck,
Platform truck, Counterbalanced lift truck, Narrow-aisle straddle truck,
Narrow-aisle reach truck, Turret truck, Order picker, Sideloader, Tractor-
trailer, Personnel and burden carrier, Automatic guided vehicle.
6. Positioning Equipments: 04 08
6.1 Manual (no equipment),Lift/tilt/turn table, Dock leveler,
6.2 Ball transfer table, Rotary index table, Parts feeder, Air film device,
6.3 Hoist, Balancer, Manipulator, Industrial robot.
7. Unit Load Formation Equipments: 06 10
7.1Self-restraining (no equipment), Pallets, Skids, Slipsheets, Tote pans,
Pallet-skid boxes, Bins/baskets/racks, Cartons, Bags, Bulk load
containers, Crates, Intermodal containers, Strapping/tape/glue, Shrink-
wrap/ stretch-wrap, Palletizers
8. Storage, Identification & Control Equipments: 06 10
8.1 Storage Equipments: Block stacking (no equipment),Selective pallet
rack, Drive-in rack, Drive-through rack, Push-back rack, Flow-through
rack, Sliding rack, Cantilever rack, Stacking frame, Bin shelving,
Storage drawers, Storage carousel, Vertical lift module, A-frame,
Automatic storage/ retrieval system.
8.2 Identification & Control Equipments: Manual (no equipment),Bar
codes, Radio frequency identification tags, Voice recognition, Magnetic
stripes, Machine vision, Portable data terminals.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Total
No.
I/1 Introduction 04 02 04 04
I/2 Principles of Material Handling 06 04 02 12
I/3 Characteristics of Materials 02 02 02 10
I/4 Safety in Material Handling 04 02 06 14
II/5 Transport equipments 04 06 02 12
II/6 Positioning Equipments 04 04 02 08
II/7 Unit Load Formation Equipments 04 04 02 10
II/8 Storage, Identification & Control 02 02 02 10
Equipments
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
No.
1 Assignment on Identification of need of material Students will able to identify the need of
handling material handling
2 Assignment Study on principles of material Students will able to understand the
handling principles
3 Assignment Study on characteristics of materials Students will able to understand the
characteristics of materials
4 Assignment on Safety Measures in material Students will able to adopt the principles of
handling safety.
5 Assignment on Transport equipments Students will able to select the proper
6 Assignment on Positioning Equipments equipment for material handling amongst
7 Assignment on Unit Load Formation Equipments the various available categories.
8 Assignment on Storage, Identification & Control
Equipments
Included in experiment no.5, 6, 7 and 8.

Proforma-III
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

25
Final Assessment of Term work Examination shall be done as per Pro-forma III.

1. Chalk board
a) Books
01 N. Rudenko Materials Handling Equipment Envee Publishers
02 M.P. Alexandrov Materials Handling Equipment Mie publications
03 Introduction to Ray Siddhartha NITTTR, Kolkata
Materials Handling
04 Materials Handling Raymond A Kulwiec ASME and IMMS
Handbook
b) Websites
www.engineeredhandling.com
www.materialhandlingsystems.net
www.emech.co.in
www.daifukuindia.com
www.storageandretrivalsystems.com
http://www.mhi.org/
http://www.mmh.com/
http://www.thomasnet.com/
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID:
Course Name : FOUNDRY TECHNOLOGY

Course Abbreviation : EFTL
Pre-requisite Course(s) : -Nil-
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 -- 25 125
RATIONALE:
This subject will enable the students to understand principles behind designing a Gating system
to produce a sound casting. This subject includes the considerations of designing a casting on the
basis of systematic study of the various processes in the foundry.
OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn skills of methoding of the casting.
2. To understand the metallurgical consideration of the casting design.
3. To learn the analytical skills of casting defects.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Section-I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
01 GATING 06 12
1.1 Elements of gating system,
1.2 Fundamentals of fluid flow, Bernoulli’s Theorem,
1.3 Design of gating system, Types of gates,
1.4 Slag trap &filters with different cast metals and alloys.
1.5 Methoding of casting, pouring time calculation, Choke area
calculation, Size calculation of pouring basin,
1.6 Sprue, Runner & Ingates, Slag trapping arrangements.
02 RISERING 06 08
2.1 Design of feeding system (Risers),
2.2 Requirement and positioning of risers,
2.3 Range of feeding,
2.4 Feeding efficiency,
2.5 Riser design by Caine’s method,
2.6 NRL method, Modulus method, Feeding distances.
03 SOLIDIFICATION OF CASTING 08 12
3.1 Controlled solidification or directional solidification,
Progressive solidification,
3.2 difference in quality of casting due to directional &
progressive solidification,
3.3 Methods of achieving directional solidification,
3.4 Effect of gating system &risers in achieving directional
solidification,
3.5 Use of chills, padding, exothermic material to achieve
Directional solidification.
04 INTRODUCTION TO CASTING DESIGN 04 08
4.1 Casting design aspects- design for economic moulding,
4.2 Design for overall manufacture,
4.3 Design problem related to sections/design of die casting-
4.4 Design fundamentals.
only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section-II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
05 CASTING DEFECTS ANALYSIS 12 24
5.1 Parameters responsible for casting defects:
Design of casting & pattern, pattern & core box equipment,
moulding and core making equipment, gating and risering,
moulding sand and core sand, melting and metallurgy,
pouring, fettling and heat treatment.
5.2 Casting Defects:
a) Gas defect- pin holes, blow holes, tears.
b) Shrinkage defects- primary and secondary shrinkage,
shrinkage, porosity.
c) Metallurgical defects- hard spots, chilling, inverse chill, open
grain, porosity.
d) Defects related to sand practice and gating system –scab,
cuts and washes, inclusion, swelling,
rough surface, fusion, penetration.
e) Mis run and cold shut.
f) Mechanical defects-crush, drop, run out shift, flashes.
g) Misc-Defects- short pours, leakage etc.
5.3 Analytical approach for trouble shooting-
5.4 Keen observations, importance of records and
documentation, importance of process controls.
5.5 Salvaging castings, impregnation.
06 FOUNDRY MECHANIZATION 06 08
6.1 Mechanical equipments in foundry,
6.2 Sand handling & conveying,
6.3 Moulding machines, mechanical equipment for finishing,
6.4 Foundry layout for small, medium scale & large scale
foundries,
6.5 Safety and Accident prevention.
07 FOUNDRY MANAGEMENT 06 08
7.1 Principles & Functions of Management, incentive
schemes,
7.2 Quality consciousness through quality circle program,
7.3 Production planning & control, value analysis
7.4 Material Management: Integrated approach,
Organizations and functions of purchase and store, Control
of stores, Inventory control, Vendor development-Terms of
contract.
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Section/ Distribution of marks

Total
Topic Name of topic
No.
I/1 Gating 08 02 02 12
I/2 Risering 04 02 02 08
I/3 Solidification of Casting 06 04 02 12

I/4 Introduction to Casting Design 04 02 02 08
II/5 Casting Defects Analysis 16 04 04 24
II/6 Foundry Mechanization 02 02 04 08
II/7 Foundry Management 02 02 04 08
Total >> 42 18 20 80
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
Title of Experiment Skills / Competencies to be developed
No.
Design calculations for methoding data Calculations for sprue, runner ,ingrate
1 for a complicated Grey C.I. casting. areas in C.I. casting
Design calculations for methoding data Calculations for sprue, runner ,ingrate
2
for a complicated Steel casting. areas in steel. casting
Design calculations for methoding data Calculations for sprue,runner ,ingrate
3
for a complicated Aluminum casting. areas in aluminum casting
Drawing a layout for a small, medium To understand the layout of the various
4
scale foundry. casting.
Ro understand the suitable designs for the
5 Guidelines for design of casting.
foundry process.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Visit to a mechanized foundry in local industrial area.
Proforma-I
One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted ..

25

1. Chalk board
4. Item Bank
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Books
Sr.
No.
Fundamentals of Metals and
1. P.C.Mukherji Oxford & IBH Pub. Co
Casting
Metal casting principles and
2. T Ramana Rao New Age International
practices
Directional Solidification of Steel
3. R. Wlodawer Elsevier
Casting
Manufacturing Technology - Tata McGraw-Hill
4. P.N. Rao
Forming, Foundry and Welding Education
Heine, Loper & Tata McGraw-Hill
5. Principles of Metal Casting
Rosenthal Education
b) Websites
1. http://www.nkn.in/efoundry.php
2. http://www.indianfoundry.org/
3. http://www.nifft.ernet.in/
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

Course Abbreviation : ERAC

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Evaluation Scheme:

Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 -- 25 125
RATIONALE:
This subject is classified as an Applied Technology. The 21st century predicts revolutionary
developments in Refrigeration and Air Conditioning. Refrigeration and Air conditioning is one of the
most meaningful job areas for diploma holders in Mechanical Engineering. Considering the wide and
increasing use of Refrigeration and Air conditioning for domestic, commercial and industrial applications
and the challenges put by the use of Refrigeration and air conditioning equipments in existing stage, it is
absolutely necessary that Diploma Engineers should learn this subject. They should know the processes,
equipments, systems of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning with their functioning, maintenance, repairs
and measures to meet the challenges of the near future in this area. The Knowledge of Thermal
Engineering and Power Engineering is a prerequisite for this subject.
OBJECTIVES:
1. Describe types, working principles and construction of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning systems.
2. Calculate performance of refrigeration and air conditioning system.
3. Use various charts and tables used in refrigeration and air conditioning.
4. Enlist properties of refrigerants, their applications and effects on environment.
5. Identify various components and controls used in refrigeration and air conditioning.
6. Describe various air conditioning systems and their applications.
7. Estimate cooling and heating loads.
8. Identify and describe different components of air distribution system.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
Section-I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. BASICS OF REFRIGERATION 04 10
1.1 History and Need of refrigeration.
1.2Methods of refrigeration: Ice refrigeration, Refrigeration by expansion
of air, Refrigeration by throttling of gas, Vapour refrigeration system,
Steam jet refrigeration system, Non conventional methods of
refrigeration like Vortex tube, Pulse tube refrigeration, solar
refrigeration.
1.4 Concept and comparison of heat engine, heat pump and
Refrigerator.
1.5 Unit of refrigeration, C.O.P. and refrigerating effect.
1.6 Major application areas of R.A.C. like domestic, commercial
and industrial.
2. REFRIGERATION CYCLES 08 12
2.1 Reversed Carnot Cycle and its representation on P-V and T-S
diagram.
2.2 Air Refrigeration Cycles: Bell Coleman air refrigerator, it’s
representation on P-V and T-S diagram, Necessity of air craft cooling
and types. (Simple numerical on Reversed Carnot cycle.)
2.3 Vapour Compression Cycle (V.C.C): Principle, components,
Representation on P-H and T-S diagram, effects of wet compression,
dry compression, calculation of COP, Effect of superheating, under
cooling, suction pressure and discharge pressure, Actual V.C.C.,
(simple numerical),
Methods of improving COP(no description).Introduction to multistage
V.C.C., its necessity, advantages.
2.4 Vapour Absorption system: Principle, components and working of
aqua- ammonia system (simple & practical), Li-Br Absorption
System, Electrolux Refrigeration System,
2.5 Comparison of above Refrigeration Cycles.
3. REFRIGERANTS 02 04
3.1 Classification of refrigerants.
3.2 Desirable properties of refrigerants.
3.3 Nomenclature of refrigerants.
3.4 Selection of refrigerant for specific applications.
3.5 Eco-friendly refrigerants like R-134a, hydrocarbon refrigerants
Etc.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
4. EQUIPMENT SELECTION 10 14
4.1 Components of Vapour Compression Refrigeration System
4.2 Compressors: Classification, Construction and working of
open type, hermetic, centrifugal, rotary, screw and scroll
compressor and their applications.
4.3 Condensers: Classification, description of air cooled and water
cooled condensers, comparison and applications. Evaporative
condensers.
4.4 Expansion devices: Types, Capillary tube, automatic and thermostatic
expansion valves and their applications.
4.5 Evaporators and chillers: Classification of evaporators
construction and working of Bare tube, Plate surface, finned, shell and
tube, flooded and dry expansion evaporator, Capacity of evaporator and
their applications, Classification of chillers, Construction and working
of dry expansion Chillers and flooded chillers and their applications.
4.6 High pressure and low pressure cutouts
4.7 Selection criteria for Vapour compression refrigeration system
components for the following applications: Water coolers, ice
plants, cold storage, domestic refrigerator .
Section-II
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
5. PSYCHROMETRY 08 12
5.1 Definition and necessity of air conditioning.
5.2 Properties of Air, Dalton’s law of partial pressure.
5.3 Psychrometric chart.
5.4 Psychrometric processes, Bypass Factor, ADP, concept of SHF, RSHF,
ERSHF, GSHF.
5.5 Adiabatic mixing of Air streams
5.6 Simple numerical using Psychometric chart
5.7 Equipments used for Air- conditioning like humidifier, dehumidifier,
filter, heating and cooling coils.
6. COMFORT CONDITIONS AND COOLING LOAD CALCULATIONS 04 10
6.1 Thermal exchange of body with environment
6.2 Factors affecting human comfort
6.3 Effective temp. and comfort chart
6.4 Components of cooling load- sensible heat gain and latent
heat gain sources.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
7. AIR- CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 06 10
7.1 Classification of A.C. systems
7.2 Industrial and commercial A.C.systems
7.3 Summer, winter and year round A.C.systems
7.4 Central and unitary A.C. systems
7.5 Application areas of A.C. systems
8. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 06 08
8.1 Duct systems: Closed perimeter system, extended plenum
system, radial duct system, duct materials, requirement of
duct materials, losses in ducts
8.2 Fans and Blowers: Types, working of fans and blowers
8.3 Air distribution outlets: Supply outlets, return outlets, grills,
diffusers
8.4 Insulation: Purpose, properties of insulating material, types
of insulating materials, methods of applying insulation.
Section / Distribution of marks (level wise)

Total
Topic Name of topic
No.
I/1 Basics Of Refrigeration 04 02 04 10
I/2 Refrigeration Cycles 06 04 02 12
I/3 Refrigerants 02 02 02 04
I/4 Equipment Selection 04 02 06 14
II/5 Psychrometry 04 06 02 12
II/6 Comfort Conditions And 04 04 02 10
Cooling Load calculations.
II/7 Air- Conditioning Systems 04 04 02 10
II/8 Air Distribution Systems 02 02 02 08
B. TERM WORK
Sr.
No.
1 Trial on water cooler test rig. Identify various components of refrigeration
system and equipment, and calculate
coefficient of performance.
2 Trial on ice plant test rig. Identify various components of refrigeration
system and equipment, and calculate
coefficient of performance.
3 Visit to cold storage. Observe working of Cold Storage.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4 Demonstration of domestic refrigerator in View Identify various components of refrigeration
of construction, operation and controls used. system.
5 Demonstration of various controls like L.P./H.P. Handle various controls used for
cut outs, thermostat, overload protector, solenoid refrigeration and air conditioning plant
valve used in RAC. safety.
6 Identification of components of hermetically Identify various components of hermetically
sealed compressor. sealed compressor.
7 Visit to repair and maintenance workshop in Handle various tools used for refrigeration
view of use of various tools and charging and air conditioning plant maintenance.
procedure.
8 Cooling load calculations for cabin, classrooms, Analyze cooling load based on application.
laboratory, canteen and dairy plant, milk storage, Interpret psychometric chart to find various
small freezers (minimum one). properties of air.
9 Trial on A.C. test rig. Observe working of A.C. test rigs.

10 Visit to central A.C. plant in view of ducting Observe working of central A.C. plant in
system, insulation system and Air distribution view of ducting system, insulation system
system (e.g. frozen food industry/ice- cream and Air distribution system.
industry/mushroom plants/textile industries).
11 Trouble shooting of domestic Repair and Maintenance of domestic
refrigerator/window air- Conditioner. refrigerator/window air- Conditioner.
Included in experiment no. 3, 7 & 10.

Every practical assignment shall be assessed for 25 marks as per criteria. given in
Proforma-I

in Proforma-I


Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1. Chalk board
a) Books
01 R.S.Khurmi Refrigeration and Air S.Chand and Co
Conditioning
02 Arrora and Domkundwar Refrigeration and Air Dhanpat Rai and Sons
Conditioning
03 Manohar Prasad Refrigeration and Air New Age Publications
Conditioning
04 P.N.Ananthanarayanan Refrigeration and Air Tata McGraw Hill
Conditioning
05 Roy Dossat Principles of Refrigeration Pearson Education
06 Edwin P. Anderson Commercial Refrigeration Taraporevala Sons &
Co
b) Websites
http://www.alephzero.co.uk
http://www.brighthubengineering.com
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Duct_(HVAC)
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : AUTOMOBILE ENGNEERING

Course Abbreviation : EAEG

Teaching Scheme:

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:
Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 -- 25 125
RATIONALE :
Automobile Engineering a technology subject helps to meet the need of automotive industry for
specialized technicians. Due to liberalization of industrial policy in India, major global players in
Automobile sector have launched their product in India. It is a key driver of countries economy. It has
major employment potential for diploma holders. Automobile servicing in particular offers good job
opportunities at village, town and city level. Thus helps to generate self employment in country.
OBJECTIVES :
1. Automotive market in India.
2. Identify various automotive systems & subsystems.
3. Explain working & construction of various automotive systems & subsystems.
4. Carryout preventive maintenance & performance testing of vehicle.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
A. THEORY :
SECTION-I
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics / Sub-topic Evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. INTRODUCTION OF AUTOMOBILE 04 06
1.1 Classification of automobiles
1.2 Vehicle layout & types
1.3 Body construction: Types & Nomenclature of car body
1.4 Introduction to aerodynamic body shapes
1.5 Safety feature in car Adaptive cruise control, Forward collision avoidance
system, Autonomous braking, Adaptive headlights, Backup camera, Reverse
backup sensors, Side view assist, Parking assist
2. AUTOMOBILE TRANSMISSION 12 20
2.1 Clutch: Necessity, construction & working of coil spring & diaphragm
spring type clutch.
2.2 Gear Box: Tractive effort and tractive resistance,
Types of G.B construction & working of constant mesh G.B., &
synchromesh G.B., Epicyclic G.B., Torque converter,
Overdrive, Transfer case
2.3 Final drive: Necessity, construction & working of Propeller
shaft & differential.
2.4 Axle-Type of rear axles, front axles & their applications
3. CONTROL SYSTEMS 08 14
3.1Steering system- Requirement of steering system.
Construction and working of steering linkage.
Steering gear box- construction & working of rack and
Pinion, recirculating ball type gearbox.
Introduction to Power steering,
3.2 Steering geometry: Camber, caster, toe-in, toe-out, Kingpin
inclination & their effects.
3.3 Brake system: Construction & working of hydraulic &
Pneumatic brakes. Comparison of disc & drum
brake.
TOTAL 24 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics/Sub-topic Evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, 08 12
4.1 Necessity & classification of suspension system.
4.2 Working & construction of Leaf spring, rigid axle
suspension.
4.3 Introduction to air suspension
4.4 Construction & working of McPherson & wishbone,
trailing link suspensions.
4.5 Construction & working of telescopic shock absorbers.
WHEELS AND TYRES 08 12

5 5.1 Construction & working of spoked wheel, disc wheel &
light alloy cast wheel.
5.2 Types of rims, their construction & working.
5.3 Construction, working & comparison of radial, cross- ply
and tube, tubeless tyre & tyre specifications
5.4 Factors affecting tyre life
5.5 Wheel Alignment and Balancing
AUTOMOBILE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 08 16

6 6.1 Battery: Working, Construction & Rating of battery.
6.2 Ignition system: Construction & Working of electronic and
CDI ignition system.
6.3 Starting system: Construction & Working of starting motor.
6.4 Charging system: Construction & Working of alternator
6.5 Wiring system: Harnessing & colors codes.
6.6 Lighting system: Head light, Tail light, Indicator light &
their circuits.
6.7 Gauges: Construction & Working of Fuel level gauge, oil
gauge and water temperature gauge.
6.8 Use of microprocessor in automobile control systems
TOTAL 24 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
I/1. Introduction of 04 02 - 06
Automobile
I/2. Automobile Transmission 04 08 08 20
system.
I/3. Control System. 02 06 06 14
II/4. Suspension System 04 04 04 12
II/5. Wheels and Tyres. 04 04 04 12
II/6. Automobile Electrical 04 06 06 16
System
Total 80
B. TERM WORK
The following practical exercises shall be conducted as Term Work as detailed in practical sessions of
batches of about 22 students:
Sr.
No.
1. Introduction & demonstration of use of various

Able to select tools and equipments,
tools
understand proper handling of tools.
Instruments & equipments used in Automobile
service station.
2. Carrying out preventive maintenance of four Able to use service manual .adopt the
wheeler/two wheeler as per manufacturer’s recommended procedure for maintenance,
specifications. testing etc.
3. Demonstration of single plate coil spring & Able to observe various components of clutch,
diaphragm spring type clutch. Construction of clutch. able to inspect &
trouble shoot the problem in clutch.
4. Demonstration of synchromesh gear box. Able to observe various components of

synchromesh gear box. Inspect the gear box
for probable troubles & find remedy on it.
5. Demonstration of differential gear box. Able to observe various components of

differential, understand function of each
components, their constructional details.
6. Demonstration of rack & pinion steering box. Able to understand function & working of
steering box.
7. Demonstration of hydraulic brake system. Able to understand function & working of

brake system.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Visit to four wheeler service station. Understand sequence of service operations

carried out in service station.
9. Mini project- Able to gain latest knowledge in this subject.

• Title-Advances in Automobile Engg. such
as
MPFI,TPFC,VTEC, Use of
microprocessor.
• Automobile fuels such as ethanol,
biodiesel,
Battery, solar, etc.
a) As per practical no. 2 expert lectures by prominent personalities from industries.
b) As per practical no. 8 an Industrial visit of students to service station.

2 Attendance 05
3 Participation 05
4 Understanding 05
5 Representation 05
Total 25
One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 25 marks shall be conducted as per criteria given in
Proforma
c) Term-end Oral Examination :

1 Attendance 08

3 Participation 05
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

5. Time bound assignments

1. Chalk board
2. Demonstrative kits
3. Demonstrative charts
6. Item Bank
a) Books
Sr. Title Author name
No.
1) Automobile engg. vol I & II Kirpal singh
2) Automobile engg. GBS Narang.
3) Automotive technology H.M. Sethi.
4) Automotive mechanics. Crouse, Anglin.
5) The Motor Vehicle Newton Garrett.
6) Automobile Engg. K.K.Jain & R.B. Asthana.
b) Websites
1) http://chemwiki.ucdavis.edu
2) http://en.wikipedia.org
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS

Course Abbreviation : EIHP

Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:

Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 -- 25 125
RATIONALE :
Oil Hydraulic systems & pneumatic systems are widely used in all fields of engineering as clean source
of motive power. Low cost automation systems with the use of pneumatics have become popular as
manufacturing aids. Diploma engineers come across such systems in all segments of industries. Hence the
subject will give the students basic skills and knowledge, which will be directly needed in the industrial
environment.
OBJECTIVES :
Student will be able
1) Identify various components of hydraulic & pneumatic systems.
2) Know the working principle of various components used for hydraulic & pneumatic systems.
3) Select appropriate components required for simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits.
4) List probable causes of faults or defects in the components of hydraulic & pneumatic circuits.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. 04 06
INTRODUCTION TO OIL HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
1.1 Practical applications of hydraulic systems
1.2 General layout of oil hydraulic systems
1.3 Merits and limitations of oil hydraulic systems
1.4 Oils for hydraulic systems, their properties.
1.5 Selection of fluids, effect of temperature and pressure on hydraulic
fluid
2. 04 06
PUMPS FOR HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
2.1Pumps:Vane pump, gear pump, Gerotor pump,
screw pump, piston pump
(Types, construction, working principle, symbols)
2.2Selection of pump for power transmission, pump performance.
3. VALVES 04 08
3.1 Pressure control valves: Pressure relief valve, Pressure reducing,
Pressure unload ,counter balance valve.
3.2 Direction control valves: Poppet valve, spool valve, 3/2, 4/2, 5/3
D.C. valves with pilot, manually &
solenoid operated ,Sequence valves.
3.3 Flow control valves: Pressure compensated, non pressure compensated
flow control valve.
(Types, construction, working principle and symbols of all components)
4. ACTUATORS 04 06
4.1 Actuator: Construction, working and symbols of
4.2 Rotary Actuators: Hydraulic motors
4.3 Linear Actuators: Cylinders- Single acting, Double acting
5. ACCESSORIES 04 06
5.1 Accessories: Pipes, Hoses, fittings, Oil filters, Seals and gaskets,
Accumulators.
(Types, construction, working principle and symbols of all components)
6. 04 08
HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS
6.1 Meter in, Meter out circuits,
6.2 Bleed off circuit
6.3 Sequencing circuit,
6.4 Hydraulic circuits for Milling machine, Shaper machine
6.5 Motion synchronization circuit.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
7 04 06
INTRODUCTION TO PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS
7.1 Applications of pneumatic system
7.2 General layout of pneumatic system
7.3 Merits and limitations of pneumatic systems
8 06 10
COMPONENTS OF PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
8.1 Compressor: Reciprocating & Rotary compressors
8.2 Control Valves: Pressure regulating valves, Flow Control
Valves, Direction Control, Dual pressure valve ,
Shuttle valve, Quick exhaust valve, Time delay valve.
9 ACTUATORS 05 08
9.1 Actuators,
9.2 Rotary: Air motors, construction, working principle
9.3 Linear: Cylinders- Types, construction & working principle
10 ACCESSORIES 04 06
10.1 Accessories: Pipes, Hoses, Fittings, FRL unit(Types,
construction, working principle and symbols of all
components)
11 05 10
INDUSTRIAL PNEUMATIC CIRCUITS
11.1 Use of Logic functions - OR, AND,NOR,NAND, NOT, functions in
pneumatic applications , Practical examples involving the use of logic
function.
11.2 Speed control circuits , Sequencing circuits ,Time dependent controls-
Principle , Construction ,and practical applications.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Total
marks
no. Knowledge Comprehension Application
2 2 2 6
I/1 Introduction to oil hydraulic
system.
I/2 2 2 2 6
pumps for hydraulic system.
I/3 valves 2 2 4 8
I/4 Actuators. 2 2 2 6
I/5 Accessories. 2 2 2 6
I/6 Hydraulic circuit 2 2 4 8
Introduction to pneumatic 2 2 2 6
II/7
system.
4 4 2 10
II/8 Components of pneumatic
system.
II/9 Actuators. 2 2 4 8
II/10 Accessories. 2 2 2 6
II/11 Pneumatic circuit. 4 2 4 10
marks only.
B. TERM WORK

Sr.
No.
1 ISO symbols for Hydraulic System elements. Identification of various Hydraulic System
elements.
2 Study of various Hydraulic System elements. Use and working of Hydraulic System
elements.
3 Meter In and Meter Out circuit. Make connections as per circuit diagram.
4 Bleed Off Circuit. Make connections as per circuit diagram.
5 Sequencing Circuit. Make connections as per circuit diagram.
6 ISO symbols for Pneumatic System elements. Identification of various Pneumatic System
elements.
7 Study of various Pneumatic System elements. Use and working of Pneumatic System
elements.
8 Speed control circuits. Make connections as per circuit diagram.
9 Sequencing Circuit. Make connections as per circuit diagram.
10 Care and Maintenance of Hydraulic and Servicing of various Hydraulic and
Pneumatic System elements. Pneumatic System elements.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1. Industrial visit to study automation by means Industrial situations
of hydraulic and pneumatic system such as
LPG bottling plant , Hydraulic press , Injection
moulding machine

No.
Total 25
below:
No.
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________


1. Chalk board
4. Computer
5. Question Bank
REFERENCE MATERIAL
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. S.R. Majumadar Oil Hydraulic Systems Tata McGraw Hill
2. S.R. Majumadar Pneumatic Systems Tata McGraw Hill
3. J.J. Pippenger Industrial Hydraulics Tata McGraw Hill
4. Stewart Hydraulics & Pneumatics Taraporewala Publication
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course ID
Course Name : TOOL ENGINEERING.

Course code : MEE 511
Course Abbreviation : ETLG
Pre- requisite Courses (s) : MEE 306 MACHINE TOOLS

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:

Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 -- 25 125
Rationale:
This subject is classified as technology subject. It is intended to impart concepts,
principles and procedures of tool engineering to the students so that they can understand the
procedure of tool design to achieve highest productivity and perform duties as a technician in tool
room, shop floor, quality control. The student can work as supervisor in plastic molding shop and as a
sales engineer in tool industry.
Objective:
The students will be able to,
1) Select cutting tools and its material using data book and manufacturer’s catalogue.
2) Estimate tool wear and tool life.
3) Use press tools and dies effectively.
4) Design strip layout for given component.
5) Decide appropriate cutting fluid for machining process improvement.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
01. METAL CUTTING 10 16

1.1 Mechanics of Metal cutting: requirements of tools, cutting forces –
1.2 Types of chips, chip thickness ratio, shear angle
(Simple Numericals)
1.3 Types of metal cutting process: Orthogonal, oblique and form cutting.
1.4 Cutting fluids: Types, characteristics and applications.
02. TOOL WEAR 02 06

2.1 Tool wear, Types of wear,
2.2 Tool life, Tool life equations.
2.3 Machinability: definition, factors affecting machinability,
machinability index.
03. TOOL MATERIALS 06 10

3.1 Types, characteristics, applications.
3.2 Heat treatment of tool steels,
3.3 Specification of carbide tips, Types of ceramic coatings.
04. CUTTING TOOL GEOMETRY 06 08

4.1 Single point cutting tool, drills , reamers, milling cutters.
TOTAL 24 40
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION – II
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
5. PRESS TOOLS
5.1 Presses: Introduction, Types, Specification. 02 04
6. TYPES OF DIES AND CONSTRUCTION

6.1 Simple Die, Compound Die, Progressive Die, Combination 04 08
die.
6.2 Punch & die mountings, pilots, strippers, miss feed detectors,
Pressure Pads, Knock outs, stock guide, Feed-Stop, guide
bush, guide pins.
7. DIE DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS
7.1 Die Operations: blanking, piercing, shearing, cropping, 06 10
notching, lancing, coining, embossing, stamping, curling,
drawing, bending, forming.
7.2 Die set, Die shoe, Die area
7.3 Calculation of clearances on die and punch for blanking and
piercing dies, Strip layout
7.4 Calculation of material utilization factor.
8. FORMING DIES
8.1 Bending: methods, Bending Dies, bend allowance, spring 08 12
back, spanking, bending pressure, pressure pads, and
development of blank length.
8.2 Drawing: operations, Metal flow during drawing.
8.3 Calculation of Drawing blank size, variables affecting metal
flow during drawing,
8.4 Single action and double action dies, combination dies.
9. FUNDAMENTALS OF OTHER TOOLS

04 06
9.1 Constructional features of: Pressure Die casting dies, metal
extrusion dies, injection moulding dies, forging dies, plastic
extrusion dies.
TOTAL 24 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
1 Metal cutting 04 04 08 16
2 Tool wear 03 03 - 06
3 Tool material 03 03 04 10
4 Cutting tool geometry 02 02 04 08
5 Press tools 02 02 - 04
6 Types of dies and construction 02 03 03 08
7 Die design fundamentals 04 04 02 10
8 Forming dies 04 04 04 12
9 Fundamentals of other tools 02 02 02 06
marks only.
B. TERM WORK.
Practical Exercises and related skills developed.
Sr.
No.
1. Report on Visit to press shop for study of Understand working and construction of different
presses. press and can differentiate between types of press.
2. Sketches of Combination Die, Progressive Understand different types of dies, their
Die, and Compound die, Inverted Die, constructional features and working principal.
Drawing Die, and Bending Die.
3. Drawing of strip layout of simple Understand and able to select suitable layout for a
component (Different component for every given work piece and calculation of material
student) , and calculation of material utilization factor.
utilization factor.
4. Sketches of Injection Moulding die, Understand working principal and construction of
Pressure die-casting die, forging die. different types of injection molding dies.
5. Two assignments on calculation of Cutting Understand calculation of cutting forces and shear
forces and shear angle based on Merchant’s angle based on Merchant’s angle.
circle. Understand tool angle of various cutting tools and
there impotence.
6. One assignment each on development of Understand and able to calculate blank length and
blank length for bending operation and blank diameter of a given work piece. Design and
single stroke drawing operation. draw drawing die for a given component.
7. One assignment on designation of carbide Understand designation of different carbide tools.
tools.
8. Sketches of different types of cutting tools Understand tool angles of various cutting tools
showing details of tool angles. and their importance.
9. One assignment on types of Punches and Able to select suitable punch, pilot and stripper for
pilots, strippers a given application
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1
Industrial Visit Press Tools
2
Industrial Visit Die design fundamentals, Forming dies
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK:
Sr. No Criteria Marks allotted

25
1) Chalk-board.
4) LCD Projector
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE MATERIAL:
a) Books :
Sr. No. Author Title Publisher
01 Donaldson Anglin Tool Design Tata Mc Graw Hill

02 P. C. Sharma A Text Book OF Production S Chand & Co.
Engineering
03 H. M. T. Production Technology Tata Mc Graw Hill
04 R. K. Jain Production Technology Khanna Publishers
05 A.S.T.M.E. Fundamental of tool design. Prentice-Hall of
India.
06 M.H.A. Kempster Introduction to Jig and Tool Viva publ.
Design
07 P. H. Joshi Jigs and Fixtures Tata Mc Graw Hill
08 P. H. Joshi Press Tools Tata Mc Graw Hill
b) Website:
1. www.swikuo.com
2. www.workshopmachiery.com
3. www.thomasnet.com
4. www.dmscncrouters.com/
5. www.enterprisemachinery.co.uk
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Course ID
Course Name : WELDING TECHNOLOGY.

Course Abbreviation : EWLT
Pre- requisite Courses (s) : Nil
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:

Mode of Oral
Theory Total
Examination
(External))
Term End As per
(03 hours) III
each marks
Marks 20 -- 80 -- 25 125
Rationale:
As the standard of living continues to improve in most fabrication revolution using both
common and more exotic processes, has been created. The exotic type of metal fabrication especially
requires use of the most modern welding equipments and techniques.
Objectives:
1) Understanding theories of welding, apply these theories to the process.

2 Use of various welding processes to the fabrication of goods.
3) To understand the operations theories and principles of various welding methods.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT
Theory
Sr. Topics Teaching
evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
1. SHIELD ARC WELDING 14 24
1.1 Introduction.
1.2 Electrodes.
1.3 Equipments operation submerged arc welding.
1.4 Carbon arc welding.
1.5 Applications
2. GAS SHIELD ARC WELDING 10 16
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Equipments
2.3 TIG operation
2.4 MIG operation.
2.5 Applications.
Total 24 40
marks only.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION - II
Theory
Sr. Teaching
Topics evaluation
No. (Hours)
Marks
3. GAS WELDING. 12 20
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Equipments
3.3 Operation
3.4 Joining Processes.
3.5 Oxygen Fuel Cutting.
3.6 Application.
4. OTHER WELDING PROCESSES 12 20

4.1 Plasma Arc Welding.
4.2 Resistance Welding.
4.3 Electron Welding.
4.4 Laser Welding.
4.5 Thermit Welding.
4.6 Metal Flame Spraying.
4.7 Solid State Bonding.
4.8 Application Of Each Type.
Total 24 40
marks only.

Name of topic
1 Shield arc welding. 07 08 10 25
Gas shield arc welding.

2 04 05 06 15
Gas Welding.
3 06 06 08 20
Other Welding Processes.

4 06 06 08 20
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
marks only.
B. TERM WORK.
Practical Exercises and related skills developed.
Sr.
No.
1 Demonstration of Shield arc welding.
2 Demonstration of Submerged Arc Welding. The ability to know the process and equipment.
3 Demonstration of Carbon Arc Welding. The problems, limitations and applications of
4 Demonstration of Gas Shield arc welding. the process.
5 Demonstration of Gas welding.
6 Demonstration of Gas Cutting.
7 Study of other welding processes.
8 Welding Symbols. To know the welding drawings.
9 Study of Care and Safety in welding Safety of the operator is improved.
operation.
10 Industrial visit to fabrication workshop for To understand the practical difficulties in the
Arc welding and Gas welding Gas welding. operation.
11 Industrial visit for other welding processes.

1
Industrial Visit Gas Welding.
2 Gas shield arc welding.
Industrial Visit
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA FOR TERM WORK:

Sr. No Criteria Marks allotted
Total 25
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES
Instructional methods

4) Industrial Visits
1) Chalk-board.
4) LCD Projector
REFERENCE MATERIAL:
a) Books :
Sr.
Author Name of the Book Publication
No.
1 Richard L. Little Welding & Welding Tata McGraw-Hill.
Technology
2 Mohler Rudy Practical Welding Industrial Press Inc.
b) Website
i)www.swikuo.com
ii)www.workshopmachinery.com
iii)www.sodick.com/
iv)www.terprisemachinery.co.uk/
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSES OF
OTHER
DEPARTMENTS
TAUGHT BY
MECHANICAL
DEPARTMENT
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : ENGINEERING GRAPHICS (EE/IE/ET/IT)
Course Abbreviation : EEGR

Teaching Scheme:
Theory 02
06
Practical 04
Evaluation Scheme:

Mode of Practical
Theory Total
Examination
(External))
i.25 marks for
two tests of 20 Theory Exam Proforma-I
marks each (04 hours) (2 Hours
marks
Duration)
Marks ---- -- -- 25 50 75
RATIONALE :
Engineering Graphics is one of the ways of communication among engineering

professionals. It describes scientific facts, concepts, principles and techniques of drawing in any
engineering fields to express the ideas and conveying the instructions which are use for carrying out tasks
at work place. This preliminary course aims at building a foundation for the further course in drawing
and other allied subjects. This subject is useful in developing, drafting and sketching skills of students. So
it is necessary to all programmes.
OBJECTIVES :
1. Solve problems on geometrical constructions.
2. Draw orthographic projections of different objects.
4. Draw simple geometrical figures using CAD software package.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A.THEORY : SECTION -I
Practical
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1.2 Standard sizes of drawing sheets
1.4 Convention of lines and their applications
Diagonal scale.
1.7 Introduction to CAD software (Basic commands
like Draw, modify).
1.8 Advantages of CAD,
1.9. Geometrical constructions
Only
3.1 Projection of Planes of Circular , Square,
Triangular, Rectangular , Pentagonal , Hexagonal
SECTION -II
4. Orthographic Projection 06
4.1 Introduction of Orthographic
Projection-First and Third angle Projection Method
4.2 Conversion of Pictorial view into
Orthographic Views.
(First angle Projection Method Only) 16
4.3 Dimensioning Technique as per SP-46
5. Sectional Views. 04
5.1 Types of sections
5.2 Conversion of pictorial view into sectional
Orthographic views. (First Angle Projection Method )
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Practical
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
6. Isometric Projection 06 12
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Isometric Axis
6.3 Isometric scale
6.4 Drawing of Isometric view and Isometric Projection.
6.5 Conversion of Orthographic Views into
Isometric view/projection(Including rectangular,
cylindrical objects, representation of slots on
sloping as well as plane surfaces)

Name of topic
Introduction To
1 04 02 04 10
Engineering Drawing
2 02 02 02 06
Lines
3 Projection of Planes 02 02 02 06
4 Orthographic projection
16
5 Sectional Views. 04 04 08
6 Isometric Projection 04 02 06 12
TOTAL 16 12 22 50
Practical:
List of Practical:
No. developed
Projections of line
4 Orthographic projection (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability to
draw Orthographic projection
5 Sectional Views. (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
sectional views
6 Isometric Projection (2 Sheet) To develop ability to draw
Isometric views of two objects – 1 sheet Isometric projection
Isometric Projections of two objects – 1 sheet
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Continuous Assessment of Drawing Practical

No.
1 Attendance 05
2 Preparedness 05
Total 25
One mid-term Progressive Skill Test of 50 marks shall be conducted as per criteria given below:

No.
Total 50

1. Chalk board
5. Question Bank
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES:
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. N. D. Bhatt Engineering Drawing Charotar Publishing House 2010
B.C.Rana
b )Web References :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : ENGINEERING DRAWING -1 (SM)

Course Code : CCE 117
Course Abbreviation : EEDC
Teaching Scheme:

Theory 02
06
Practical 04
Evaluation Scheme:

Mode of Practical
Theory Total
Examination
(Internal))
i.25 marks for
two tests of 20 Theory Exam Proforma-II
marks each (04 hours) (2 Hours
marks
Duration)
Marks ---- -- -- 25 50 75
RATIONALE :
Engineering Graphics is the language of Engineers. The concept of Engineering Graphics

is used to develop, express the ideas and convey the instructions which are used to carry out jobs
in the field of Engineering. The course illustrates the techniques of graphics in actual practice. This
preliminary course aims at building a foundation for the further course in drawing and other allied
subjects. This subject is useful in developing, drafting and sketching skills of students.
OBJECTIVES :
1. Draw different Engineering curves and know their applications.
2. Draw Orthographic projections of different objects.
4. Draw simple geometrical figures using CAD software package.
5. Solve problems on Projection of Lines and Planes.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
A. THEORY :
SECTION -I
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1.2 Standard sizes of drawing sheets (ISO-A series)
Convention of lines and their applications.
Diagonal scale.
1.6 Introduction to CAD software (Basic commands like
Draw, modify). Advantages of CAD,
1.7 Geometrical Constructions
1.8 Draw a basic 2-D geometrical entities using CAD.
2 Engineering Curves & Loci of Points. 07 20
2.1 Draw Conic curves, Involutes, Cycloid and their
applications
2.2 Draw Helix, Spiral and loci of points from given data.
2.3 Conic Section
2.4 Draw an Ellipse by Arc’s of circle method &
Concentric circle method.
2.5 Draw a Parabola by Directrix focus method
& Rectangle method
2.6 Draw a Hyperbola by Transverse Axis focus
Method & Rectangular Hyperbola (Inclined axes).
2.7 Engineering curves
To draw Involutes of circle & pentagon,
To draw Epicycloids and Hypocycloid
To draw Helix & Archemedian spiral.
Loci of points on any link of
(II) Four bar mechanism and (II) Single slider crank
mechanism with given Specifications.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)

Only
3.3 Projection of Line inclined to Both Reference Plane
SECTION –II
a. Projection of Planes of Circular , Square,
Triangular,Rectangular , Pentagonal , Hexagonal
5 Projection Of Solids 05 16
5.1 Projection of Solids Like Cube, Prisms, Pyramids,
Cone, Cylinders and Tetrahedron.
(Axis of Solids inclined to one reference plane and
Parallel to other Reference Plane)
6 Sections Of Solids 06 16
6.1 Sections Of Solids Like Cube, Prisms, Pyramids,
Cone and Cylinder .
(Axis of Solids being vertical and Section plane
inclined to one reference plane and perpendicular
to other.)
Total 32 80
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
Introduction To
1 04 02 02 08
Engineering Drawing
Engineering curves & Loci
2 of Points. 04 04 12 20

3 Lines 04 04 04 12
Projection of Planes
4 02 04 02 08
Projection of Solids
5 04 04 08 16
Sections of Solids
6 02 12 02 16
TOTAL 20 30 30 80
Practical:
List of Practical:
No. developed
2 Engineering curves &Loci of points (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in

conics
Projections of line
5 Projections of Solids (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
Projections of Solids
6 Sections of Solids (1 Sheet) To develop drawing ability in
Sections of Solids
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Continuous Assessment of Drawing Practical

No.
1 Attendance 05
2 Preparedness 05
Total 25

No.
Total 50

1. Chalk board
5. Question Bank
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. N. D. Bhatt Engineering Drawing Charotar Publishing House 2010
B.C.Rana
b)Web References :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Code : EEE 101
Course Abbreviation : EBME
Teaching Scheme :

Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:

Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Examination (Internal))
i.25 marks for
Average of Term End -
marks
Marks 20 -- 80 50 - 150
* Assessment as per Pro-forma - III
RATIONALE :
Curriculam of Basics of Mechanical Engg .has been designed specially to Diploma Electrical Engg
students so as to acquire basic fundamental principles of Mechanical Engg. Awareness and understanding
of basic facts and findings with practical approach towards Mech Engg discipline creates an additional
interest and motivation to students for further higher level education. The present syllabus aims to
develop basic knowledge of discipline and provide a guideline for other courses in Mech.Engg.discipline.
OBJECTIVES : Student will be able
1. To understand and analyses various parts and processes in I.C.Engine .
2. To understand various parts of Solar devices and their functions.
3. To understand and run Centrifugal and Reciprocating Pumps.
4. To understand various mechanical Drives .
5. To understand various parts of compressor, their functions and working.
6. To identify various components of power plant and their functions.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT :
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
1 Internal Combustion Engine 10 16
1.1Intoduction and Classification of I.C.engine
1.2 I.C.Engine parts and their functions
1.3Working of four stroke and two stroke engines
1.4 Comparison between Petrol and Diesel Engine
1.5 Various Systems-Air supply, Fuel supply, Ignition,
Lubrication ,Exhaust and Cooling system
2 Steam generation 8 16
2.1 Classification of boilers, construction and working of
common boilers (Lancashire boiler and Babcock &
Wilcox boiler)
2.2 Accessories and mountings: Function and locations of
Accessories and mountings on boiler
2.3 Study of high-pressure boilers like Lamont boiler
Loeffler boiler, Benson boiler and volex boiler
2.4 Boiler draught, natural and artificial draught, relative
merits and demerit
3 CONDENSERS & COOLING TOWERS 6 8
3.1 Function and types of condensers
3.2 Elements of condensing plant
3.3 Classification of Jet and surface condensers
3.4 Dalton law of partial pressure and it’s application
3.5 Cooling towers and spray ponds: types, construction &
Working
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-II
Theory
Sr. Lectures
No. (Hours)
(Marks)
4 Introduction to Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 6 8
System
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Units of Refrigeration
4.3 Refrigerator and heat Pump
4.4 Vapour Compression refrigeration system
4.5 Vapour Absorption refrigeration system
4.6 Important Refrigerents and Required properties
4.7Concept of Air Conditioning
4.8Psychrometric terms and Psychrometric charts
4.9 Air Conditioning system-Summer and Winter
5 Pumps, Compressor and Turbine 8 16
5.1 Pumps-Types-Centrifugal and Reciprocating Pumps
5.2 Compressor- Types- Centrifugal, Reciprocating,Axial
5.3 Hydraulic turbine- Types - Pelton, Francis and Kaplan
Steam Turbine-Types-Impulse and Reaction
6 Introduction to Industrial Hydraulics and Pneumatics. 10 16

6.1Basic components of hydraulic & pneumatic system.
6.2 Control elements for pressure, flow and direction.
6.3 Hydraulic power pack, FRL unit,
6.4 Meter in and Meter out circuits,
6.5 Sensors, Actuators, Applications.
Total
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of topic
Internal Combustion
1 Engine 04 06 06 16
Steam Generation
2 04 06 06 16
Condensers and Cooling
3 Tower 02 02 04 08
Introduction to
Refrigeration and Air
4 02 02 04 08
Conditioning System
Pumps ,Compressor and

5 Turbine 04 06 06 16
Introduction to Industrial
6 Hydraulics and 04 06 06 16
Pneumatics
Total >> 20 28 32 80
B. TERM WORK
No. developed
1. Demonstration of Two stroke and Four stroke Petrol Understanding and Analysis of
and Diesel engines with the help of models. various parts and processes in
I.C.engine
2. Demonstration of Vapour compression refrigeration Analysis of various parts and
system processes in Vapour compression
refrigeration system
3. Demonstration of Solar heating equipments Ability to understand various parts of
solar devices and their functions
4. Demonstration of Centrifugal and Reciprocating Ability to run Centrifugal and
Pumps Reciprocating Pumps and to
understand various parts of pumps
and their function
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Demonstration of Compressor Ability to run compressor and to
understand various parts and their
functions
6. Demonstration of Mechanical Drives Ability to understand various
mechanical Drives, their parts and
functions
7. Demonstration of I.C.Engine Ability to run S.I and C.I engine, to
understand various parts of engine
and their functions
8. Industrial visit to Steam power plant / Diesel power Identify various components of power
plant / Hydro Electric power plant plant and their functions

1. Industrial visit to Steam power plant / Diesel power Industrial situations
plant / Hydro power plant

No.
Total 25
No.
Total 50
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1. Chalk board
4. Computer
5. Question Bank
REFERENCE MATERIAL
a) Books
Sr.
No.
1. Dr.S.P Sukhatme Solar Energy Tata McGraw Hill Publication
2. G.D Rai Non-Conventional Energy sources Khanna Publication
3. Arora and Power plant Egineering Dhanpat rai and Sons
Domkondwar
4. Patel and Elements of Heat Engine Acharya Publication
Karamchandani (Vol.I,II,III)
5. P.K.Nag Engineering Thermodynamics Tata McGraw Hill Publication
6. P.L.Ballaney A course in Thermal Engineering Dhanpatrai and son company
7. Arora and Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Dhanpat rai and Sons
Domkondwar
8. P.N.Ananthanarayanan Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Tata McGraw Hill Publication
9. Dossat Principles of Refrigeration Pearson Education
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE ID :
Course Name : MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Code : MTE 309
Course Abbreviation : EMEC

Teaching Scheme :
Theory 03
05
Practical 02
Evaluation Scheme:

Mode of
Theory Oral Total
Examination (Internal))
i.25 marks for
Average of Term End -
marks
Marks 20 -- 80 25 - 125
RATIONALE:
Metallurgy Engineers often come across various engineering components for selection of
materials and manufacturing processes .They are required to know basic principles of working of
different machines and equipments. They are also required to look after the maintenance of the machines.
He should know the reading of pattern drawings, various symbols and assembly and details.
The basic knowledge of I.C. Engines, Heat Transfer and Fluid mechanics is essential. The
understanding of Industrial hydraulics and pneumatics is essential for Industrial automation.
OBJECTIVES:
The students will be able:
1. To understand working principles of heat transfer.
2. To understand the working principal of compressor and pumps etc.
3. To use the instruments for measuring pressure, velocity, flow.
4. To know the basic knowledge about the I.C. Engines.
5. To know the basics of thermodynamics and gas processes.
6. To understand the properties of fluids. To get introduction to Industrial Hydraulics
Conduct all the tests and calculate the values of different properties.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENT:
Sr. Topics Teaching

Marks
Advance Sectional Orthographic view
1. 06 10
Crankshaft, Engine body, Camshaft, Flanged coupling,
Pump body.
Types Of Sections
2 02 04
Conventional, revolved, removed, partial, offset,
flywheel , pulley, gear.
I.C. Engines
3 06 12
Classification, Different parts, Materials used,
Working principle of two stroke, four stroke, Petrol,
Diesel engines and difference between them.
Heat Transfer
4 10 14
Modes of heat transfer,
Calculations of heat transfer for given condition,
Conduction, Convection and Radiation, Insulation,
Types of insulation, Applications related to Metallurgy,
Concept of Black body.
(Simple Numerical)
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
THEORY :
SECTION-II
Sr. Topics Teaching

Marks
5 Properties of Fluids
04 10
Fluid & its Properties- Mass density, Sp. wt, Sp. Volume, Sp.
Gravity, Viscosity, Vapor pressure,
Compressibility and Surface tension.
Measurement of Pressure, Discharge and Velocity.
(Simple Numerical)
6 Power Transmission Device 04 10
Rope drive, Pulley Belt Transmission & types, Chain drive,

Gear drive, Advantages, Disadvantages & applications.
7 Pumps and Compressors 06 08
Classification, Construction and Working, applications.
8 Introduction to Industrial Hydraulics and Pneumatics. 10 12
Basic components of hydraulic & pneumatic system. Control

elements for pressure, flow and direction.
Hydraulic power pack, FRL unit, Meter in and Meter out
circuits, Sensors, Actuators, Applications.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sr. Name of Topic Distribution of Marks Total

No. Knowledge Comprehension Application
1 Advanced Sectional Orthographic 02 04 04 10
View
2 Types Of Section 02 -- 02 04
3 I.C. Engine 02 04 06 12
4 Heat Transfer 06 04 04 14
5 Properties of Fluids 02 04 04 10
6 Power Transmission Device 04 04 02 10
7 Pumps and Compressors 04 -- 04 08
8 Introduction to Industrial Hydraulics 02 04 06 12
and Pneumatics
B. TERMWORK
Sr.
No.
1 Sectional Orthographic Views – One Sheet Understanding of Views
Understanding of Drawing and Sections of
2 Drawing of I.C.Engines components – One Sheet
various parts.
Blue print of the above sheet.
3 Understanding of Blue print reading.
Demonstration of I.C. Engine.
4 Starting and running of engine.
Demonstration of Compressor.
5 Starting and running of compressor.
Demonstration of Pumps – Centrifugal &
6 Starting and running of various pumps.
Reciprocating
Calculation of heat transfer for a furnace.
7 Measurement of heat.
Experiment to measure flow (rotameter),

8 Measurement of Flow.
Pressure (Bourdon gauge), Velocity (Pitot Tube)
9 Experiments on Hydraulic bench. Industrial Hydraulics & their control.
10 Experiments on Pneumatic bench. Industrial Pneumatics & their control.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sr.
No
1 Attendance at regular practical 2.5

6 Safety / use of proper tools 2.5
Total 25

1. Chalk-board.
2. Demonstrative kits.
3. Demonstrative charts.
4. Industrial Visits
5. Experimental work benches.
6. Videocassette, Transparencies, Models.
Reference Books:

Khurmi Hydraulic Machinery S.Chand Co Ltd.,New Delhi
Patel Karmachandani Heat Engine Ahcarya Publication
Jagadish Lal Hydraulic Machinery Metropolitan Publishers
S.P.Sukhatme Heat Transfer Tata Mc Graw Hill
Pipenger Industrial Hydraulics and Tata Mc Graw Hill
Pneumatics
____________________________________________________________________________________________

Mpecs 2016 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Mpecs 2016 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Curriculum: MPECS-2013: Diploma in Mechanical Engineering

Programmewise Board of Studies (PBOS)

SECTION – I : Curriculum Structure

5. Path-wise Course Structure for Sample Paths

SECTION – II : Syllabi of Courses (Level-wise)

1. CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT : INTRODUCTION AND

Vision Statement of Institution :

Systems Approach of Curriculum Implementation :

INPUT PROCESS OUTPUT

• Students of 10 & Based on Curriculum

Review of SSC, Assessment of Analysis of needs

Determination of course areas

Development of course Programme

Prepare final draft including MPECS

Approval by BOS and GB

2) Answer question and proposals in appropriate manner.

3) Prepare impact instructions to pears/subordinates.

4) Write letter, report & proposals in appropriate manner.

5) Develop an attitude to work in team for achieving goals.

6) Develop listening skill and respect for other operations.

7) To learn how to use library literature and gathering of information.

8) Develop skill to work independently for problem solving.

9) To develop creative thinking.

1) Apply problem solving models to arrive at proper solutions of technical problems.

2) Develop supervisory and managerial skills.

3) Use of different types of measuring instrument.

4) Knowledge of statistical quality control techniques used in industries.

5) To apply decision making techniques.

6) Knowledge of using readily available design data.

7) Ability to detect faults and repairs of mechanical units.

8) Design machine parts by applying standard design procedure.

9) Knowledge of different types of materials and their properties.

10) Negotiation techniques in different situations.

different production processes.

13) Preparing process sheets & flow charts.

14) Knowledge of different types of cutting tools.

15) Knowledge of cutting tool parameters.

16) Knowledge of different types of lubricants & coolants.

17) Knowledge of various machines tools.

18) Understand principle of jigs & fixtures & their applications.

19) Draw, read, interpret working drawings.

22) Prepare simple program for CNC machine.

23) Develop attitude of safety consciousness.

24) Use of various safety devices.

25) Knowledge of standard procedures for estimating and costing of products.

27) Market Survey.

28) Awareness of Government Rules.

30) Layout preparation for refrigeration systems.

33) Knowledge of Garage tools and maintenance.

35) Use of appropriate software for data processing.

36) Awareness of using computers in proper way.

37) To prepare simple computer program and execute.

38) Maintenance of history cards of machines and instruments.

39) Elementary exposure to ISO.

3.1 Overview of Curriculum MPECS-2013

Major modifications in Course Contents with justification :

1. In level 1, course Engineering Drawing-1(CCE107), application of CAD software and Drawing

Changes in Implementation Strategy and Treatment :

1) Introduction of Five level courses in total curriculum of Diploma in Mechanical Engineering.

L Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

Optional Courses for Electives

Elective – 3(ANY ONE)

8 Computer Integrated Manufacturing MEE505 ECIM 5 - 03 02 05 80 20 25I - -